JP6772336B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine.

A game machine, for example, a ball game machine, draws a lottery regarding winning when a prize is won at the starting port, plays a dramatic symbol variation display game accompanied by a variation display operation of a decorative symbol, and draws the above lottery during the game. It is configured to generate various advance notices that reflect the results of the game, to encourage the player to expect to win the game, and to enhance the game's interest. In this type of gaming machine, various advance notice effects that arouse the player's expectation of winning can be displayed by displaying characters, item images, etc. that suggest the degree of expectation of winning (for example). , Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2013-248305

However, in a conventional game machine, characters and the like are merely displayed, and there are few variations in the effect display, and it cannot be said that an interesting effect is exhibited.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of enhancing the effect of production and improving the fun of the game.

The above object of the present invention is achieved by the following means.

(1) A display means (liquid crystal display device 36) capable of displaying an effect related to a game, and
A display control means (effect control unit 24) that controls the effect display in the display means,
In a game machine equipped with
The display control means
In the display means, when at least the first component (character image c), the second component (character image a), and the third component (character image b) are displayed, the first display pattern (FIG. 39 (a)). )) Display control is possible,
The first display pattern is
The second component (character image a) and the third component (character image b) are displayed in the first display mode.
It is a display pattern that displays the first component (character image c) in a second display mode different from the first display mode.
Among the color vision information possessed by the first to third components, at least one color vision information other than the color tone is different from each other in the first display mode and the second display mode ((FIG. 39 (b)): For example, displayed in color and black and white),
A game machine characterized by that.

The display control means
In the display means, when at least the first component, the second component, and the third component are displayed, display control by the second display pattern is possible.
The second display pattern is
It is a display pattern in which the first component, the second component, and the third component are displayed in the first display mode.
The gaming machine according to (1) above.

The color vision information includes color tone, lightness, and saturation.
The first display mode and the second display mode differ in the brightness and / or the saturation.
The gaming machine according to the above (1) or (2).

The first display mode is a monochrome display mode.
The second display mode is a color display mode.
The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above.

According to the present invention, it is possible to enhance the effect of production and improve the fun of the game.

It is a front side perspective view which shows the appearance of the ball game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the front side of the game board of the ball game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the control device of the ball game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which provides the explanation of the hit type of the ball game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which provides the explanation of the screen display of the liquid crystal display device which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which provides the explanation of the look-ahead notice effect which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of the main control side which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process of the main control side which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol management process in FIG. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing a start port check process used in the special figure 1 start port check process and the special figure 2 start port check process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the ground state setting process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation start processing in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the fall determination process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric accessory management process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control side main processing which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command reception interrupt processing of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control side timer interrupt process of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command reception process at the time of a prize in the reception command analysis process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the variation pattern designation command reception process in the command analysis process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the decorative symbol designation command reception process in the command analysis process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the launch guidance information control processing in FIG. It is a figure which shows the launch guidance information output start processing in FIG. It is a figure which shows the launch guidance information output end processing in FIG. It is a figure which showed the list of Embodiments 1-6 which makes a left-handed guidance notification of this invention. It is a figure which showed the relationship between the launch guidance information notification and the treasure box effect in Embodiment 1 of this invention at the time of right-handed notification and the time of left-handed notification. It is a time chart which showed the specific example 1 in Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is a time chart which showed the relationship of the period length between the launch guidance information notification of the specific example 1 in Embodiment 1 of this invention, and a treasure chest production. It is a figure which showed the relationship between the launch guidance information notification and the treasure box effect in Embodiment 2 of this invention at the time of right-handed notification and the time of left-handed notification. It is a time chart which showed the specific example 2A in Embodiment 2 of this invention. It is a time chart which showed the specific example 2B in Embodiment 2 of this invention. It is a time chart which showed the relationship of the period length between the launch guidance information notification and the treasure chest production in Embodiment 2 of this invention. It is a figure which showed the relationship between the treasure box effect and hold memory in Embodiment 2 of this invention. It is a figure which showed the state classification association table which constitutes a part of the transition destination mode distribution table in Embodiment 2 of this invention. It is a figure which showed the effect mode transition lottery table which constitutes a part of the transition destination mode distribution table in Embodiment 2 of this invention. It is a figure which showed the specific example of the effect mode A to E in Embodiment 2 of this invention. It is a time chart which showed the specific example 3B in Embodiment 3 of this invention. It is a figure which provides the explanation of the attention divergence effect which concerns on the modification 4. It is a time chart used for the explanation of FIG. 37. It is a figure which provides the explanation of the character notice effect 1 which concerns on modification 5. FIG. It is a figure which provides the explanation of the character notice effect 2 which concerns on modification 5. FIG. It is a figure which provides the explanation of the character notice effect 3 which concerns on modification 5. FIG. It is a figure which provides for the explanation of the character notice effect 4 which concerns on modification 5. FIG. It is a figure which provides the explanation of the character notice effect which concerns on the modification 5. It is a figure which provides the explanation of the special display notice effect pattern which concerns on modification 5. FIG. It is a figure which showed the specific example about the special display notice production target which concerns on modification 5.

Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described in detail. In the embodiment described below, a pachinko gaming machine will be described as an example of the gaming machine according to the present invention.

<List of embodiments: FIG. 24>
Embodiments of the present invention include embodiments 1 to 6 depending on the type of ball game machine in which the guidance information display is switched from right-handed to left-handed. This is shown as a list in FIG. The first embodiment (category a in FIG. 24) relates to a game machine referred to as an "immediate fall type", and the second embodiment (classes b to c in FIG. 24) is referred to as a "probability change fall type 1" in the present specification. Those related to the classified game machines, and the third embodiment (classifications d to e in FIG. 24) relate to the game machines classified as "probability change fall type 2" in the present specification. Further, the fourth embodiment (category f in FIG. 24) relates to a game machine classified as “ST machine type” in the present specification, and the fifth embodiment (category g to h in FIG. 24) is the present specification. The game machine classified as "a type including a jackpot with electric support (electric chew support)" in the above, and embodiment 6 (category i in FIG. 24) are described in the present specification as "big hit without electric support (normally)". It relates to a game machine classified as "a type including a jackpot".

The above-mentioned immediate fall type, probabilistic fall type 1, and probable change fall type 2 have a specified number of fluctuations that allow a probable change state for a long period of time (if the probable change state is continued, it will almost certainly be a big hit during the probable change state. Since it is set as the number of times that the player can win: (for example, 10,000 times), it can be classified as an ST machine type by paying attention to this point. The same applies to the case where "probability variation jackpot" is handled in the categories g to h of FIG. 24 "type including jackpot with electric support". In the case of a probabilistic state, infinity can be set instead of 10,000 times.

Hereinafter, the first to sixth embodiments will be described in order, focusing on the first embodiment with reference to the drawings.

<Embodiment 1>
<1. Outline of configuration: Fig. 1, Fig. 2>
An outline of the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG. 1 is a front perspective view showing the appearance of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 2 is a view showing the front side of the gaming board.

First, the configuration of the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1, a frame-shaped front frame 2 is attached to the front surface of a wooden outer frame 4 so as to be openable and closable, and a game is played in a game board storage frame (not shown) attached to the back surface of the front frame 2. It has a configuration in which a board 3 (see FIG. 2) is mounted and a game area 3a formed on the surface of the game board 3 faces the opening of the front frame 2. A glass door 6 that supports transparent glass is provided on the front side of the game area 3a.

A key cylinder (not shown) for unlocking the door is provided on the front side of the glass door 6, and if a key is inserted into this key cylinder and operated on one side, the locked state of the glass door 6 with respect to the front frame 2 can be obtained. By operating the other side, the locked state of the front frame 2 with respect to the outer frame 4 can be released and the front frame 2 can be opened to the front side.

Below the glass door 6, a front operation panel 7 that is pivotally supported by a hinge (not shown) on the front frame 2 is arranged. The front operation panel 7 is provided with an upper saucer unit 8, and the upper saucer unit 8 is formed with an upper saucer 9 for storing the discharged game balls.

Further, the upper saucer unit 8 has a ball removal button 14 for pulling out the game balls stored in the upper saucer 9 below the pachinko game machine 1, and a game ball lending device (not shown) on the pachinko hall island facility side. On the other hand, a ball lending button 11 for requesting the payout of the game ball and a card return button 12 for requesting the return of the valuable value medium inserted in the game ball lending device are provided.

Further, the upper saucer unit 8 is configured to be operable by a player, and is used when changing a specific effect (for example, a player participation type effect) before and after the operation, and is used as a first effect button (normal button). ), The second effect button (rotating light button), and the "frame effect button 13" that plays an active role as the third effect button (rolling button) are provided. The frame effect button 13 can be operated (input can be accepted) during a specific effect or during a specific period, and by operating the frame effect button 13 during the operable period (input acceptance period), the effect can be changed. It works as a "directing operation means" to bring.

A launch operation handle 15 for operating the launch device 32 (see FIG. 3) is provided on the right end side of the front operation panel 7. Further, speakers 46 that produce a sound effect (sound effect) by sound are provided on both sides of the upper part of the front frame 2 and on the upper side of the firing operation handle 15. Further, a plurality of decorative lamps 45 that produce a light effect by decorating the light are provided in various places of the glass door 6.

(Game board: Fig. 2)
Next, the configuration of the game board 3 will be described with reference to FIG. The game board 3 shown in FIG. 2 is mainly composed of a substantially square wooden plywood or resin board. As shown in the figure, a ball guide rail 5 for guiding the launched game ball is annularly mounted on the game board 3 as a board surface partition member, and a substantially circular region surrounded by the ball guide rail 5 is formed on the game board 3. It is a game area 3a, and the four corners are non-game areas.

In the substantially central portion of the game area 3a, for example, in three (left, middle, right) display areas (symbol variation display areas), a plurality of types of decorative symbols (for example, symbols, characters, symbols, etc.) are independently used. A liquid crystal display device 36 (LCD: Liquid Crystal Display) capable of variable display and stop display of the left symbol (corresponding to the left display area), the middle symbol (corresponding to the middle display area), and the right symbol (corresponding to the right display area) is provided. Has been done. The liquid crystal display device 36 displays various effects as images under the control of the effect control unit 24, which will be described later.

Further, in the game area 3a, a center decoration 48 is provided so as to surround the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 in a long-winded manner. The center decoration 48 protects the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 from the surrounding game balls, and makes it possible to distribute the flow path of the game balls to the left and right depending on the launch strength or stroke length of the game balls ( It works as a flow path distribution means). In the present embodiment, the center decoration 48 is arranged in the substantially central portion of the game area 3a so that the flow paths of the game balls are formed on both upper sides (left side and right side) in the game area 3a. However, in the case of this embodiment, the center decoration 48 has a shape slightly bulging to the right.

The center decoration 48 is provided along the front side of the game board 3 and forms the front mounting plate 48a fixed to the game board 3 by a fixing screw or the like, and the outer periphery of the center decoration 48 to display the liquid crystal display device 36. It is integrally equipped with an armor frame portion 48b that surrounds the screen. Almost the entire armor frame portion 48b projects forward from the front mounting plate 48a, and the armor frame portion 48b is adapted to prevent the game ball from entering the inside thereof, that is, the liquid crystal display device 36 side. A floating area through which the game ball can pass is formed between the upper surface of the center decoration 48 and the ball guide rail 5, and the game ball is guided to the right side as well. The game ball driven into the upper side of the game area 3a by the launching device 32 is distributed to the left and right on the upper side of the armor frame portion 48b, and is divided into a left flow path 3b on the left side of the center decoration 48 and a right flow path 3c on the right side. Flow down one of them. Such a center decoration 48 acts as a game ball falling direction changing member (falling direction changing means) for changing the falling direction of the game ball.

Although not shown, in the center decoration 48, a game ball entered from a ball entry port (not shown) provided on the left side of the armor frame portion 48b is placed in the lower front side of the liquid crystal display device 36 in the left-right direction. There is a stage that allows the body to freely roll and drop from the center drop port (starting port guide path) in the left-right direction or from both the left and right sides. Further, the center decoration 48 is provided with a movable body accessory (clock board portion 81, flower-shaped accessory 90, etc., which will be described later) that exerts a visual effect depending on the operation mode thereof.

In addition, the non-game area near the upper right edge (upper right corner) of the game board 3 is a various function display unit, and the 7-segment display (with dots) is started at the upper start port 34 (for the first special symbol) and the lower start. A special symbol display device 38a (first special symbol display means) and a special symbol display device 38b (second special symbol display means) configured side by side corresponding to the mouth 35 (for the second special symbol). Is provided. In the above-mentioned special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, the special symbol variation display game is executed by the variation display operation of the "special symbol" represented by the 7-segment display (variation display operation that sets the variation start and variation stop). It has become. The liquid crystal display device 36 described above changes the decorative symbol by the image in time with the variable display of the special symbol by the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, and displays a notice effect (for example, an effect image display). Along with this, decorative symbol variation display games are being executed (details of these symbol variation display games will be described later).

Further, in the various function display units, a composite display device (LED display for holding composite display) 38c composed of a 7-segment display (with dots) is arranged next to the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b. The compound is called the display of the number of balls on hold for special symbol 1, the display of the number of balls on hold for special symbol 2, the fluctuation time shortening function is in operation (during time reduction), and in the high probability state (during high probability). This is because it is a hold / time saving / high-accuracy composite display device (hereinafter, simply referred to as “composite display device”) having five display functions called status notification.

Further, the various function display units are provided with a normal symbol display device 39a (normal symbol display means) in which a plurality of (two in this embodiment) LEDs are arranged next to the composite display device 38c. In this ordinary symbol display device 39a, the fluctuation display operation of the ordinary symbol represented by the two LEDs (for example, the seesaw alternately turns on and off, and stops with either side lit to determine the result. (It turns out), the normal symbol variation display game is executed. Further, a round number display device 39b is provided in which three LEDs (first to third round display LEDs) are arranged adjacent to the normal symbol display device 39a.

Below the center decoration 48, an upper starting port 34 (first special symbol starting port: first starting means) and a lower starting port 35 (second special symbol starting port: second starting means) are provided. Ordinary variable winning devices 41 are provided above and below, and detection sensors 34a and 35a (upper start port sensor 34a, lower start port sensor 35a: see FIG. 3) for detecting the passage of a game ball are formed inside each of them. ing.

The upper starting port 34, which is the first special symbol starting port, is the first special symbol in the special symbol display device 38a (first special symbol display device) (hereinafter, the first special symbol is referred to as "special symbol 1". It is a winning opening related to the starting condition of the variable display operation of "Special Figure 1" in some cases), and has a fixed winning rate that does not have a starting opening opening / closing means (means for opening or expanding the starting opening). It is configured as a winning device. In the present embodiment, due to the action of the game ball falling direction changing member (for example, a game nail (not shown), a windmill 44, a center decoration 48, etc.) in the game area 3a, the left flow path 3b to the upper start port 34 The game ball that has flowed down is easy to win, while the game ball that has flowed down the right flow path 3c is difficult to win or cannot win.

The ordinary variable winning device 41 is configured as a winning rate variable winning device in which the winning rate of the game ball at the starting port can be changed by the starting opening opening / closing means. Specifically, the second special symbol starting port is used. A lower starting port 35 is configured as a so-called "electric tulip type" winning device provided with a pair of left and right movable wing pieces (movable members) 47 that can be opened or expanded. The lower start port 35 of the ordinary variable winning device 41 is a case where the second special symbol (hereinafter, the second special symbol is referred to as "special symbol 2") in the special symbol display device 38b (second special symbol display device) is used. It is a winning opening related to the starting condition of the variable display operation (abbreviated as "Special Figure 2"), and the winning area of the lower starting opening 35 depends on the operating state (operated or non-operating) of the movable wing piece 47. It is converted into an open state that facilitates winning (easy winning state) and a closed state that makes it more difficult to win or makes it impossible to win than the open state (difficult to win). In the present embodiment, when the movable wing piece 47 is inactive, it holds a closed state (a winning impossible state) in which the lower starting port 35 cannot be won.

On both sides of the ordinary variable winning device 41, three general winning openings 43 are arranged on the left side and one on the right side, for a total of four general winning openings for detecting the passage of a game ball. A sensor 43a (see FIG. 3) is formed.

Further, an ordinary symbol start port 37 composed of a passing gate (specific passing area) through which a game ball can pass is provided diagonally upward to the right of the ordinary variable winning device 41, that is, above the middle portion of the right flow path 3c. .. The normal symbol start port 37 (third starting means) is a winning opening related to a variable display operation of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display device 39a, and inside the normal symbol start port 37, a normal symbol start port for detecting a passing game ball. A sensor 37a (see FIG. 3) is formed. In the present embodiment, the normal symbol start port 37 is formed only on the right flow path 3c side, and is not formed on the left flow path 3b side. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be formed only in the left flow path 3b, or may be formed in each of both flow paths.

In the middle of the route from the normal symbol start port 37 in the right flow path 3c to the normal variable winning device 41, the large winning opening 50 can be opened or expanded by the recessed open door 52b. A device 52 (special electric accessory) is provided, and a large winning opening sensor 52a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has entered the large winning opening 50 is formed inside the device 52 (special electric accessory).

The circumference of the large winning opening 50 is a bulging portion (decorative member) 55 bulging from the surface of the game board 3, and the upper side 55a of the bulging portion 55 forms a downstream guide portion of the right flow path 3c. There is. If the large winning opening 50 is closed by the open door 52b (the large winning opening is closed), the downstream guide portion of the right flow path 3c (by forming a surface continuous with the upper side 55a of the bulging portion 55). It is designed to form a part of the upper side 55a). Further, in the downstream region of the right flow path 3c, in the region above the upper side 55a of the bulge portion 55, to be exact, in the game region above the grand prize opening 50, the flow path correction plate is substantially parallel to the flow direction of the game ball. The 51d is projected so as to move the flowing game ball toward the large winning opening 50.

The process of entering the game ball into the grand prize opening 50 is as follows. The game ball that has passed through the floating area between the upper surface of the center decoration 48 and the ball guide rail 5 is on the top surface (upper side) 55a of the bulging portion 55 that protrudes from the game board 3 and functions as a guide for the game ball. It flows down along. Then, the game ball comes into contact with the right end of the flow path correction plate 51d protruding from the three surfaces of the game board, whereby the flow direction of the game ball is corrected to the direction (downward direction) of the large winning opening 50. At this time, if the large winning opening 50 is covered by the retractable open door 52b (the large winning opening is closed), the game balls roll on the large winning opening 50, and the game balls have a predetermined arrangement (not shown). The game nail guides the player in the direction of the tulip-type normal variable winning device 41 (lower starting port 35). At this time, if the lower start opening 35 is in a winning state (starting opening open state), the game ball can win the lower starting opening 35. On the other hand, if the open door 52b is retracted into the game board surface and the large winning opening 50 is open (the large winning opening 50 is open), the game ball is guided into the large winning opening 50. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player aims at the launch position on the special variable winning device 52 side (when the gaming ball is aimed so as to pass through the right flow path 3c), the upper start is performed. The game ball is difficult to be guided or is not guided to the mouth 34 side. Therefore, in the "large winning opening closed state", it is difficult or impossible to win the starting openings 34 and 35 unless the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 operates.

When the above-mentioned winning means belongs to either the left or right flow path, that is, whether the game ball flowing down the left flow path 3b or the right flow path 3c can win a prize, the winning means belonging to the left flow path 3b. There are an upper start port 34, a lower start port 35, and three general winning ports 43 on the left side, and the winning means belonging to the right flow flow path 3c include an upper start port 34, a lower start port 35, and a normal symbol start port. There are 37, a large winning opening 50, and one general winning opening 43 on the right side.

The lower starting port 35 belongs to both the left flow path 3b and the right flow path 3c as long as the movable wing piece 47 is open (starting port open state), and a prize can be won from either the left or right flow path. It has become. However, since the movable wing piece 47 of the lower starting port 35 is operated by the passage (winning) of the game ball through the normal symbol starting port 37 located on the right side of the game area 3a, it is substantially right-flowing. It can be said that it belongs only to the route 3c. Further, the upper starting port 34 generally belongs only to the left flow path 3b or the left flow path 3b, and it is difficult or impossible to win a prize for the game ball from the right flow path 3c. That is, the arrangement of the game nails and other game parts in the game area 3a is such that the game ball (including the game ball that has passed through the stage of the center decoration 48) that has flowed down the left flow path 3b is set as the upper start port. A game ball that can be guided to 34 but has flowed down the right flow path 3c is arranged so as to form a taxiway that is difficult or not guided to the upper start port 34. Further, the large winning opening 50 belongs only to the right flow path 3c, and only the game ball from the right flow path 3c can win a prize.

Each winning opening such as the upper starting opening 34, the lower starting opening 35, the normal symbol starting opening 37, the large winning opening 50, or the general winning opening 43 functions as a winning means arranged in the game area 3a, and also , The upper start opening sensor 34a, the lower start opening sensor 35a, the normal symbol start opening sensor 37a, the large winning opening sensor 52a, or the general winning opening sensor 43a and the like are detection switches (winning detection switches) that have entered the winning means. It functions as a winning detection means for detecting a ball.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, if there is a prize in a prize opening other than the normal symbol start opening 37 among the various winning openings provided in the game area 3a, each winning opening is promised. The number of prize balls per winning ball (for example, 3 for the upper starting port 34 or the lower starting port 35, 13 for the large winning opening 50, and 10 for the general winning opening 43) is the game ball payout device 19 (Fig. 3) is to be paid out. The game balls that do not win in each winning opening are discharged from the game area 3a through the out opening 49. Here, the "winning" is not a structure in which the winning opening takes in the game ball inside, or the winning opening takes in the game ball inside, but a winning opening consisting of a passing gate (for example, a normal symbol start opening 37). If is, it means that the game ball passes through the gate. In fact, when the game ball is detected by each winning detection switch formed for each winning opening, "winning" is displayed in the winning opening. Treated as occurring. The game ball related to this winning is also referred to as a "winning ball".

<Movable body accessory>
Further, in the area of the game board, a plurality of movable body accessories having a visual effect are arranged at positions that do not interfere with the flow of the game ball. In this example, the first movable body accessory (clock-shaped accessory) 80 is arranged on the upper right side of the center decoration 48, that is, at a position that does not interfere with the flow of the game ball passing through the right flow path 3c, and diagonally below the right. A second movable accessory (flower-shaped accessory 90) is arranged on the side. Further, a third movable body accessory (a translucent spherical movable body 73 containing a rotating light 62 and a light emitting device) is integrally incorporated in the frame effect button 13 so as to be swingable and rotatable. The frame effect button 13 is a normal button 13A (first effect button) or a rotating light button 66 (second effect button:) depending on the stationary orientation (position of the surface seen by the player) of the built-in movable body 73. It functions as a lucky pato), and when the movable body 73 is in a state of rotating forward, it functions as an exhilarating button 70 (third effect button: rolling button). Since the refreshing button (rolling button) 70 has a structure in which the movable body 73 is rotatably and rollably incorporated in or below the pressing button type cylinder 72, it can also be used as a third movable body accessory. Function. These movable body accessories operate in a specific effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect, a reach effect, etc.), and are used as an effect means for inspiring a sense of expectation of winning a big hit.

<2. Control device: Fig. 3>
Next, with reference to FIG. 3, a control device that controls the game operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 3 is a control block diagram showing an outline of the control device.

The control device of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment receives an effect control command from the main control unit (main control means) 20 and the main control unit 20 that collectively control the game operation control, and receives an image, light, and sound. The effect control unit (effect control means) 24 that controls the effect operation control (control of the appearance of the effect with respect to the effect means), the payout control board (payout control means) 29 that controls the payout of the prize balls, and the external power supply. It is mainly composed of a power supply board (power supply control means) 31 that generates and supplies the power supply required for the gaming machine from (not shown). A liquid crystal display device 36 as an image display device is connected to the effect control unit 24. The power supply route is omitted in FIG.

(2-1. Main control unit 20)
The main control unit 20 is equipped with a microprocessor incorporating a CPU 201 (main control CPU), a ROM 202 (main control ROM), and a RAM 203 (main control RAM), and is a microcomputer (Z80 system equivalent product) as a whole. ) Is configured.

The ROM 202 functions as a storage means (main control side storage means) for storing game data related to game motion control, and stores various data necessary for game motion control in addition to a control program that describes a game motion control procedure. ing. Further, the RAM 203 functions as a work area or a buffer memory, and data necessary for the progress of the game is stored and used according to the processing state. Further, the RAM 203 functions as a random number counter used for a specific lottery (for example, a variable pattern lottery related to a special symbol), and functions as a random number generation means for generating random numbers by software.

Although not shown, the main control unit 20 provides the Z80 system with a CTC (Counter Timer Circuit) that provides a periodic interrupt, a fixed-period pulse output creation function (bit rate generator), and a time measurement function, and a CPU. It is also equipped with an interrupt controller circuit and counter circuit that perform interrupt functions (including an interrupt prohibition function) such as timer interrupt that gives an interrupt signal. The counter circuit is configured to include a random number generation circuit that generates a random number in a certain range in terms of hardware and a sampling circuit that samples a random number value at a predetermined timing from the random number generation circuit, and serves as a 16-bit counter as a whole. work. The CPU 201 sends an instruction to the sampling circuit according to the processing state to acquire the numerical value indicated by the random number generation circuit as an internal lottery random number value (random number size: 65536), and obtains the random number value as a big hit. Used for lottery.

The main control unit 20 detects the passage of the upper starting port 34a for detecting the winning of the upper starting port 34, the lower starting port sensor 35a for detecting the winning of the lower starting port 35, and the normal symbol starting port 37. The normal symbol start port sensor 37a, the large winning opening sensor 52a that detects the winning of the large winning opening 50, the general winning opening sensor 43a that detects the winning of the general winning opening 43, and the illegal act against the pachinko gaming machine 1 ( The fraud detection sensor 99 that detects the goto action) is connected, and the main control unit 20 can receive the detection signals from these.

Further, the main control unit 20 includes a normal electric accessory solenoid 41c for controlling the opening and closing of the movable wing piece 47 of the lower starting port 35, and a large winning opening solenoid 52c for opening and closing the opening door 52b of the large winning opening 50. Is connected, and the main control unit 20 can transmit control signals for controlling them.

Further, the special symbol display device 38a and the special symbol display device 38b are connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for display control of the special symbol. Further, a normal symbol display device 39a is connected to the main control unit 20, and a control signal for displaying and controlling the normal symbol can be transmitted.

Further, the composite display device 38c and the round number display device 39b are connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for display control of the information displayed on the main control unit 20. .. Round number display device 39b

Further, an external centralized terminal board 21 for a frame is connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 provides information on game progress (for example, jackpot winning information, prize ball number information, symbol variation display game execution number information, etc.). Can be transmitted to the hall computer HC installed outside the game machine via the external centralized terminal board 21 for the frame.

Further, the main control unit 20 can transmit various effect control commands including information on the special symbol variation display game and information on the error to the effect control unit 24 according to the processing state. Such an effect control command from the main control unit 20 is produced by one-way communication in order to prevent an illegal signal due to an external goto action from being input to the main control unit 20 via the effect control unit 24. It is transmitted to the control unit 24.

A payout control board (payout control unit) 29 is connected to the main control unit 20, and the payout control board 29 is connected to a launch control board (launch control unit) 28 that controls the launch device 32 and a game ball. A game ball payout device (game ball payout means) 19 for performing the above is connected. The main control unit 20 can transmit a control command related to payout (payout control command for specifying the number of prize balls) to the payout control board 29. The main roles of the payout control board 29 are reception of a payout control command from the main control unit 20, prize ball payout control of the game ball payout device 19 based on the payout control command, and transmission of a payout status signal to the main control unit 20. And so on.

A payout control board (payout control unit) 29 is connected to the main control unit 20, and the payout control board 29 is connected to a launch control board (launch control unit) 28 that controls the launch device 32 and a game ball. A game ball payout device (game ball payout means) 19 for performing the above is connected. The main control unit 20 can transmit a control command related to payout (payout control command for specifying the number of prize balls) to the payout control board 29. The main role of the payout control board 29 is to receive a payout control command from the main control unit 20, and to control the prize ball payout of the game ball payout device 19 based on the payout control command (control of the payout motor for driving the ball payout mechanism unit). ), Transmission of a payout status signal to the main control unit 20 and the like.

Further, the payout control board 29 can transmit a launch control signal to the launch control board 28. The launch control board 28 controls energization of the launch solenoid (not shown) provided in the launch device 32 based on the launch control signal, and realizes a game ball launch operation by operating the launch operation handle 15. ..

(2-2. Production control unit 24)
The effect control unit 24 is mainly composed of a microcomputer equipped with a CPU 241 (effect control CPU), a ROM 242 (effect control ROM), and a RAM 243 (effect control RAM). An interrupt controller circuit having an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function) such as a sound source IC, a CTC, and a timer interrupt, and a counter circuit for generating a random number in hardware are provided. The ROM 242 functions as a storage means (storage means on the effect control side) for storing game data related to the effect operation control, and stores various data necessary for the effect operation control in addition to the effect control program in which the effect control procedure is described. Has been done. Further, the RAM 243 functions as a work area or a buffer memory, and data necessary for displaying the effect is stored and used according to the processing state. Further, the RAM 203 functions as a random number counter for the random number for the production lottery used for the lottery of the production, and works as a random number generation means for generating the random number by software.

The main roles of the effect control unit 24 are receiving the effect control command from the main control unit 20, determining the effect selection based on the effect control command, controlling the image display of the liquid crystal display device 36, controlling the sound of the speaker 46, and the decorative lamp. Light emission control of 45 and various LEDs (effect LED: not shown), operation control of movable body accessories, and the like.

Further, the effect control unit 24 includes a display control unit (not shown) that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 36. This display control unit is an image ROM that stores VDP (Video Display Processor) that controls overall video output processing such as image development processing and image drawing, and image data (effect image data) that VDP performs image development processing. The VRAM (Video RAM) that temporarily stores the image data developed by the VDP, the liquid crystal control CPU that outputs the control data necessary for the VDP to perform display control, and the display control operation procedure of the liquid crystal control CPU. It is mainly composed of a liquid crystal control ROM that stores the described program and various data necessary for display control thereof, and a liquid crystal control RAM that functions as a work area or a buffer memory.

Further, the effect control unit 24 has a decorative lamp 45, a clock face unit (number display unit) 81 of a clock-type accessory 80, and various LEDs in order to display various effects (light effect, sound effect, movable body effect). Optical display control unit for optical display device 45a including, acoustic control unit (sound source LSI) for sound generator 46a including speaker 46, various movable accessories (clock-shaped accessory 80, flower-shaped accessory 90, revolving lamp) A drive control unit (motor drive circuit) for operating the movable body accessory motors 61, 61a, 61b, 63 for operating 62, the movable body 73, etc.) is provided. Here, the movable accessory motor 61 is for driving the clock hands 82 constituting the clock-shaped accessory 80, and the movable accessory motors 61a and 61b are for driving the movable bodies 91 and 92 forming the flower-shaped accessory 90. The movable accessory motor 63 is for driving the reflector 62b that constitutes the rotating light 62, and the movable accessory motor 73a is for driving the movable body 73 that constitutes the rolling button 70. The effect control unit 24 can transmit a control signal related to the effect means to these drive control units.

Further, the effect control unit 24 is connected to the position detection switch 97 for the clock hand 82 and the position detection switches 97a and 97b for the first movable body 91 and the second movable body 92 of the flower-shaped accessory 90. 24 is capable of receiving detection signals from these. The effect control unit 24 controls the operation mode while monitoring the current operation position (for example, the amount of movement from the origin position) of the movable body accessory based on the detection signals from the position detection switches 97, 97a, 97b. In addition, it monitors the malfunction of the operation of the movable body accessory (whether it is normal operation (for example, whether it is correctly returned to the origin position after the operation)).

Further, the effect control unit 24 is connected to the switches of the first and second effect buttons that can be operated by the player, that is, the switch of the frame effect button 13 and the revolving light switch 65, and the effect control unit 24 is connected to these effect buttons. The operation detection signals from 13A and 66 can be received.

The effect control unit 24 determines by lottery or uniquely from a plurality of types of effect patterns prepared in advance based on the effect control command sent from the main control unit 20, and controls various effect means at a required timing. To do. As a result, the display of the effect image by the liquid crystal display device 36 corresponding to the effect pattern, the reproduction of the sound from the speaker 46, and the lighting / blinking drive of the decorative lamp 45 and the LED are realized, and various effect patterns (decorative pattern variation display, notice) are realized. By developing the production in chronological order, a "production scenario" in a broad sense is realized.

The effect control command defines the function by a 2-byte configuration consisting of a 1-byte length mode (MODE) and a 1-byte length event (EVENT), and in order to distinguish between MODE and EVENT, Bit7 of MODE is used. Bit7 of ON and EVENT is OFF. When this information is transmitted as valid, a strobe signal is output corresponding to each of the mode (MODE) and the event (EVENT). That is, when there is a command to be transmitted, the CPU 201 (main control CPU) sets and outputs mode (MODE) information for transmitting the command to the effect control unit 24, and the first time after a predetermined time has elapsed from this setting. The strobe signal of is transmitted. Further, the event (EVENT) information is set and output after a lapse of a predetermined time from the transmission of the strobe signal, and the second strobe signal is transmitted after the lapse of a predetermined time from this setting. The strobe signal is controlled to be active by the CPU 201 for a predetermined period during which the CPU 241 (effect control CPU) can reliably receive the command.

Further, the effect control unit 24 (CPU241) generates an interrupt based on the input of the strobe signal, executes the control program for the command reception interrupt process, and acquires the effect control command in the interrupt process. It has become. Further, unlike the CPU 201, the CPU 241 is executing an interrupt process (a timer interrupt process that is periodically executed) based on another interrupt when an interrupt occurs based on the input of a strobe signal. Even if there is, the command reception interrupt process is performed by interrupting the process, and the command reception interrupt process is preferentially performed even if other interrupts occur at the same time.

<3. Overview of operation>
Next, a gaming operation related to the pachinko gaming machine 1 using the control device (FIG. 3) will be described.

(3-1. Symbol variation display game)
(3-1-1. Special symbol variation display game, decorative symbol variation display game)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control unit 20 is based on predetermined starting conditions, specifically, that the game ball enters (wins) the upper starting port 34 or the lower starting port 35. In, a "big hit lottery" is performed by a random number lottery. Based on the lottery result, the main control unit 20 variablely displays the special symbols 1 and 2 on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b to start the special symbol variable display game, and displays the result as a special symbol after a lapse of a predetermined time. Derived display is performed on the device, thereby ending the special symbol variation display game.

Here, in the present embodiment, the big hit lottery based on the winning of the upper starting port 34 and the big hit lottery based on the winning of the lower starting port 35 are performed separately and independently. Therefore, the jackpot lottery result for the upper starting port 34 is derived on the special symbol display device 38a side, and the jackpot lottery result for the lower starting port 35 is derived on the special symbol display device 38b side. Specifically, on the special symbol display device 38a side, the special symbol 1 is variablely displayed and the first special symbol variable display game is started on the condition that the game ball enters the upper start opening 34. On the special symbol display device 38b side, the special symbol 2 is variablely displayed and the second special symbol variable display game is started on the condition that the game ball enters the lower starting port 35. .. Then, when the special symbol variation display game on the special symbol display device 38a or the special symbol display device 38b is started, after a predetermined variation display time elapses, if the jackpot lottery result is "big hit", a predetermined "big hit" In the mode, in other cases, in a predetermined "missing" mode, the special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed, whereby the game result (big hit lottery result) is derived and displayed.

In the present specification, for convenience of explanation, the first special symbol variation display game on the special symbol display device 38a side is referred to as "special symbol variation display game 1", and the second special symbol on the special symbol display device 38b side. The variable display game is referred to as a "special symbol variable display game 2". Unless otherwise required, "special symbol 1" and "special symbol 2" are simply referred to as "special symbol" (sometimes abbreviated as "special symbol"), and "special symbol variation display game 1" and "special". The "symbol variation display game 2" is simply referred to as a "special symbol variation display game".

Further, when the above-mentioned special symbol variation display game is started, the decorative symbol (directing game symbol) is variablely displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 to start the decorative symbol variation display game, which accompanies this. Various productions are developed. Then, when the special symbol variation display game ends, the decorative symbol variation display game also ends, the special symbol display device reflects a predetermined special symbol indicating the jackpot lottery result, and the liquid crystal display device 36 reflects the jackpot lottery result. The decorative design is derived and displayed. That is, the result of the special symbol variation display game is reflected and displayed by the dramatic decorative symbol variation display game including the variation display operation of the decorative symbol.

Therefore, for example, when the result of the special symbol variation display game is "big hit" (when the jackpot lottery result is "big hit"), the decorative symbol variation display game develops an effect reflecting the result. Then, in the special symbol display device, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a big hit (for example, the 7-segment is in the display state of "7"), the liquid crystal display device 36 displays "left", "middle", and "right". In each display area of "", the decorative symbols reflect the "big hit" (for example, in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" display areas, the three decorative symbols are "7", "7", and "7". 7 ”is displayed) and the display is stopped.

In the case of this "big hit", specifically, the special symbol variation display game ends, and the decorative symbol variation display game ends accordingly, and as a result, the symbol mode of the "big hit" is derived and displayed. After that, the large winning opening solenoid 52c (see FIG. 3) of the special variable winning device 52 operates to open and close the opening door 52b in a predetermined operation pattern, whereby the large winning opening 50 is opened and closed, and the game is opened and closed from the normal game state. Also, a special game state (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player occurs. In this big hit game, the opening door 52b allows the opening time of the big winning opening to elapse until a predetermined time (maximum opening time: 29.8 seconds, for example), or the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening (big winning opening). The number of winning balls to 50) is a predetermined number (maximum number of winning balls: the maximum number of winning balls allowed for a winning opening whose entrance is opened or expanded by one operation of the accessory: for example, 9). The "round game", in which the winning area is opened or expanded until the number reaches, and the big winning opening is closed when any of these conditions is met, is a predetermined number of predetermined rounds (for example, a maximum of 15). Round) Repeated. The condition for closing the large winning opening 50 is not limited to this, and may be based only on the opening time of the large winning opening, or based only on the number of game balls won in the large winning opening. Is also good.

When the above-mentioned big hit game starts, an opening effect for notifying that the big hit has started is performed first, and after the opening effect ends, the round game is performed one or more times up to a predetermined number of predetermined rounds. .. Then, after the specified number of rounds is completed, an ending effect is performed to notify that the jackpot is finished, and the jackpot game is finished. That is, the jackpot game is roughly divided into each game period of the opening effect, the round game, and the ending effect. However, the round game execution period excluding the opening effect period and the ending effect period in which the big prize opening is closed may be regarded as the big hit game period.

Regarding the information necessary for executing the above-mentioned decorative symbol variation display game, first, the main control unit 20 first enters (wins) a game ball into the upper start port 34 or the lower start port 35, and specifically. , On the condition that the game ball is detected by the upper start opening sensor 34a or the lower start opening sensor 35a and the starting condition (starting condition related to the special symbol) is satisfied, whether it is a "big hit" or a "loss" is drawn. "Winning lottery (winning / non-winning type lottery)" and "big hit" if it is the big hit type, and if it is "missing", the losing type is drawn by'design lottery (winning (winning) type lottery) A big hit lottery including'and is performed (if there is only one type of loss, the lottery for the type of loss is not necessary, so the lottery can be omitted), and the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is based on the lottery result information. Or, finally determine the special symbol (special stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed. Then, as an effect control command for specifying the processing state, a "variation pattern designation command" including at least the variation pattern information of the special symbol (for example, the jackpot lottery result, the information on the variation time of the special symbol, etc.) is sent to the effect control unit 24 side. Send. As a result, the basic information required for the decorative symbol variation display game is sent to the effect control unit 24. In this embodiment, a "decorative symbol designation command" including information on special stop symbols (design lottery result information (information on winning type)) is also transmitted to the production control unit 24 in order to enrich the variation of the production. ing.

In addition to the jackpot lottery result information, the variation pattern information of the special symbol may include information for designating the occurrence of a specific advance notice effect (reach effect, pseudo-continuous effect, etc., which will be described later). In detail, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is roughly classified into a "hit fluctuation pattern" in the case of a hit and a "loss fluctuation pattern" in the case of a loss according to the jackpot lottery result information. For example, a variation pattern for specifying a reach effect (reach variation pattern) that specifies the occurrence of a reach effect, a variation pattern for specifying a non-reach effect that does not specify the occurrence of a reach effect (normal variation pattern), a pseudo-continuous effect and a reach effect. Reach fluctuation pattern for specifying pseudo-ream effect (reach fluctuation pattern with pseudo-ream) that specifies the combined occurrence of and, and normal fluctuation pattern for specifying pseudo-ream effect that specifies the occurrence of pseudo-ream effect but does not specify the occurrence of reach effect (Normal fluctuation pattern with pseudo-ream) and the like can be included. It should be noted that the reach fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation pattern with pseudo-ream are basically set so that the fluctuation time is longer than the normal fluctuation pattern because it specifies an effect that incites the expectation of winning a big hit. ..

The effect control unit 24 is time-series during the decorative symbol variation display game based on the information included in the effect control commands (here, the variation pattern designation command and the decorative symbol designation command) sent from the main control unit 20. The decoration content (effect scenario) to be developed in the game and the decorative symbol (decorative stop symbol) to be finally stopped are determined, and the decorative symbol is variablely displayed according to the time schedule based on the variable pattern of the special symbol. To execute. As a result, the decorative symbol by the liquid crystal display device 36 is variablely displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol by the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, and the period of the special symbol variable display game and the decorative symbol variable display game are in progress. The period of is substantially the same time width. Further, the effect control unit 24 controls the liquid crystal display device 36, the light display device 45a, or the sound generator 46a, respectively, so as to correspond to the effect scenario, and develops various effects in the decorative symbol variation display game. As a result, image reproduction (image effect) on the liquid crystal display device 36, sound effect reproduction (sound effect), and lighting / blinking drive (light effect) of the decorative lamp 45, LED, and the like are realized.

In this way, the special symbol variation display game and the decorative symbol variation display game have an inseparable relationship, and what reflects the display result of the special symbol variation display game is expressed in the decorative symbol variation display game. , These two symbol variation display games may be regarded as equivalent symbol games. Unless otherwise specified in the present specification, the above two symbol variation display games may be simply referred to as "symbol variation display games".

(3-1-2. Ordinary symbol variation display game)
Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, based on the fact that the game ball has passed (winning) through the normal symbol start port 37, the main control unit 20 performs a "subsidy winning lottery" by a random number lottery. Based on this lottery result, the normal symbol represented by the LED is variablely displayed on the normal symbol display device 39a to start the normal symbol variable display game, and after a certain period of time, the result is a combination of lighting and non-lighting of the LED. It is designed to stop and display. For example, when the result of the normal symbol variation display game is "auxiliary hit", the display unit of the normal symbol display device 39a is in a specific lighting state (for example, all two LEDs 39 are lit, or "○" and "○" and " Of the LEDs expressing "x", the LED on the "○" side is lit) to stop and display.

In the case of this "auxiliary hit", the normal electric accessory solenoid 41c (see FIG. 3) is activated, whereby the movable wing piece 47 opens in an inverted "C" shape and the lower starting port 35 opens. Alternatively, the game ball is expanded to a state in which the game ball easily flows in (starting opening open state), and an auxiliary game state (hereinafter, referred to as "solenoid open game") that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state occurs. In this general electric opening game, the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 is used until the opening time of the lower starting port 35 elapses for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds), or the lower starting port 35 is won. Until the number of game balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 4), the winning area is opened or expanded, and when any of these conditions is satisfied, the lower starting port 35 is closed, and the like is performed a predetermined number of times (for example). , Up to 2 times) It is supposed to be repeated. The condition for closing the lower start port 35 is not limited to this, and may be based only on the opening time of the lower start port, or based only on the number of game balls that have won a prize in the lower start port. Is also good. Further, as the auxiliary hit, a plurality of types of auxiliary hits having different opening times and / or opening times of the lower starting port 35 may be defined as a normal electric opening game mode.

Here, in the present embodiment, during the special / decorative symbol variation display game, the normal symbol variation display game, the jackpot game, the normal electric opening game, etc., the upper start port 34, the lower start port 35, or the normal symbol start port When a prize is generated in 37, that is, when a detection signal is input from the upper start port sensor 34a, the lower start port sensor 35a, or the normal symbol start port sensor 37a, and the corresponding start condition (symbol game start condition) is satisfied. , This is used as data related to the start right of the variable display game, and is stored up to the maximum number of reserved storages (for example, up to 4), which is a predetermined upper limit, except for those related to the variable display. .. The pending data that is not used for this symbol variation display operation or the game ball related to the reserved data is also referred to as an "operation pending ball". In order to clarify the number of operation holding balls to the player, a dedicated holding display (not shown) provided at an appropriate position of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or a holding provided as an icon image on the screen by the liquid crystal display device 36 Turn on the display.

Further, in the present embodiment, up to four operation hold balls related to the special symbol 1, the special symbol 2, and the normal symbol are reserved and stored in the corresponding storage area of the RAM 203, and are reserved as the number of times the fluctuation of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol is confirmed. The maximum number of stored balls (maximum number of reserved balls) related to the special symbol 1, the special symbol 2, and the normal symbol is not particularly limited, and some or all of the maximum number of reserved balls of each symbol is different. It is also good (for example, the maximum number of reserved memories on the special symbol 1 side is 4, the maximum number of reserved memories on the special symbol 2 side is 2, the maximum number of reserved memories on the normal symbol side is 6, and so on). Further, with respect to the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2, the maximum number of reserved storages on the symbol side in which the profit obtained by the big hit lottery is relatively high may be set. In the present embodiment, since the jackpot lottery related to the special symbol 2 can obtain a jackpot type that is relatively profitable for the player, for example, the maximum number of reserved memories on the special symbol 1 side is two, and the maximum number of stored memories on the special symbol 2 side is two. The maximum number of reserved memories may be set to four, which is larger than that.

(3-2. Game state)
Next, the gaming state will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured to be capable of generating a plurality of types of gaming states in addition to the above-mentioned jackpot, which is a special gaming state. In order to facilitate the understanding of the present invention, first, functions (means) related to the occurrence of various gaming states will be described.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a "probability variation (hereinafter, abbreviated as" probability variation ") function" in which the main control unit 20 (CPU201) is responsible for the functional unit. There are two types of this, a probabilistic function related to a special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol probabilistic function") and a probabilistic function related to a normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as "ordinary symbol probabilistic function").

The special symbol probability change function changes the jackpot lottery probability from a low probability (for example, 1/397) of a predetermined probability (normal probability) to a high probability (for example, 1 / 39.7) from the normal gaming state. Is also a function to generate an advantageous "high probability state". Under the gaming state (high probability state) in which this special symbol probability change function is operating, the jackpot lottery probability is high, so that a jackpot is likely to occur. Therefore, it can be said that the gaming state expected by the player is the gaming state in which this special symbol probability change function is operating. The details of the operation start condition and the operation end condition of the special symbol probability change function will be described later.

The normal symbol probability change function changes the lottery probability per auxiliary from a low probability (for example, 2/256), which is a predetermined probability (normal probability), to a high probability (for example, 255/256), and is higher than the normal game state. It is a function to generate an advantageous "probability change state per auxiliary". Under the game state (auxiliary hit probability change state) in which this normal symbol probability change function is operating, the auxiliary hit lottery probability becomes a high probability state, so that auxiliary hits are likely to occur, and the public electric open game frequently occurs. , The operating rate is improved, in which the operating rate of the movable wing piece 47 per unit time is improved as compared with the normal gaming state. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation start condition of the normal symbol probability change function is the same as the operation start condition of the special symbol time saving function described later, and the operation end condition is also the special symbol time reduction function. The conditions are the same as the operation end conditions of.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a "variable time shortening (hereinafter, referred to as" time saving ") function" in which the main control unit 20 takes charge of the functional unit. There are two types of this: a time saving function related to a special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol time saving function") and a time saving function related to a normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as "ordinary symbol time saving function").

The special symbol time reduction function shortens the average time required for one special symbol fluctuation display game (the average time from the start of fluctuation of the special symbol to the final display (average fluctuation time of the special symbol)). It is a function to generate a "special symbol time saving state". Under the gaming state (special symbol time saving state) in which the special symbol time saving function is activated, the average fluctuation time of the special symbol in one special symbol fluctuation display game is shortened (for example, the average time required for the lossless fluctuation without reach). Is shortened from 8 seconds to 2 seconds), and the number of big hit lottery per unit time is improved as compared with the normal game state. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the special symbol may be shortened due to the difference in the number of balls on hold, but in this case, the special symbol time reduction state does not occur, and other (For example, the fluctuation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode), the number of balls on hold, etc., which will be described later).

The normal symbol time saving function sets the average time required for one normal symbol fluctuation display game (the average time from the start of fluctuation of the normal symbol to the final display (average fluctuation time of the normal symbol)). It is a function to generate a shortened "normal symbol time saving state". Under the gaming state (normal symbol time saving state) in which the normal symbol time saving function is activated, the average fluctuation time of the normal symbol in one normal symbol variation display game is shortened (for example, reduced from 10 seconds to 1 second). The number of lottery times is improved, in which the number of lottery per auxiliary per unit time is improved as compared with the normal game state. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol may be shortened due to the difference in the number of balls on hold, but in this case, the normal symbol time reduction state does not occur, and other This is due to the control process of. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation start condition of the normal symbol time reduction function is the same as the operation start condition of the special symbol time reduction function described above, and the operation end condition of the special symbol time reduction function is also the same. The conditions are the same as the operation end conditions.

Furthermore, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has an "open extension function" in which the main control unit 20 is responsible for its functional unit.

The open extension function is a function to generate an "open extension state" in which the open operation period of the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 (at least one of the open time of the movable wing piece 47 and the number of times of opening thereof) is extended. is there. This open extension state is referred to as "a state with electric chew support" or "a state with electric chew support". Under the gaming state (open extension state) in which the open extension function is operating, the open operation period (start opening open state time) of the movable wing piece 47 is extended from, for example, 0.2 seconds to 1.7 seconds. The number of times of opening and closing is extended from, for example, once (when the opening extension function is not operating) to twice (when the opening extension function is operating), and the movable wing piece 47 per unit time is higher than in the normal gaming state. The operating rate is improved. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation start condition of the opening extension function is the same as the operation start condition of the special symbol time reduction function described above, and the operation end condition of the special symbol time reduction function is also the same. The conditions are the same as the operation end conditions. Therefore, during the open extension state, the normal symbol probability change function and the normal symbol time reduction function also act, so that a gaming state in which the operating rate of the movable wing piece 47 is remarkably improved occurs.

By operating one or a plurality of types of each of the above functions, it is possible to change the internal gaming state (internal gaming state) of the gaming machine. Here, in the present embodiment, the operation start conditions of the normal symbol probability change function, the normal symbol time reduction function, and the open extension function are the same as the operation start conditions of the special symbol time reduction function, so that each function operates at the same opportunity. Will be done. In the following, for convenience of explanation, the gaming state in which the special symbol probability change function, the special symbol time saving function, the normal symbol probability change function, the normal symbol time reduction function, and the open extension function are activated is referred to as a "probability change state", and among these functions, The game state in which the special symbol probability change function is removed is called a "time saving state", and the game state in which only the special symbol probability change function is activated is called a "latent probability change state (latent or latent state)", and all functions are not in operation. The (non-operating) state is referred to as a "normal gaming state". Therefore, paying attention to the jackpot lottery probability in these gaming states, when the gaming state is the "time saving state" or the "normal gaming state", the jackpot lottery probability becomes the "low probability state" and the gaming state is the "latent probability". In the case of "state" or "probability change state", the jackpot lottery probability is "high probability state". In addition, during the big hit related to the operation of the condition device, a hit game in which the big winning opening is opened and closed occurs, but all the functions are not activated for each of the above functions, and basically the same game state as the above normal game state. Placed underneath.

(3-2-1. High base game state)
In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned functions related to the normal symbol, that is, the normal symbol probability change function, the normal symbol time saving function, and the open extension function are the same conditions as the operation start condition of the special symbol time saving function, and thus these three functions. Will operate at the same opportunity. However, when focusing on the normal symbol probability change function, the normal symbol time saving function, and the open extension function individually, when at least one of these functions is activated, the operating rate of the movable wing piece 47 is improved. Since the operation rate is improved and the frequency of winning the lower start port 35 increases, the frequency of establishment of the start condition of the special symbol variation display game for deriving the lottery result of the big hit is higher than that of the normal game state. It becomes the base game state (starting condition improved state). The "high-base gaming state" here means a gaming state when a function related to a normal symbol is activated, and at least one of a function related to a special symbol, that is, a special symbol probability change function and a special symbol time saving function is activated. It is different from the game state when playing.

On the other hand, when focusing on the functions related to the special symbol (special symbol probability change function and special symbol time saving function) individually, when the above special symbol probability change function is activated, the jackpot lottery probability becomes a "high probability state" higher than the normal game state. When the above-mentioned special symbol time saving function is activated, the special symbol time saving state is set in which the digestion time of the special symbol variation display game is faster than that in the normal game state. In this respect, it is distinguished from the above-mentioned "high-base game state" in which the frequency of establishment of the start condition of the special symbol variation display game is higher than that in the normal game state.

Further, in the present embodiment, as an example of the above-mentioned "high-base gaming state", at least the electric chew support state to which the opening extension function is provided is treated as the "high-base gaming state". Under the electric chew support state, the operating rate (opening time and number of times of opening) of the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 is improved, the winning rate to the lower starting port 35 is increased, and the winning frequency per unit time is increased. Therefore, the gaming state is advantageous for the player as compared with the case where the electric chew support state is not applied (low base gaming state). Focusing on the presence or absence of this electric chew support, when the game state is "normal game state" or "latent state", it becomes "state without electric chew support (hereinafter, also referred to as" state without electric support ")". , When the game state is "time saving state" or "probability change state", it becomes "state with electric chew support (hereinafter, also referred to as" state with electric support ")". In addition, the game state focusing on the operation status of each function (special symbol probability change function, special symbol time saving function, normal symbol probability change function, normal symbol time reduction function, and open extension function) related to determination of jackpot lottery probability and presence / absence of electric support. Is referred to as an "internal gaming state". A "game state determination number (YJ)" is provided as data for identifying the internal game state.

As the types of hits to be described later, for convenience of explanation, the jackpot that triggers the transition to the probabilistic state is "probability change jackpot", the jackpot that triggers the transition to the time saving state is "time saving jackpot", and the transition to the latent state is triggered. The jackpot that becomes a "latent jackpot" is called a "latent jackpot", and the jackpot that triggers the transition to the normal state is called a "normal jackpot". In addition, the jackpot that triggers the transition to a gaming state (probability change state or time saving state) with at least a high base state is called a "big hit with electric support", and a gaming state without a high base state (latent state or normal gaming state). The big hit that triggers the transition to is sometimes called "big hit without electric support".

Here, in order to realize various effects related to the above-mentioned internal gaming state, the "variable pattern selection mode (hereinafter referred to as" variable pattern distribution designation number (Tcode) ")" described later is used. It is possible to further classify and manage the internal gaming state of. For example, for the above "probability change state (low probability, no electric support)", multiple types of probability change states such as "probability change A", "probability change B", and "probability change C" are set and managed as different game states. be able to. For details, the operating status of each function (special symbol probability change function, special symbol time saving function, normal symbol probability change function, normal symbol time reduction function, and open extension function) related to determination of jackpot lottery probability and presence / absence of electric support, that is, "internal" When focusing on the "game state", although the same "probability change state", with respect to the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, each game state (probability change A "," probability change B ", and" probability change C "(variation pattern distribution) It is possible to select a target fluctuation pattern from the unique fluctuation pattern types (one or a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns) corresponding to the designated number (Tcode). Further, due to this, on the effect control unit 24 side, the effect modes corresponding to each game state of "probability change A", "probability change B", and "probability change C" are provided, and the effect under these effect modes is generated. (Details of the production mode will be described later). As a result, even under the same internal gaming state, it is possible to select a variation pattern of a special symbol corresponding to the variation pattern selection mode, so that the variation time (game digestion time) of the symbol variation display game and this can be used. It can make a big difference in the related production. For convenience of explanation, unless otherwise specified, the game state (variation pattern distribution designation number (variation pattern distribution designation number) when paying attention to the above-mentioned "internal game state" and "determination of variation pattern of special symbol (determination of production)" It may be simply referred to as "gaming state" without distinguishing it from "Tcode))".

The above-mentioned "variable pattern distribution designation number (Tcode)" is used as data for identifying the current gaming state. When selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol, the jackpot lottery result and the variation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode) are referred to, and the target variation pattern according to the current game state is selected. (See step S412 (special symbol variation pattern creation process) in FIG. 12 described later). For example, in the case of the ST machine type (category f in FIG. 24) of the fourth embodiment described later, when the fluctuation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode) is "00H", "normal (normal state)" is set during the ST period. In (the internal game state is in the probable change state), "01H" is "ST first half (probability change)", "02H" is "ST second half (probability change)", and "03H" is "" The "ST final (probability change)" is set to indicate "04H", CZ, and "05H", "latent state". In this way, by using different values as the fluctuation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode), the same probability variation state is divided into a plurality of types of probability variation states of "ST first half", "ST second half", and "ST final". , Can be managed as sections of different production modes. Therefore, the variable pattern distribution designation number (Tcode) is not necessarily changed with the change of the internal gaming state, but is changed when a predetermined gaming state changing condition is satisfied. In this respect, the variation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode) is different from the data that is changed with the change of the internal game state, such as the "game state determination number (YJ)" that identifies the internal game state itself.

<4. About hit>
Next, the “hit” of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described.

(4-1. Hit type: Fig. 4)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment is designed to perform a big hit lottery (winning lottery) for a plurality of types of hits. This hit type differs between the case of the special symbol 1 and the case of the special symbol 2. As shown in FIG. 4 (a), the hit types in the case of the special symbol 1 are "15R long open probability variable big hit", "2R short open latent probability big hit", and "small hit", and in the case of the special symbol 2. As shown in FIG. 4 (b), the hit type is only "15R long open probability variable big hit".

Of these hits, jackpots such as "15R long open probability variable jackpot" and "2R short open latent probability jackpot (2R latent probability jackpot)" belong to the "big hit" type that triggers the operation of the conditional device. A "small hit" is a hit that belongs to the "non-big hit" type that does not trigger the operation of the conditional device. Here, the "condition device" is a device whose operation is a condition necessary for the operation of the accessory continuous operation device for performing a round game, and a specific special symbol combination is displayed or the game ball is displayed. It is the one that operates when passing through a specific area in the big winning opening. The hits that belong to the "big hit" type and the hits that belong to the "non-big hit" type (small hits) are both the triggers (occurrence) of transition to the special game state (winning game) that involves the opening and closing operation of the big winning opening. It is a hit. Therefore, a hit that belongs to the "non-big hit" type is different from a mere "loss".

Among the hits belonging to the above'big hit'type, the "15R long open probability variable big hit (15R probability variable big hit)" and the "2R short open latent probability big hit" are accompanied by at least a high probability state of the game state after the big hit game is completed. It is a jackpot type that belongs to the "probability variation jackpot" that shifts to the privilege game state (in this embodiment, the probability variation state or the latent probability state). In addition, "small hit" is a hit type that keeps the game state at the time of winning. Although "small hit" is a hit belonging to the "non-big hit" type, for convenience of explanation, it will be treated in the same line as one of the big hit types without distinguishing it from the above-mentioned big hit unless otherwise required.

When any of the above jackpots is won, the special symbol that reflects the lottery result is displayed as it is for the special symbol in the special symbol display device 38. That is, the special symbol display device 38 displays a special symbol for notifying the probability variation big hit, a special symbol for notifying the loss, or a special symbol for notifying the small hit. On the other hand, the liquid crystal display device 36 displays a symbol game corresponding to the special symbol variation display game by using another symbol called a decorative symbol.

(4-2. Hit game)
Next, the winning game by each of the above-mentioned hits will be described.

(4-2-1.15R long open probability variation jackpot game)
The hit game by the 15R long open probability variation jackpot (hereinafter referred to as "15R probability variation jackpot game") is a jackpot with a specified number of rounds of 15 rounds, and in the present embodiment, the big winning opening 50 in one round game The maximum opening time is set to '29.8 seconds' of the "long opening time". The opening / closing pattern in which the maximum opening time is set to the "long opening time" is referred to as a "long opening pattern". Here, the "long opening time" means that the number of winnings to the large winning opening may reach the above maximum number of winnings (for example, 9) within that time (there is a sufficient possibility of reaching the maximum number of winnings). It is defined as the time width.

If the above maximum opening time elapses after the round game is started and the large winning opening 50 is opened, the large winning opening 50 is closed and the current round game is completed, reaching the specified number of 15 rounds. If not, the game proceeds to the next round game after a predetermined time (inter-round interval time) has elapsed. However, if the number of game balls (number of winning balls) that won the large winning opening 50 reaches the maximum number of winnings (for example, 9) even before the maximum opening time has elapsed, the large winning opening 50 is closed. After the current round game is completed and a predetermined time (inter-round interval time) has elapsed, the game is transferred to the next round game. In other words, if either the maximum opening time of the large winning opening has passed or the number of game balls that have won the large winning opening reaches the maximum winning number, the opening large winning opening will be opened. Is closed, and after a predetermined interval time, the game is shifted to the next round game (the same applies to the "2R short open latent probability jackpot" described later).

If the above maximum opening time elapses after the round game is started and the large winning opening 50 is opened, the large winning opening 50 is closed and the current round game is completed, reaching the specified number of 15 rounds. If not, the game proceeds to the next round game after a predetermined time (inter-round interval time) has elapsed. However, if the number of game balls (number of winning balls) that won the large winning opening 50 reaches the maximum number of winnings (for example, 9) even before the maximum opening time has elapsed, the large winning opening 50 is closed. After the current round game is completed and a predetermined time (inter-round interval time) has elapsed, the game is transferred to the next round game. In other words, if either the maximum opening time of the large winning opening has passed or the number of game balls that have won the large winning opening reaches the maximum winning number, the opening large winning opening will be opened. Is closed, and after a predetermined interval time between rounds, the game is shifted to the next round game (the same applies to the "2R short open latent probability jackpot" described later). The above-mentioned "inter-round interval time" between round games is composed of "remaining ball discharge time" and "pre-opening interval time" from the lapse of this remaining ball discharge time to the start of the next round game. .. The above-mentioned "remaining ball discharge time" refers to a margin time (for example, 1980 ms) for discharging the remaining balls inside the large winning opening after the large winning opening is closed.

(4-2-2.2R short open latent jackpot hit game)
The hit game by the 2R short open latent jackpot (hereinafter referred to as "2R latent jackpot game") is a jackpot with a specified number of rounds of 2 rounds, and in this embodiment, a big winning opening in one round game. The maximum opening time of (large winning opening 50) is set to 0.1 seconds of "short opening time". The opening / closing pattern in which the maximum opening time is set to the "short opening time" is referred to as a "short opening pattern". Therefore, in the 2R latent jackpot game, the big winning opening is opened only for a short opening time (0.1 seconds), and the number of round games is as small as 2 rounds, so that the prize ball is practically almost obtained. It is a big hit game that can not be done (To be exact, there is a possibility that a prize will be given to the big prize opening, but since the maximum opening time of the big winning opening of each round game is set to the short opening time, That's less likely).

In addition, the hit-type effect during the 2R latent big hit game on the special figure 1 side (the effect that appears during the hit game) is the hit-time effect during the 2R short open small hit on the special figure 1 side. The production that is substantially the same (same or very similar) as That is, the operation related to the hit game including the hitting effect by the 2R short open latent probability big hit shows substantially the same behavior as the game operation related to the 2R short open small hit, and either hit from the player's side. It is difficult or impossible to identify whether the game is being performed. As a result, even if the player wins the 2R short open small hit, the player can be given a feeling of expectation of winning the "2R short open latent probability big hit" that triggers the transition to the high probability state. ing.

(4-2-3. Hit game by small hit)
In the small hit game (hereinafter referred to as "small hit game"), the opening and closing operation of the large winning opening captured from the appearance is controlled in substantially the same operation mode as that of the above 2R latent big hit game. It has become like. In detail, since this "small hit" is a hit type that does not trigger the operation of the "condition device", a round game such as "big hit" is not executed. However, by controlling the opening and closing of the big winning opening in substantially the same operation mode as the 2R latent big hit game, a pseudo round game is realized, and it looks as if the 2R short open latent big hit was won. It is possible to pretend like.

In addition, the hitting effect during the small hit game is substantially the same (same or very similar) as the hitting effect during the 2R latent large hit game. That is, the operation related to the small hit game including the hitting effect shows substantially the same behavior as the game operation related to the 2R short open latent probability big hit, and from the player's side, either the probability variation or the normal hit game is It is difficult or impossible to identify whether it is being executed. As a result, even if a small hit is won, the player can be given a sense of expectation of winning the "2R short open latent probability big hit" that triggers the transition to the high probability state.

In the above description, in the 2R latent big hit game and the small hit game, the maximum opening time is set to the short opening time, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the same long opening time as the 15R probability variation jackpot game may be set so that the winning of the big winning opening is allowed to some extent, and it is difficult or impossible to reach the above maximum winning number, but it is large. The opening time may be set so that the number of winning balls to the winning opening can be secured to some extent (intermediate opening time shorter than the long opening time and longer than the short opening time: for example, 5 seconds). In addition, the number of round games related to the jackpot can be appropriately determined. In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the hit types of the special symbol 1 are "15R long open probability variable big hit", "2R short open latent probability big hit", and "small hit", and in the case of the special symbol 2. Although the hit type of is described as only "15R long open probability variation big hit", the present invention is not limited to this, and one or a plurality of hit types can be defined as the hit types of the special symbols 1 and 2.

(4-3. Game state after the end of the winning game: Fig. 4)
Next, with reference to FIG. 4, a game state that is transferred after each of the above-mentioned hit games will be described. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram provided for explaining the game state that shifts after each game. Each of the illustrated game states shows a game state focusing on a variable pattern selection mode (game state) rather than an internal game state.

(4-3-1.15R Probability change jackpot game state after the end of the game)
In the first embodiment, an "immediate fall type" gaming machine (FIG. 24 (a)) is handled, and after the 15R probability variation big hit game is completed, as shown in the figure, a fall lottery is given regardless of the game state at the time of winning. It shifts to the "probability change state" of, and after that, the probabilistic state continues until the fall lottery is won.

The above-mentioned "fall lottery" is mainly executed in a gaming state (for example, a probability variation state or a latent probability state) in which the jackpot lottery probability is accompanied by a high probability state. If this fall lottery is won, the high probability state is terminated and the state shifts to the low probability state. In addition, the fall lottery may be executed when "missing (may include a small hit)" is won in the big hit lottery (big hit lottery priority type), or after the fall lottery is executed, the big hit lottery is executed. May be (fall lottery priority type). In the latter case of the fall lottery priority type, in this symbol variation display game, the probability is high before the fall lottery is executed, but the fall lottery is won, and when the big hit lottery is executed, the big hit is won or not May be drawn. In the first to sixth embodiments, for convenience of explanation, the latter game machine adopting the fall lottery priority type will be described.

In the case of the above-mentioned "immediate fall type" game machine (Fig. 24 (a)), if the fall lottery is won in this symbol variation display game, the high base game state (with electric support) is also terminated and "without electric support". It is designed to shift to the normal game state of "+ low probability state".

(After the 4-3-2.2R latent big hit game, the game state after the small hit game)
In the case of a 2R latent big hit or a small hit, as shown in the figure, the gaming state after the end of the 2R latent big hit game and the gaming state after the end of the small hit game are as follows.

After the 2R latent big hit game, the game state of the transition destination differs depending on the game state at the time of winning, and in the case of this embodiment, if it is the "normal state", it is "CZ (latent probability)". (Fluctuating pattern selection mode is "CZ", internal gaming state is "latent state"), if it is latent state, it is set to "latent state", "CZ (normal)" (variable pattern selection mode is "latent state") If it is "CZ" and the internal game state is "normal state"), it is in "CZ (latent probability)", and if it is "CZ (latent probability)", it is in "latent state". In that case, it is shifted to the "probability change state". If the gaming state at the time of winning is the latent state, the game state may be changed to the probable state.

However, while the transition control of the "internal game state" caused by the small hit winning is not performed, the transition control of the "game state (variation pattern selection mode)" related to the determination of the variation pattern of the special symbol (determination of the effect) is performed. Using such a transition mode, for example, when the game state after the small hit game and the game state after the 2R latent big hit game are shifted to the same game state, the effect mode in which both perform the same effect ( It is possible to stay in the secret effect mode) and generate an effect under the same effect mode as after the 2R latent big hit game even after the small hit game. As a result, from the point of view of production, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation of entering a high-probability state that he may have won the 2R short open latent probability jackpot and shifted to the "latent state". ing. The above-mentioned "CZ" is used as a gaming state (variable pattern selection mode) for displaying the secret effect mode.

In the case of the above "CZ (latent probability)" or "CZ (normal)", the number of times the special symbol variation display game is executed is until the end of a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times), or within the predetermined number of times. The "CZ" continues until the big hit is made, and when the special symbol variation display game ends without winning the fall lottery within the predetermined number of times and the big hit is not confirmed, the "CZ" ends. Depending on the internal game state, the next game shifts to the "latent state" or the "normal game state", and the internal game state is clarified from the production.

(4-3-4. In the case of the probabilistic fall type 1 according to the second embodiment (Category b to c in FIG. 24))
In the case of the "probability change fall type 1" according to the second embodiment (FIGS. 24 (b) and (c)), the probability change jackpot is won, and after the jackpot game is completed, the probability change state (high probability, with electric support) with the fall lottery is entered. This is the type to migrate. After shifting to the probable change state with the fall lottery after the big hit game is completed, the player continues to lose the fall lottery, and if the big hit cannot be made within 100 rotations of the electric support guarantee, the state shifts to the "no electric support state". Here, "electric support guarantee X times" is the number of times the special symbol variation display game is executed (the number of times the special symbol is changed. In the present embodiment, the total number of executions of the special symbol variation display games 1 and 2 (special symbols 1 and 2). This means that the state with electric support is guaranteed until the total number of fluctuations)) reaches the predetermined upper limit (X times) regardless of whether or not the fall lottery is won. However, if the jackpot is confirmed (winning) within the predetermined upper limit, the state with electric support is guaranteed again.

Therefore, in the probabilistic state, when the number of times the special symbol variation display game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times (here, 100 times), the electric support guarantee ends, and after that, the electric support is not provided in the high probability state, that is, " Enter the latent state (high probability, no electric support). If the fall lottery is won during this "latent state", the game state shifts from the high probability state to the low probability state, and the gaming state changes from the "latent state (high probability, no electric support)" to the "normal state (normal state). Low probability, no electric support) ”.

In addition, if the fall lottery is won during the probability change state (high probability, with electric support (100 times of electric support guarantee)), the player falls from the high probability state to the low probability state, but the electric support does not disappear. Therefore, in this case, if the game shifts from the "probability change state" to the "time saving state (low probability, with electric support)" and the jackpot is not won before the remaining number of guaranteed electric support is exhausted, the state with electric support ends. Then, it shifts from the "time saving state" to the "normal state".

In addition, if a probability change jackpot (for example, "15R long open probability variation jackpot" or "2R short open latent probability jackpot") is won during the probability variation state of 100 times of electric support guarantee, the probability variation state is entered again after the hit game is completed. .. Therefore, as long as you continue to win the jackpot during the high base game state (during the probability change state or the time saving state) with the above-mentioned electric support guarantee number of 100 times that the opening extension function is given, the next time will also be 15R length under the high base game state You will be able to acquire the possibility of drawing a big hit.

(4-3-5. In the case of the probabilistic fall type 2 according to the third embodiment (Category d to e in FIG. 24))
In the case of the "probability change fall type 2" according to the third embodiment (FIGS. 24 (d) and (e)), the probability change jackpot is won and the state shifts to the probability change state with the fall lottery after the jackpot game is completed. The type. However, in the case of the "probability change fall type 2" according to the third embodiment, after shifting to the probability change state with the fall lottery, if the fall lottery continues to be lost and the big hit cannot be made within 100 rotations of the electric support guarantee, the fall lottery is won. The "probability change state" continues until. This point is different from the second embodiment. In addition, if the fall lottery is won during the probability change state after 100 rotations of the electric support guarantee, the game will be in the immediate fall state as in the "immediate fall type" of the first embodiment, and the symbol variation display game "normal" won the fall lottery. Moved to "state". On the other hand, if the fall lottery is won during the probability change state during the electric support guarantee, the process shifts to the time saving state and the remaining number of electric support times is exhausted, as in the case of the "probability change fall type 1" according to the second embodiment. If the jackpot is not won by then, the state with electric support is terminated, and the state shifts from the "time saving state" to the "normal state".

(4-3-6. In the case of the ST machine type according to the fourth embodiment (Category f in FIG. 24))
In the case of the ST machine type according to the fourth embodiment (FIG. 24 (f)), the probability variation jackpot is won, and after the jackpot game is completed, the player shifts to the "number-cut probability variation state (ST)". In the case of the ST machine type according to the fourth embodiment (FIG. 24 (f)), the "probability change state" after the end of the jackpot game is until the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game is completed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times). The probabilistic state continues until the jackpot is confirmed (winning) during or within the predetermined number of times. However, if the jackpot is not won within the predetermined number of times, the probability change state ends and the game shifts to the "normal state" from the next game. The ST machine type according to the fourth embodiment wins a big hit (excluding a "small hit" that does not trigger a transition to the internal gaming state) after being shifted to a gaming state in which the jackpot lottery probability is at least a high probability state. When the special symbol fluctuation display game ends a predetermined number of times without doing so, it is a "probability change machine (ST machine) that cuts the number of times" that ends the high probability state and shifts the jackpot lottery probability to a low probability. It is different from the "fall type game machine" which falls to a low probability state by a fall lottery as in the first to third forms. The upper limit number of times of the special symbol variation display game (number of fluctuations of the special symbol) in which this high probability state is continued is referred to as "specified ST number of times".

(4-3-7. In the case of "a type including a plurality of types of jackpots with electric support" according to the fifth embodiment (category g to h in FIG. 24))

The fifth embodiment (category gh to 24 in FIG. 24) relates to a game machine classified as "a type including a plurality of types of jackpots with electric support" in the present specification. Here, as an example, a plurality of types of "types including a time saving jackpot" gaming machine that trigger a transition to a time saving state are illustrated. In the figure, as the time-saving jackpot, a plurality of types of time-saving jackpots (time-saving jackpots A to C) having different number of end times of the time-saving state (20 times, 30 times, 40 times) are provided. In the fifth embodiment, after the jackpot game is completed, the time-saving jackpot A is the electric support guarantee (number of time reductions) of 20 rotations, the time-saving jackpot B is the electric support guarantee of 30 rotations, and the time-saving jackpot C is the electric support guarantee of 40 rotations.

In the case of the fifth embodiment, when the big hit cannot be made within the guaranteed number of times of electric support, the time saving state ends (the "state with electric support" ends) and the state shifts to the "normal state". Here, in the production under the production mode after the big hit game, it is preferable to keep at least the number of time reductions in a concealed state. More preferably, the jackpot game modes of the time-saving jackpots A to C and the hitting effect are the same or similar to each other, and which of the time-saving jackpots is won is kept secret from the player. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware of which time-saving jackpot was won, that is, the number of guaranteed electric support times (in this example, the number of time-saving times), and how far the state with electric support is. Since it is possible to make the player expect whether it will continue, it is possible to excite the player's game interest.

Further, in the case of the fifth embodiment, one or a plurality of types of time-saving jackpots and one or a plurality of types of probabilistic jackpots may be included as the jackpot types with electric support. In this case, among the jackpots with electric support, it is preferable that the number of guaranteed electric support differs between the first jackpot with electric support and the second jackpot with electric support. The jackpot game mode (number of rounds, opening pattern of the jackpot, etc.) of the time-saving jackpot may be the same as or different from the probability variation jackpot, and can be set as appropriate.

(4-3-8. In the case of a type including the "big hit without electric support" according to the sixth embodiment (Category i in FIG. 24))
Embodiment 6 (Category i in FIG. 24) relates to a game machine classified as "a type including a jackpot without electric support (at least a type including a jackpot without electric support)" in the present specification.

With respect to the above-described first to sixth embodiments, any jackpot type may be provided as long as the object of the present invention can be achieved. For example, in the case of the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4 (a), the hit types in the case of the special symbol 1 are "15R long open probability variable big hit", "2R short open latent probability big hit", and "small hit". Yes, as shown in Fig. 4 (b), the hit type in the case of special symbol 2 is only "15R long open probability variation jackpot", but it is not limited to this, and the special symbol 1 or 2 is subject to lottery. As the hit type, one or a plurality of types of probabilistic big hit, time saving big hit, normal big hit, or small hit can be provided.

<5. About production>
(5-1. Production mode)
Next, the effect mode (effect state) will be described. The pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment is provided with a plurality of types of effect modes for producing effects related to the transition of the gaming state, and is configured to be able to switch between the effect modes. Specifically, the above-mentioned production modes include "normal production mode" and "CZ (CHANGE ZONE)" during the stay in the "normal state", which are related to the production. "CZ production mode", "latent production mode" that produces related effects while staying in "latent state", "probability effect mode" that produces related effects during staying in "probable change state", etc. , A plurality of types of production modes are provided according to each game state. In addition, during the stay in the "probability change state", there are a plurality of types of "fall suggestion effect modes" that imply a fall from the state with electric support (probability change state or time saving state). In the above-mentioned "CZ production mode" or "fall suggestion production mode", the current jackpot lottery probability state (internal game state) is hidden in the production, and the player is expected to have a high probability state. It works as a "secret production mode".

The effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) has a function unit (effect state transition control means) for transition control between a plurality of types of effect modes. The effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) specifies a specific effect control command sent from the main control unit 20 (CPU 201), specifically, the current game state (including the internal game state), or the game state. Consistent with the game state managed by the main control unit 20 based on the "specific effect control command" that includes information about the game state managed by the main control unit, such as specifying that It is configured to be able to control the transition between multiple types of production modes while maintaining the characteristics. The "specific effect control command" includes the above-mentioned "variation pattern specification command", the "game state specification command" that is transmitted when there is a change in the game state and specifies the current game state, and the "fall" described later. There are "commands", "remaining power support count commands", predetermined commands ("big hit start interval command (big hit start command)", "big hit end interval command (big hit end command)"), etc. Further, the effect control unit 24 has a function unit (effect state management means) for managing the effect mode related to the game state. The effect control unit 24 (effect state management means) grasps at least the game state (variable pattern distribution designation number (Tcode)) managed by the main control unit 20 side by the above-mentioned specific effect control command, and controls the main control. The effect mode can be changed and controlled so as to maintain consistency with the unit 20 side. The effect control unit 24 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to manage the internal game state and the fluctuation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode) managed on the main control unit 20 side by the above-mentioned specific effect control command, and the game state. It is possible to grasp the switching timing of. Details will be described later, but in the case of the present embodiment, it is possible to display a "launch guidance notification effect" that instructs the player whether the player is in the right-handed state or the left-handed state in response to the switching of the game state. It has become.

(5-2. Basic production under each production mode)
Further, in each production mode, the background as the background of the variable display screen of the decorative pattern in each production mode so that the player can grasp what kind of game state the player is staying in in the production mode. The display is basically switched and controlled to different background effects. In addition, the background image effect is not limited to the one that changes according to each effect mode, but each effect mode can be used by using a decorative pattern with a different pattern corresponding to each effect mode, or by changing the sound effect or the light effect. Suggests. This is the production of the "fall suggestion effect mode" (FIGS. 34 and 35), which implicitly implies the fall from the viewpoint of the player falling into a disadvantageous gaming state, not from the viewpoint of the degree of expectation of winning. ) Is also included.

(5-3. Production mode for giving suggestive information to inform the current game state implicitly: FIGS. 34 and 35)
Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, in order to inform the player whether the current gaming state is before or after the fall, a plurality of types of effect modes related to the gaming state are provided. , It is configured to go back and forth between the effects that suggest the effect mode.

As the effect mode, in the first embodiment, the game state is in the high probability state as the effect mode of the effect that implies whether or not the current game state managed by the main control unit 20 side is in the high probability state. Three types of effect modes A, B, and C are provided in ascending order of probability (see FIGS. 34 and 35). In "effect mode A", the game state is most unlikely to be in a high probability state, so even in a high base state with an open extension function, the possibility of a probabilistic state or a time saving state is low, and the open extension function is not added. If it is in a low base state, it is more likely that it is in a normal state. In "Production mode B", there is a medium possibility that the game state is in a high probability state, so if it is a high base state with an open extension function, there is hope for a probability change state or a time saving state, and an open extension function is added. It is a production mode in which it can be inferred that the probability of being in a normal state is moderate even in a low base state without. "Production mode C" is most likely to be in a high probability state, so if it is a high base state with an open extension function, you can be confident about the possibility of a probabilistic state or a time saving state, and no open extension function is added. It is a production mode that can be presumed to be unlikely to be in the normal state even in the low base state.

In addition, it is possible to make a big hit within the number of fluctuations of 100 times of electric support guarantee with the effect mode D, which is an effect that informs that the hold memory (holding internal ream chan) that makes a big hit in the hold is confirmed, and the open extension function. An effect mode E for notifying that the property is in a high property state is provided (see FIGS. 34 and 35).

(5-4. Notice production)
Next, the notice production will be described. Under the above-mentioned effect mode, the effect control unit 24 has the content of the effect control command from the main control unit 20, specifically, at least the variation pattern information included in the variation pattern designation command (for example, the winning lottery result, the reach effect). It is provided with a functional unit (preliminary performance appearance control means) for controlling the appearance of various advance notice effects related to the above-mentioned effect mode and the jackpot lottery result, based on the presence or absence of the command, and the fluctuation time of the special symbol. Regarding the notice performance appearance control means, in the case of a model with a fall lottery function (fall type model) as in the first to third embodiments, at least a "variation pattern designation command" and a "fall command" (decorative symbol designation command) (For example, winning lottery result information, presence / absence of reach effect, presence / absence of pseudo-ream, special stop symbol type information (winning type information), change time information of special symbol, fall lottery result information, etc.) ), Various notice effects can be controlled to appear, and in the case of a model that is not a fall type such as Embodiments 4 to 6, "variable pattern specification command" and "decorative pattern specification command" Based on the information contained in, various notice effects can be controlled.

Such a notice production mode suggests (notices) the reliability or expectation (hereinafter referred to as "winning expectation") of whether or not the player has won the winning type, and the player feels the expectation of winning the winning type. It works as a "fanning effect" to fan the. Typical notice productions include "reach production" and "pseudo-continuous production". The "pseudo-continuous effect" refers to an effect mode accompanied by a pseudo continuous variation display state (pseudo variation) of the decorative symbol, and the "pseudo variation" is a part of the decorative symbol or a part of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol variation display game. The display operation is repeated once or multiple times, such as temporarily setting all of them in a temporary stop state (a fluctuating stop operation that looks like a stop display) and executing a re-variable display operation of a decorative symbol from the temporary stop state. By this means, it refers to a variation display mode in which the variation display operation of the decorative symbol is expressed as if it is executed a plurality of times in one symbol variation display game in appearance. In this respect, it is different from the "look-ahead notice effect (continuous notice effect)" described later, which is developed over a plurality of symbol variation display games.

When this pseudo-variation is performed, for example, while forming a temporary reach state (a variation display mode that suggests that there is a possibility of a reach state or pretends that a reach pattern is formed), once. The re-variable display operation is executed after the temporary stop state is set by the combination of the symbols that are lost, or a special decorative symbol (a special decoration that suggests that a pseudo-ream may occur) instead of the normal decorative symbol. It is possible to execute the revariation display operation after the temporary stop state is set by the combination of the symbols including the symbol (pseudo continuous activation chance symbol). Therefore, in the pseudo-continuous production, in addition to the production mode in which the variation display operation of the decorative symbol is expressed as if it is executed a plurality of times in one symbol variation display game, the above-mentioned "pseudo-continuous activation" is performed. By using the "chance symbol", it is possible to include an effect mode that is executed while suggesting the possibility of occurrence of pseudo-variation to the player.

In addition, in the notice production, there is a possibility of winning a big hit for the operation hold ball (undigested operation hold ball) that has not yet been used for the execution of the symbol change display game (special symbol change display operation) (winning). There is a so-called "look-ahead notice production" that notifies the degree of expectation in advance. Regarding this look-ahead notice effect, first, when the operation hold ball occurs in the main control unit 20 (when the start condition is satisfied), the operation hold ball executes the symbol variation display game (special symbol variation display operation). Before being offered, a "look-ahead hit determination" is performed to determine in advance the result of the big hit lottery related to the operation holding ball.

Furthermore, using the above-mentioned "look-ahead hit determination" result, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (variation pattern at the start of fluctuation) when the operation holding ball is used to execute the symbol variation display game in the future is determined in advance. "Look-ahead fluctuation pattern determination" is performed (S319 in FIG. 10 (random number determination process at the time of winning the starting opening)). This pre-determined variation pattern of the special symbol is referred to as a "look-ahead variation pattern". In this look-ahead fluctuation pattern determination, for example, it is determined in advance what kind of reach state the reach fluctuation pattern goes through, or whether the normal fluctuation pattern does not go through the reach state.

Since the pre-reading variation pattern is determined by using at least the winning lottery result (in this embodiment, the preliminary determination result of the winning lottery and the symbol lottery), the pre-reading variation pattern information transmitted to the effect control unit 24 side is used. Is not only information about the presence / absence of reach, reach production type (type of reach production according to winning expectation), presence / absence of pseudo-ream and the number of times, but also the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation is a big hit (including a small hit). ) Information on whether it is the "hit fluctuation pattern" at the time of winning or the "loss fluctuation pattern" at the time of losing is also included. When the information of the look-ahead variation pattern is transmitted from the main control unit 20 to the effect control unit 24, the effect control unit 24 performs the effect control process (see S714 or the like in FIG. 18) related to the pre-reading advance notice effect. In this way, a series of processes for determining the look-ahead fluctuation pattern through the look-ahead hit determination is referred to as "look-ahead determination".

The look-ahead notice production includes the following. With reference to FIG. 5, in the pachinko gaming machines 1 of the first to sixth embodiments, the operation of the special symbol 1 side is performed on a part of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 (in the figure, the lower left side of the display area of the decorative symbol). A hold display area 76 for displaying the number of hold balls and a hold display area 77 for displaying the number of operation hold balls on the special symbol 2 side are provided, and the presence or absence of the operation hold ball is lit (operated). With hold ball: When there is a white operation hold ball which is a normal color (normal hold display mode), there is a white circle, and there is a colored operation hold ball such as blue, yellow, green, red, D pattern, rainbow color etc. The case (dedicated hold display mode) is indicated by a hatched circle) or off (no operation hold ball: indicated by the broken line circle in the figure), and information on the current number of operation hold balls is displayed. It is designed to be notified.

The display regarding the presence or absence of the operation hold ball (hereinafter referred to as "hold display") is sequentially displayed in the order of occurrence (winning order), and a maximum of four hold displays can be displayed in the hold display areas 76 and 77. It has become. Specifically, in each of the hold display areas 76 and 77, the leftmost operation hold ball is the earliest (that is, the oldest) action on the time axis among all the hold hold balls in the hold display. Displayed as a reserved ball. In this embodiment, as shown in the drawing, hold display units a1 to d1 (icon images) composed of hold icons (icon images) provided in a part of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 in the same number (4 pieces) as the maximum number of hold storages (4). (Corresponding to the special symbol 1 side) and a2 to d2 (corresponding to the special symbol 2 side) are provided. The look-ahead advance notice effect can be executed by using these hold display units a1 to d1 and a2 to d2. For example, normally, the display mode is switched to the operating state (lighting state) by the same number as the number of operation holding balls existing at the time of pre-reading determination, for example, only three. Therefore, this hold display unit functions as a hold display means for displaying the number of operation holds. However, when executing the look-ahead notice effect, the hold display mode of one of the hold display units a1 to d1 and a2 to d2 is changed to a predetermined look-ahead notice display mode (dedicated hold display mode). However, this works as a means for generating a look-ahead notice effect.

When the look-ahead notice is displayed, among the hold icons of the hold display units a1 to d1 and a2 to d2, the hold icon that is the target of the look-ahead notice is, for example, from the white color of the normal hold display to the notice display. A look-ahead notice effect of the "hold display change system" such as changing to a dedicated hold color such as blue, yellow, green, red, D pattern, or rainbow color is performed (for example, the look-ahead notice winning hold in FIG. 6 (1)). .. Here, the blue, yellow, green, red, D pattern, and rainbow colors of the hold icon mean that the winning expectation is high in the order of the holding color, and the blue, yellow, and green are the winning expectation. Belongs to the relatively low expectation production (low expectation production), and red, D pattern, and rainbow color belong to the low expectation production (high expectation production) with relatively high winning expectation, especially rainbow color. The display of the hold icon is a premium hold icon that is a big hit confirmed (correct) display. Which reserved color is to be changed is determined by lottery based on the content of the look-ahead variation pattern. Specifically, the "big hit" is more likely than the "miss", and the hold color with the higher expectation of winning is selected with a higher probability in the case of the reach type with a relatively higher expectation of winning. It has become.

As shown in FIGS. 6 (1) to 6 (4), the existing operation holding balls are sequentially digested when the symbol variation display game is executed. At this time, in order to express that one operation-holding ball has been digested, the display position of the hold display unit corresponding to the existing operation-holding ball is moved forward (shifted to the left side in sequence), and the number of the display is reduced. Although the display is controlled, the above-mentioned unusual hold display mode is continuously displayed while changing the display position of the hold display (see FIGS. 6 (1) to 6 (3)). In this regard, the pre-reading notice effect (hold change notice) of the above-mentioned hold display change system (change at the time of winning) is a dedicated notice effect in one or more times of the symbol change display game (multiple times of the symbol change display operation). It can be said that it is one aspect of "continuous notice production" that can make the appearance appear. In addition, the pre-reading notice effect of the "hold display change system" may occur when an operation hold ball occurs, and is usually in the hold display mode when winning a prize, but changes to the dedicated hold display mode when the shift display is displayed. In some cases, the timing at which the hold display is changed can be appropriately determined. Further, even after the change to the dedicated hold display mode, it can be further changed to another dedicated hold display mode. For example, after changing to blue hold at the time of winning, it can be changed to yellow hold at the time of shift display.

Further, on the left side of the hold display areas 76 and 77, a change display area 78 for indicating an operation hold ball (hereinafter referred to as “game running hold”) actually used in the special symbol change display game is provided. ing. In the case of this embodiment, the changing display area 78 is configured so that an image in which the icon of the game execution hold K currently used for the game is placed appears on the icon of the seat J. That is, when the variable display of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is started, the oldest icon (icon image) of the hold a1 or a2 displayed in the hold display areas 76 and 77 is the hold K during game execution. As an icon, it moves on the icon of the seat J in the changing display area 78, and its state is maintained for a predetermined display time. When the hold K during game execution is placed on the seat J, basically, the same display mode as the hold display mode in the hold display areas 76 and 77 is maintained, and the operation related to the current symbol variation display game is maintained. The pre-reading notice display mode (dedicated hold display mode) for the hold ball is notified to the player even during the game. As a result, it is possible to inspire the player to have a sense of expectation of winning. When the hold display is displayed as the hold K during game execution, it is possible to appear a hold display mode different from the hold display mode in the hold display areas 76 and 77. For example, the display color of the icon changes at a predetermined timing during the symbol variation display game (for example, the hold display mode displayed in the hold display areas 76 and 77 has a higher expectation of winning than the hold display mode. It changes to a different shape (for example, a character image or an item image that suggests a winning expectation or a pseudo-repeated occurrence (pseudo-repeated number of times)). As a result, the winning expectation of this special symbol variation display game is more clearly notified.

Further, in the present embodiment, unlike the pre-reading notice effect of the above-mentioned "hold display change system", the pre-reading notice effect of the "change start time change system" that is performed when the symbol variation display game is started can be displayed. It has become. The pre-reading notice effect of this "change system at the start of fluctuation" is, for example, as shown in FIG. 6 (2), a notice image (illustrated lightning bolt image) dedicated to pre-reading is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36. Is a pre-reading notice effect of the "image display change system" such that is executed in the symbol variation display game one or more times and is displayed once or continuously. In this regard, the pre-reading notice effect of the "change system at the start of fluctuation" is the same as the pre-reading notice effect of the "hold display change system", and the "continuous" advance notice effect is displayed across multiple special symbol change display games. It can be said that this is one aspect of "notice production". The look-ahead notice effect of the "image display change system" may be terminated at the end of the look-ahead notice of the hold display change system (when the hold for the look-ahead notice target is provided to the symbol variation display game), or in FIG. 6 (4). ), The pre-reading notice target hold is provided to the symbol variation display game, and even in the game in which the pre-reading notice of the hold display change system is completed, it may appear independently.

(5-5. Directing means)
The directing means according to the pachinko game machine 1 may be any stimulus transmitting means capable of exerting a directing effect by appealing to human perception such as sight, hearing, and touch, and light generating means such as a decorative lamp 45 and an LED device. A sound generator such as a speaker 46, an effect display device such as a liquid crystal display device 36, a vibration device that transmits vibration to the operator's body, a wind pressure device that applies wind pressure to the player's body, or a visual effect due to the operation thereof. A typical example is a movable body accessory that exerts the above.

<6. List of embodiments: FIG. 24>
Here, returning to FIG. 24, for each of the first to sixth embodiments of the present invention, "a mode of transition of the gaming state in which switching from right-handed to left-handed guidance notification occurs" and "timing of switching from right-handed to left-handed guidance notification" Will be described together in relation to the display mode of the guidance notification. The above-mentioned "shifting mode of the gaming state in which the switching from the right-handed to the left-handed guidance notification occurs" is a case of shifting from the gaming state with the electric support state to the gaming state with the electric support-less state. In each of the first to sixth embodiments, the contents already described regarding the transition of the gaming state will be omitted as appropriate to avoid duplicate description.

(6-1. Transition mode of game state in which switching from right-handed to left-handed guidance notification occurs)
(In the case of Embodiment 1: Category a in FIG. 24)
The immediate fall type gaming machine according to the first embodiment (Category a in FIG. 24) shifts to a probability change state (high probability, with electric support) when the jackpot game ends, and during this probability change state, a jackpot lottery and a fall lottery If the fall lottery is won first, the game state shifts from the probability change state to the normal state (low probability, no electric support) at that time. Therefore, in the first embodiment, when the transition from the probabilistic state to the normal state occurs, the right-handed to the left-handed guidance notification is switched.

(In the case of the second embodiment: categories b to c in FIG. 24)
In the "probability change fall type 1" gaming machine according to the second embodiment (sections b to c in FIG. 24), when the big hit game is completed, the game shifts to the probability change state (high probability, with electric support), and the big hit is made during this probability change state. A lottery and a probability change fall lottery are held. Then, if the fall lottery is won first in the symbol variation display operation within the guaranteed support guaranteed number of times (for example, 100 rotations), the game state shifts from the probability change state to the time saving state (low probability, with electric support) at that time. To do. In addition, if neither the big hit lottery nor the fall lottery is won within 100 rotations of the guaranteed number of electric support, the probability change state ends at the 101st rotation exceeding the guaranteed number of electric support and the latent state (high probability, high probability, After shifting to (no electric support), the latent state will continue unless you win the fall lottery, and if you win the fall lottery before winning the big hit lottery, the latent state will change to the normal state (low probability) , No electric support). Therefore, in the second embodiment, the switching from the right-handed to the left-handed guidance notification occurs when shifting from the probabilistic state to the latent state, or when shifting from the time-saving state to the normal state.

(In the case of the third embodiment: categories d to e in FIG. 24)
In the game machine of "probability change fall type 2" according to the third embodiment (classes d to e in FIG. 24), when the big hit game is completed, the game shifts to the probability change state (high probability, with electric support), and the big hit during this probability change state. If the lottery and the fall lottery are performed and the fall lottery is won first in the symbol variation display operation within the guaranteed number of electric support (for example, 100 rotations), the game state changes from the probability change state to the time saving state (low) at that time. (Probability, with electric support), but if you do not win the big hit lottery or the fall lottery within 100 rotations of the electric support guarantee number, the probability change state will be changed even after the 101st rotation that exceeds the electric support guarantee number. Continuing, if the fall lottery is won before the jackpot lottery is won after the 101st rotation, the probability change state is immediately changed to the normal state (low probability, no electric support). Therefore, in the third embodiment, when the probability change state is changed to the normal state, or when the time saving state is changed to the normal state, the switching from the right-handed to the left-handed guidance notification occurs.

(In the case of Embodiment 4: Category f in FIG. 24)
The "ST machine type" gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment (section f in FIG. 24) shifts to a probabilistic state (high probability, with electric support) when the big hit game is completed, and then the probabilistic state for a predetermined number of times. Continues, and if there is no big hit in the meantime, it shifts from the probabilistic state to the normal state (low probability, no electric support). Therefore, in the fourth embodiment, when the probability change state is changed to the normal state, or when the time saving state is changed to the normal state, the switching from the right-handed to the left-handed guidance notification occurs.

(In the case of Embodiment 5: Category g to h in FIG. 24)
In the gaming machine of the "type including the jackpot with electric support" according to the fifth embodiment (category g to h in FIG. 24), when the jackpot game is completed, the game shifts to the time saving state, but any of the time saving jackpots A to C Depending on whether or not the winner is elected, the number of time reductions will be 20 times, 30 times, or 40 times. Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, when any of the time saving jackpots A to C is won, the right-handed to the left-handed guidance notification is switched when the time-saving state is changed to the normal state.

(In the case of Embodiment 6: Category i in FIG. 24)
In the gaming machine of the "type including the big hit without electric support (normal big hit)" according to the sixth embodiment (category i in FIG. 24), when the big hit game is completed, the game shifts to the normal state (low probability, no electric support). Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, in the case of a normal jackpot, when the jackpot game shifts to the normal state, a switch from right-handed to left-handed guidance notification occurs.

(6-2. Display mode of guidance notification: FIG. 25)
FIG. 25 shows a display mode of the guidance notification in the first to sixth embodiments.

Explaining which of right-handed and left-handed is more advantageous to the player, the game machines of the first to sixth embodiments (Category a to i) are all on the right side (right flow path 3c side) in the game board 3. , It is premised that there is a winning device (ordinary variable winning device 41) whose winning rate can be changed by the open extension function. In addition, since the big winning opening 50 belongs to the right flow path 3c side, in any of the game machines of the above categories a to i, "big hit game" and "with electric support (in probabilistic state, in time saving state)" In, "right-handed" is advantageous. Therefore, a guidance notification image (launch guidance notification effect) as launch guidance information indicating the launch direction of the game ball is displayed in a display mode indicating the right-handed launch direction.

In the first to sixth embodiments, as the "display mode indicating the right-handed direction" of the guidance notification image 373, as shown in FIG. 25 (a), a plurality of right-pointing arrow images 374a are arranged in a straight line in the right direction. The "dynamic display mode" of "right arrow right movement" that moves sequentially at a constant speed or intermittently is used, and the right-pointing arrow image 374a by the dynamic display mode of this "right arrow right movement" is a decorative design or a notice. It is displayed in a position that does not interfere with the production. In the case of this embodiment, it is displayed in the upper right corner of the liquid crystal screen. The broken arrow arrow 375 added in FIG. 25 (a) may be different from the “moving direction” of the arrow image 374a in the “pointing direction” of the arrow image 374a (FIG. 25 (b)). It is added in the figure for the convenience of understanding whether the "moving direction" of the image 374a is right or left, and does not show the arrow image displayed on the liquid crystal screen. The right-pointing arrow image 374a (a group of arrow images composed of a plurality of the illustrated arrows) is displayed on the upper right side of the liquid crystal screen in substantially the same size, the same color, or the same system of colors.

After that, when the state is switched as shown in the column of "Transition of game state" in FIG. 24, for example, in the game machine of the immediate fall type (category a), the transition from the probabilistic state to the normal state occurs, the electric support disappears. The reason why right-handed is advantageous disappears, and left-handed is more advantageous. Therefore, as a guidance notification image showing the launching direction of the game ball, a guidance notification image showing left-handed hitting appears at a predetermined timing shown in the right column of FIG. 24. This left-handed guidance notification image will appear in a "newly displayed form" after the disappearance period if the right-handed guidance notification image has already disappeared. If the right-handed guidance notification image continues until just before, it appears in a "switching form" from the right-handed guidance notification image to the left-handed guidance notification image. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the right-handed guidance notification continues until just before the switching, that is, the left-handed guidance notification, without particularly distinguishing between the "newly displayed shape" and the "switching shape". A "switching shape" will be described as a typical example.

In the first to sixth embodiments, as the "display mode indicating the left-handed direction" of the guidance notification image 373, as shown in FIG. 25 (b), a plurality of left-pointing arrow images 374b are arranged in a straight line in the right direction. The "dynamic display mode" of "left arrow right movement" that moves sequentially at a constant speed or intermittently is used, and the left arrow image 374b by the dynamic display mode of this "left arrow right movement" is the upper right in the liquid crystal screen. It is projected in the corner. In the broken arrow arrow 375 added in FIG. 25 (b), the "pointing direction" of the arrow image 374b is different from the "moving direction" of the arrow image 374b, so that the "moving direction" of the arrow image 374b is different. It is added in the figure for the convenience of understanding whether it is right or left, and does not show the arrow image displayed on the liquid crystal screen. The left-pointing arrow image 374b is at the same or substantially the same position (upper right side of the screen) as the right-pointing arrow image 374a appears on the liquid crystal screen, and has the same or substantially the same size as the right-pointing arrow image 374a. It is displayed in the same color or the same system of colors or similar colors. "Similar colors" means that the color wheel is, for example, Mansell color system color wheel, Chamber of Commerce Color Coordination Chart (CCIC) color system color wheel, Nippon Color Research Institute Color Coordinate System (PCCS) color wheel, Natural Color System. (NCS) A color system hue circle, an Ostwald hue circle, or the like, which is an adjacent color of −15 ° to + 15 ° (huo difference is 1).

In the present embodiment, when the right-pointing arrow image 374a is switched to the left-pointing arrow image 374b and displayed, the left-pointing arrow image 374b is at the same position as or substantially the same as the position on the liquid crystal screen where the right-pointing arrow image 374a appears (upper part of the screen). It is displayed on the right side), and is further displayed in the same or substantially the same size, the same color, the same system color, or a similar color as the right-pointing arrow image 374a. That is, when the launch guidance information notification is switched from the right-handed guidance notification to the left-handed guidance notification, the left-pointing arrow image 374b is not displayed as an image that is clearly distinguished from the right-pointing arrow image 374a. It creates an image display effect that makes it difficult for the player to immediately notice the change, creating a situation in which it is difficult for the player to recognize the change of launch guidance information from "right arrow right movement" to "left arrow right movement". The reason for making such an image display effect appear will be described based on the timing of switching to the left-handed guidance notification.

(6-3. Timing of switching to left-handed guidance notification)
As described above, the guidance notification image 373 switches from the right-pointing arrow image 374a of "right arrow right-moving" to the left-pointing arrow image 374b of "left-handed arrow right-moving" according to the type of the game machine and the transition state of the game machine. If the time point (boundary) at which this switching is performed is observed in detail, the timing at which the switching is performed includes (i) the case where the switching is performed at the end of the symbol variation before the game state changes and (ii) the game state. There are two types, one is performed at the beginning of the changed symbol variation. In the case of categories a to i in FIG. 24, switching to left-handed notification is performed at any of these timings.

(Probability change of category a → In the case of normal case)
Category a of the first embodiment deals with the case where the "immediate fall type" is won in the fall lottery and shifts to the normal state during the probability change state, and when the fall lottery is won and the state falls to the normal state, the electric support is provided. It disappears (see Specific Example 1 shown in FIG. 26, time t6). Therefore, in the case of category a, the guidance notification image 373 is switched to the left-pointing arrow image 374b of "left arrow right movement" at the start timing of the symbol variation display game won in the fall lottery, that is, at the start of the fallen symbol variation.

(Time reduction in category b → In the case of a normal case, specific example 2A)
Category b of the second embodiment deals with the case where the “probability change fall type 1” wins the fall lottery within 100 rotations of the electric support guarantee in the probability change state. In the case of this category b, the time is shortened from the time of the fall (see Specific Example 2A shown in FIG. 29, time t6), and then the 100th rotation of the electric support guarantee (see Specific Example 2A shown in FIG. 29, time te). The time saving state continues until the time is reached, and the time saving state is changed to the normal state at the next symbol change (101st rotation). Therefore, as the switching timing of the guidance notification image 373, it is conceivable to switch the guidance notification image 373 to the left-pointing arrow image 374b of "left arrow right movement" from the start of the next symbol variation at the 101st rotation.

However, considering the case where there is no hold memory used for the symbol change at the 101st rotation, when the 100th rotation of the electric support guarantee is completed, the guidance notification image 373 becomes the left arrow image 374b of "left arrow right movement". Must have been switched. The reason is that in order to win the 101st rotation, the launch must be started in the state of zero hold memory, and the instruction of the launch direction remains "right-handed" at the time of the launch. This is because, at the start of launching, the player will launch according to the guidance notification of "right-handed", and will be forced to launch in a disadvantageous direction. Therefore, in the case of category b, the guidance is made at the timing when the symbol change at the 100th rotation of the electric support guarantee ends, that is, at the end of the symbol change (the symbol change at the 100th rotation) immediately before the symbol change at the 101st rotation when the electric support disappears. The broadcast image 373 is switched to the left-pointing arrow image 374b of "left arrow right movement".

(In the case of probability change of category c → latent probability, specific example 2B)
Category c of the second embodiment deals with the case where the 100th rotation of the electric support guarantee has arrived without winning the fall lottery within 100 rotations of the electric support guarantee in the probable change state in the "probability change fall type 1". In the case of this category c, since the electric support is lost from the time when the 100th rotation of the electric support guarantee is completed (see the specific example 2B shown in FIG. 30, time te), the electric support is lost. Right-handed is in a disadvantageous situation for the player. Therefore, in the case of category c, as in the case of category b, the timing at which the symbol variation of the 100th rotation of the electric support guarantee ends, that is, in consideration of the case where there is no hold memory for performing the symbol variation of the 101st rotation, that is, At the end (or immediately after the end) of the 100th rotation symbol variation (immediately preceding symbol variation) that triggers the end of the presence of electric support, the guidance notification image 373 is switched to the left arrow image 374b of "left arrow right movement".

(Time reduction in category d → In the case of a normal case, Specific Example 3A: Same as Specific Example 2A)
Category d of the third embodiment deals with the case (Specific Example 3A) in which the “probability change fall type 2” is won in the fall lottery within 100 rotations of the electric support guarantee in the probability change state, and the time is shortened from the time of the fall. There is. The switching timing in the case of this category d is the same as that of the specific example 2A. That is, in the case of this category d as well, as in the case of category b, the 100th rotation of the electric support guarantee arrives after falling into the time saving state (see Specific Example 2A shown in FIG. 29, time te), and this 100 rotations. Since the time reduction state changes to the normal state after the end of the eyes, the guidance notification image 373 is displayed at the timing when the symbol change at the 100th rotation of the electric support guarantee ends, that is, at the end of the symbol change at the 100th rotation which triggers the end of the electric support. It is switched to the left arrow image 374b of "left arrow right movement".

(Probability change of category e → In the case of a normal case, specific example 3B)
In the category 3 of the third embodiment, in the "probability change fall type 2", the fall lottery is not won even if the electric support guarantee 100 rotations in the probability change state is exceeded, and the probability change state continues after that, 130 rotations. The case (specific example 3B) in which the fall lottery is won by the eye (see time t6 in FIG. 36) is dealt with. In the case of this category e, the symbol change at the 130th rotation causes a normal state and no electric support, and right-handed hitting is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, in the case of the category e, at the start of the symbol variation at the 130th rotation, the guidance notification image 373 is switched to the left-pointing arrow image 374b of "moving the left arrow to the right".

(Probability change of category f → In the case of normal case)
Category f of the fourth embodiment deals with the case where the 100th rotation of the ST specified number of times has arrived in the "ST machine type". In the case of this category f, the probability change state falls to the normal state at the end of the 100th rotation of the ST specified number of times. Therefore, at the timing when the symbol fluctuation at the 100th rotation is completed, that is, at the end of the symbol fluctuation at the 100th rotation which is the end trigger of the presence of electric support, the guidance notification image 373 is switched to the left arrow image 374b of "moving left arrow right". Be done.

(In the case of division g time reduction → time reduction)
In the fifth embodiment, "a type including a time-saving jackpot (a type including a plurality of types of time-saving jackpots (a type including a plurality of types of time-saving jackpots (a type including a time-saving jackpot that gives a different number of guaranteed electric support times)") (category g to h), the time is shortened after the jackpot game is completed. One of the three types of times, 20 times, 30 times, and 40 times, is given, but when the time reduction number is not notified to the player, that is, the number of times of electric support guarantee is given by the player. We handle cases of concealment (concealment production of guaranteed number of electric support). Of these, category g is, for example, the number of guaranteed times of electric support of 30 times or 40 times of time reduction, and deals with the case where the boundary value of the time reduction length of 20 times is reached, but the time reduction state still continues. For example, when "30 times of time reduction" or "40 times of time reduction" is given, in the case where "20th rotation of time reduction" or "30th rotation of time reduction", which is the boundary value of the time reduction length that arrives before that, arrives. is there. In such a case, the boundary value of the time reduction length that arrives earlier than the given number of time reductions (here, 30 times of time reduction or 40 times of time reduction) ("20 times of time reduction", "20 times of time reduction" and "time reduction" Every 30 times ”), at the timing when the symbol variation of the time reduction related to the boundary value ends, the time reduction continues without ending, so that the guidance notification image 373 is switched to the left arrow image 374b of“ left arrow right movement ”. The right-pointing arrow image 374a is continuously displayed without any problem.

(Time saving in category h → In the case of normal case)
The category h of the fifth embodiment is different from the case of the above-mentioned ward g, and in the "type including the time saving jackpot", after the jackpot game is completed, the time saving number of times is 20 times, 30 times, and 40 times. The case where any of the time reduction times is given, the maximum boundary value of the time reduction times of 20, 30, and 40 times is reached, and the time reduction state ends is dealt with. In this case, when the given number of time reductions (20 times, 30 times, 40 times) arrives, that is, when the longest boundary value is reached, that is, when the time reduction symbol variation related to the longest boundary value ends, that is, At the end of the symbol variation of the time reduction "20th rotation", "time reduction 30th rotation", and "time reduction 40th rotation", the guidance notification image 373 is switched to the left arrow image 374b of "left arrow right movement".

As described above, the guidance notification image 373 directly notifies whether or not the electric support has ended. Therefore, for example, in the case of a model such as the "immediate fall type" of the category a of the first embodiment, the launch guidance information is switched (switched from right-handed notification to left-handed notification) at the start of the game that won the fall lottery. ) Is required, so if the player immediately detects the change of the launch guidance information, it will be grasped that the player has fallen without waiting for the end of the symbol variation display game this time. In such a case, in order to prevent wasted balls, the player stops launching without waiting for the end of the symbol variation display game this time, and as a result, there is a concern that the operating rate of the game machine may decrease. In addition, as a notice production, when a special notice production (for example, "treasure box production" described later) that fuels the winning or non-winning of the fall lottery is to appear, the fall lottery was won without seeing this notice production. This will be detected by the player, and the production of the fanning will be ruined. Similarly, in the case of other embodiments, if it is possible to delay the detection of the end timing of the electric support, the operating rate of the game machine can be increased, and the advance notice effect related to the symbol variation display game can be carefully watched. You will be able to make it.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the right-pointing arrow image 374a is switched to the left-pointing arrow image 374b and displayed, the left-pointing arrow image 374b is at the same position as or substantially the same as the position on the liquid crystal screen where the right-pointing arrow image 374a appears (screen). Displayed on the upper right side of), and further displayed in the same or substantially the same size, the same color, or the same system color or similar color as the right-pointing arrow image 374a, from "right arrow right move" to "left arrow right move". It creates a situation where it is difficult to recognize the change of launch guidance information to, and makes it difficult to immediately realize that it has switched to left-handed guidance notification. As a result, it is predicted that the player will be delayed in recognizing that the guidance notification image 373 has switched from the right-handed notification to the left-handed notification, and the recognition of the end of the electric support will often shift backward.

(Big hit game of category i → In the case of normal case)
Category i of the sixth embodiment deals with "a type including a jackpot without electric support". That is, a normal jackpot without electric support is won, and after the jackpot game is completed, the normal state without electric support is immediately entered. Therefore, right-handed hitting is no longer advantageous immediately after the end of the jackpot game, so the guidance notification image 373 is immediately before the end of the jackpot game (during the ending effect after the end of the final round game) or at the timing when the jackpot game ends (immediately after the end). Is switched to the left-pointing arrow image 374b of "moving left arrow to the right". Since the end of the big hit game is notified to the player from the ending effect, it is not necessary to make it difficult to recognize the change of the launch guidance information, especially when the state does not shift to the electric support state after the end of the big hit game. In order to clearly notify the end of the jackpot game, it is preferable to display the left-handed guidance notification in an effect mode that the player can immediately recognize. Therefore, in the case of a normal big hit, unlike the cases of the above-described first to fifth embodiments, it is preferable to display the left-pointing arrow image 374b as an image that is clearly distinguished from the right-pointing arrow image 374a. For example, when switching from the right-pointing arrow image 374a to the left-pointing arrow image 374b, the left-pointing arrow image 374b is displayed at a position different from the position on the liquid crystal screen where the right-pointing arrow image 374a appears. At least one of display modes of displaying in different sizes and displaying in special colors (for example, colors having a relationship opposite to each other in the color wheel (complementary color) or colors of a different system). It is preferable to adopt.

<7. Switching to left-handed guidance notification and treasure chest production: Fig. 25>
In the first embodiment, when the gaming state on the main control unit 20 side is switched from the state with electric support (probability change state) to the state without electric support (normal state) (when the fall lottery is won), a fall command is transmitted. (Step S425 in FIG. 13). When this fall command is received on the effect control unit 24 side, the game state is changed to the state without electric support in priority to other advance notice effects such as reach effects, or in parallel with or overlapping these advance notice effects. A "skeptical effect" is generated as a notice effect that makes us suspect that there is a possibility of transition. Specifically, as a "skeptical effect", the "treasure box effect" shown in FIG. 25 (b) is generated. That is, the liquid crystal screen changes from the normal screen of FIG. 25 (a) to the treasure box effect screen of FIG. 25 (b). In this treasure box effect, a treasure box image 371 and a push button image 372 appear on the liquid crystal screen, and within a predetermined operation valid period, the corresponding push button (frame effect button 13) is operated to perform a predetermined button operation condition. When is satisfied (for example, pressing and holding the push button for a predetermined time or repeatedly hitting it a predetermined number of times), the lid of the treasure box (treasure box image 371) on the screen opens, a pile of jewels appears, and the electric power is displayed. "Lid open effect (success effect)" that notifies the continuation of the state with support, and "lid not open" that notifies the end of the state with electric support without opening the lid of the treasure box even if the push button is operated It is a "player participation type" production mode in which "production (failure production)" appears. Even if the button operation is not performed during the predetermined operation valid period, either the continuation or the end of the state with electric support is notified as the effect result. Since the above-mentioned "treasure box production" works as a warning production that makes it suspect that the game state may have shifted to the state without electric support, the production control unit 24 side does not only receive the fall command, but also falls lottery. The above treasure chest effect (skeptical effect) can be displayed even when a specific variation pattern specification command (for example, a command for specifying a specific reach variation pattern) is received at the time of non-winning.

<About the attention diversion effect>
The true purpose of generating the above "treasure box effect" is to switch the guidance information when the game state shifts to the state without electric support and the launch guidance information notification is switched from the right-handed notification to the left-handed notification. This is to direct the player's attention from the event (display of the guidance notification image 373) to notify the other, and to prevent the player from realizing that the launch guidance information notification has been switched to the left-handed guidance notification. In the first embodiment, when the right-pointing arrow image 374a is switched to the left-pointing arrow image 374b and displayed, an image effect that resembles the left-pointing arrow image 374b as the right-pointing arrow image 374a appears, and the player is left-handed by this effect alone. It is difficult to realize that it has switched to the guidance notification, but the launch guidance is made by diverting the player's attention from the guidance notification image 373 by overlapping the "treasure box production (skeptical production)". It is even more difficult to realize that the information notification has been switched to the left-handed guidance notification. Therefore, the "treasure box production" is a "skeptical production" that makes you smell or suspect that the game state has shifted to the state without electric support, but from the viewpoint of the purpose of use or action, it is a notification of launch guidance information. It also works as a production aimed at distracting the player's attention (hereinafter referred to as "attention distraction production").

Since the "treasure box effect" in the present embodiment is intended to appear as this "attention distracting effect", it is possible to obtain the effect of distracting the player's attention from the switching event of the launch guidance notification and directing it to another. For example, another effect can be generated instead of the treasure box effect. Even if it is decided to generate another effect instead of this treasure box effect, since the purpose is to distract the player, it is a player participation type effect such as having the player operate the push button. Is preferable. However, it does not necessarily have to be a player participation type production. For example, by taking advantage of the fact that people tend to pay attention to moving objects and including a movable body effect by a movable body accessory as a part of the treasure box effect, it is possible to obtain a distracting effect. For example, as a precursory effect before the treasure box is opened, a movable body effect (for example, the flower-shaped accessory 90 is vibrated up and down) in which the flower-shaped accessory 90 is operated in a predetermined motion pattern is displayed, thereby causing the treasure box. Arousing the expectation of whether or not the flower will be released, the "treasure box opening effect" will be revealed while drawing the player's attention to the flower-shaped accessory 90. In particular, if the degree of continuation expectation in the state with electric support is suggested by the difference in the operation mode of the flower-shaped accessory 90, the player will pay attention to the operation of the flower-shaped accessory 90, and the attention will be distracted. It is suitable for obtaining the desired action.

With reference to FIG. 25, the timing at which the player participation type production starts is the game period in which the symbol variation display game in which the guidance notification image 373 is switched to the left-handed notification is performed (stops after the symbol variation starts). It is the time (starting point) when the game is started. That is, when the symbol variation display game is started, as shown in FIG. 25 (b), the guidance notification image 373 of the dynamic display mode of "left arrow right movement" is displayed on the liquid crystal screen from the beginning of the game period. On the other hand, the image of "treasure box effect" appears on the LCD screen.

Since this "treasure box production" is a player participation type production in which the player repeatedly hits the push button corresponding to the push button image 372 appearing on the liquid crystal screen, the player's consciousness or attention is often paid. In that case, the focus is on hitting the push button repeatedly and whether or not the treasure chest on the screen opens. In addition to this, in the guidance notification image 373, from the dynamic display mode of "right arrow right movement" in FIG. 25 (a) to the dynamic display mode of "left arrow right movement" in FIG. 25 (b). Although the arrow image is switched from the right arrow image 374a to the left arrow image 374b due to the switching, both arrow images 374a and 374b are moving to the right, the moving directions are the same, and the right arrow image. Since 374a and the left-pointing arrow image 374b are common in that they are the same or similar arrow images, the player does not feel that the guidance direction has been switched.

That is, this treasure chest production contains two elements. One is that the right arrow image 374a and the left arrow image 374b are similar to each other (the range of change is small), which is a "static distraction element (strictly speaking, an element that makes it difficult to be distracted, not distracted)". The other is a "dynamic attention-distracting element" in which a larger change display (treasure box effect or repeated hit effect) is performed at the timing when the arrow image changes. The former is a passive countermeasure that prevents the player from noticing the change as much as possible, and the latter is a positive countermeasure that actively diverts the player's attention from the object (display object that wants to distract the player's attention). Is. Of course, since each of these has a certain effect, not only both but only one of them can adopt the deflecting element.

With reference to FIG. 25, the guidance notification image 373 corresponds to the “static attention diversion means”, and the treasure box image 371 and the push button image 372 correspond to the “dynamic attention diversion means”. The embodiment is not limited to this, and the hold displays a1 to a4 and b1 to b4 are used as "static attention distracting means", and when the color or display form changes, the flashy effect display is hardly performed or performed at all. You may not have it. Although not shown, for example, a character image that occupies more than half of the display area is displayed so as to cross the screen as a "dynamic attention diversion means" and is displayed so as to overlap the front side of the hold display so that the character can be displayed. The hold display may be changed while it overlaps with the hold display and the hold display disappears for a moment. This is not limited to the image display, and a movable accessory provided in the game machine may be used as a "dynamic attention distracting means".

Here, returning to the embodiment of FIG. 25, when the above two elements (static attention diversion effect and dynamic attention diversion effect) overlap, that is, the player's consciousness is directed to the push button repeated hits. When the situation in which the player is in the situation and the situation in which the switching of the launch guidance information from "right arrow right movement" to "left arrow right movement" is difficult to recognize overlap, the guidance notification image 373 is left from the right-handed notification in the player. It is predicted that the time when the player recognizes that the game has been switched to the hit notification will be delayed, and the game will often shift backward within the above one game period. This means that there are many cases where the player keeps hitting the push button until the game is settled for the "treasure box production", that is, until it becomes clear whether or not the treasure box is opened. Therefore, as a result, since the fun of the treasure box production is fully enjoyed by the player, it is meaningful to provide the treasure box production, and the playability of the game machine is enriched. Therefore, it is preferable to use these two in combination, and if only one of them is used, it is preferable to preferentially adopt the dynamic distraction effect, which is a positive countermeasure.

As mentioned above, since the game machine can make a look-ahead judgment, if it is determined by the look-ahead judgment that there is a hold that won the fall lottery within the hold, the above skepticism is given before the change of the hold is started. It is also possible to start a target production. In this case, the treasure chest effect is executed over a plurality of fluctuations, and even if it seems to be an effect within one fluctuation, it means that the hold is actually executed a plurality of times. The advantage of this is that instead of returning from the right-handed notification to the left-handed notification at the same time as the start of the above-mentioned skeptical production, the skeptical production is in progress (when the fluctuation of the hold won in the fall lottery is started or stopped. ) Returns to left-handed, so it is difficult for players who are paying attention to skeptical effects to notice that the right-handed notification has changed to left-handed notification.

In the case of the first and third embodiments, the end timing of the state with electric support is not fixed, and in the case of the fifth embodiment, the guaranteed number of electric support is kept secret from the player in terms of production. The treasure chest effect related to the form is mainly used as an effect for notifying whether or not the state with electric support continues. On the other hand, in the cases of the second and fourth embodiments, since the end timing of the state with electric support is fixed, the treasure chest effect related to these embodiments is mainly used as an effect to arouse the expectation of whether or not the jackpot has been won. (This will be described later).

<Processing on the main control unit side: FIGS. 7 to 14>
Next, the game operation processing on the main control unit 20 side of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 to 14. The processing on the main control unit 20 side is mainly a predetermined main processing (main control side main processing: FIG. 7) and a timer interrupt processing activated by a scheduled interrupt from the CTC (main control side timer interrupt processing: It is configured to include FIG. 8).

<8. Main control side Main processing: Fig. 7>
FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the main processing on the main control unit 20 side. The main process is started when the power is turned on without operating the initialization switch (RAM clear switch: not shown) as in the case of recovery from a power failure, and when the initialization switch is turned on. It may be operated and the power may be turned on. In any case, when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, a voltage is supplied to each control board by the power supply board 31, and the main control unit 20 (CPU201) starts the main control side main process shown in FIG. ..

In this main control side main process, the CPU 201 first executes necessary initial setting processes before the start of the game operation (step S011).

Next, the state (ON, OFF) of the RAM clear signal, which is the output signal of the RAM clear switch input via the input port (not shown), is determined (step 012). Here, the RAM clear signal is a signal that determines whether or not to initialize the entire area of the RAM, and usually has a value corresponding to the ON / OFF state of the initialization switch operated by the pachinko parlor clerk. are doing. Here, assuming that the RAM clear signal is in the ON state, the determination result in step S012 is "YES", and the entire area of the RAM is zero-cleared (step S016).

Next, a "RAM clear display command" for notifying that the RAM area has been zero-cleared is transmitted to each control board as an initialization command (step S017). Then, for example, 30 seconds is stored in the RAM clear notification timer as the time for notifying that the RAM has been cleared (step S018). When the RAM clear is executed, the game state is initialized, the internal game state is set to the normal game state, and the variable pattern distribution designation number (Tcode)) is set to the normal state. When the effect control unit 24 receives the RAM clear display command, the initialization notification effect for notifying that the RAM has been cleared is executed until the RAM clear notification timer (30 seconds) elapses, and the initial stage after the RAM is cleared. As the effect mode of the state, the effect mode is set to the "normal effect mode" corresponding to the normal state.

Next, the CTC that outputs the interrupt signal that activates the timer interrupt operation is initially set (step S019), and the CPU is set to the interrupt enabled state.

After that, the interrupt prohibition state and the interrupt enable state are repeated until an interrupt occurs, and various random number update processes are executed during that time (steps S020 to S022). In this various random number update process (step S021), various random numbers used in the special symbol variation display game and the normal symbol variation display game are updated. The various random numbers are used, for example, to change the initial value (start value) of the random numbers related to the jackpot lottery (random numbers for special symbol determination used in the symbol lottery) that circulate in a predetermined numerical range by increment processing. Random numbers used to change the initial values of random numbers (initial value random numbers for special symbol judgment) and random numbers related to auxiliary hit lottery (auxiliary hit judgment random numbers used for auxiliary hit lottery, ordinary symbol judgment random numbers) The initial value random number for hit judgment, the initial value random number for normal symbol judgment), the random number for fluctuation pattern used for selecting the fluctuation pattern, and the like are included.

As various random number counters used for symbol lottery related to big hit lottery, auxiliary hit lottery, variable pattern lottery, etc., special symbol judgment random number counter initial value generation counter, special symbol judgment random number counter, auxiliary hit judgment Random number counter An initial value generation counter, an auxiliary hit determination random number counter, a fluctuation pattern random number counter, and the like are provided. In the various random number update processes of step S021, the above-mentioned special symbol determination random number counter, the two initial value generation counters that generate the initial values of the auxiliary hit determination random number counter, the fluctuation pattern random number counter, and the like are updated. Generate various soft random numbers. For example, if the numerical range that can be taken as a random number counter for fluctuation patterns is 0 to 238, a value is acquired from the count value storage area for generating a random number value for fluctuation patterns in RAM 203, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then store it in the original count value storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 239, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters are updated in the same manner. The CPU 201 repeatedly executes various random number update processes except during the timer interrupt process that is intermittently executed.

Returning to the determination process in step S012 and continuing the description, the RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal) is in the OFF state at the time of recovery from the power failure state (step S012: YES). Therefore, in such a case, following the determination process in step S012, the backup flag value is determined (step S013). The backup flag is set to the ON state when the power is cut off (backup flag = 5AH ('** H'means an arbitrary hexadecimal number)), and is turned OFF by the first timer interrupt processing after the power is restored (backup). Flag = 00H) is reset.

Therefore, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored from the power failure state, the backup flag should normally be in the ON state. However, if for some reason the predetermined process is not completed before the power is turned off, the backup flag is reset (OFF). When the backup flag is turned off (step S013: NO), the process shifts to the process of step S016 to return the operation of the game machine to the initial state.

On the other hand, if the backup flag is in the ON state (step S013: YES), the checksum operation for calculating the checksum value is executed. Here, the checksum operation is an 8-bit addition operation for the work area of the RAM 203. Then, when the checksum value is calculated, this calculation result is compared with the stored value of the SUM address of the RAM 203 (step S014). The checksum value obtained by the same checksum calculation is stored in the SUM address when the power is turned off. Then, the stored calculation result is maintained by the backup power supply together with other data of the RAM 203. Therefore, originally, both should match by the determination in step S014.

However, the checksum calculation may not be executed when the power is turned off, or even if it can be executed, the data in the work area may be damaged before the checksum calculation of the main process is executed. In such a case, the determination result in step S014 will be inconsistent. If data corruption is detected due to a discrepancy in the determination results (step S014: NO), the process proceeds to step S016 to execute the RAM clear process and return the operating state of the gaming machine to the initial state. On the other hand, if the checksum value obtained by the checksum calculation and the stored value of the SUM address match (step S014: YES), the stack pointer before the power is cut off is restored based on the backup data, and the process at the time of the power cutoff is performed. The game recovery process necessary for starting the game from the state is performed (step S015).

When the game recovery process of step S015 is completed, the process proceeds to step S019, the CTC is initially set, the CPU is set to the interrupt enabled state, and then the interrupt prohibited state and the interrupt enabled state are set until an interrupt occurs. In the meantime, various random number update processes described above are executed (steps S020 to S022).

<9. Main control side timer interrupt process: Fig. 8>
Next, the timer interrupt processing on the main control side will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process on the main control side. This main control side timer interrupt process is started by an interrupt from the CTC at regular time intervals (about 4 ms), and is interrupted and executed during the execution of the main control side main process. In the following, for convenience of explanation, the address value (including the data described in the address) when the CPU 201 reads and writes the main memory such as RAM and ROM, and the result information obtained by the arithmetic processing on the program. When the process of reading or fetching data into a register built into the CPU is called "acquisition", and when the CPU 201 accesses the work area of the RAM and stores predetermined data is called "storage". There is.

In FIG. 8, when a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 201 saves the contents of the register in the stack area, and then first performs a power supply abnormality check process for monitoring the power supply state from the power supply control board 31 (step S051). In this power supply abnormality check process, it mainly monitors whether or not the power supply is normally supplied. Here, for example, when an abnormality such as a power failure occurs, a backup process is performed in which predetermined game information at the time of power failure is stored in the RAM so that the game can be returned without any trouble when the power is restored.

Next, a timer management process for managing the timer used for game operation control is performed (step S052). The timer values of various timers (for example, special symbol accessory operation timers described later) used for game operation control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are managed (updated) here.

Next, the input management process is performed (step S053). In this input management process, the detection information by various sensors provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stored in the winning counter. The detection information by the various sensors here is output from a winning detection switch such as an upper starting port sensor 34a, a lower starting port sensor 35a, a normal symbol starting port sensor 37a, a large winning port sensor 52a, and a general winning port sensor 43a. This is ON / OFF information (winning detection information) of the switch signal to be output. As a result, whether or not a game ball is detected (winning is generated) at each winning opening is monitored for each interrupt. The above-mentioned "winning counter" is a counter provided corresponding to each winning opening and counting the number of winning game balls (number of winning balls). In the present embodiment, in a predetermined area of the RAM 203, an upper start opening winning counter for the upper starting port 34, a lower starting opening winning counter for the lower starting port 35, a normal symbol starting opening winning counter for the normal symbol starting port 37, and a large A large winning opening winning counter for the winning opening 50, a winning counter for the general winning opening for the general winning opening 43, and the like are provided.

Next, a random number management process in the timer interrupt that periodically updates the random numbers related to each variable display game is performed (step S054). In this periodic random number update process, the random number for special symbol determination and the random number for auxiliary hit determination are updated (+1 addition for each interrupt), and the start value of the random number counter is changed every time the random number counter goes around. For example, the value of the special symbol determination random number counter is updated within a predetermined range (+1 addition), and the value of the special symbol determination random number counter initial value generation counter is read out each time the special symbol determination random number counter makes one round. , The value of the generation counter is stored in the special symbol determination random number counter. As a result, the start value of the special symbol determination random number counter is changed according to the value of the above generation counter, so that the count value of the special symbol determination random number counter becomes random even though the update cycle is constant.

Next, an error management process for monitoring the presence or absence of an abnormality in the game operation state is performed (step S055). This error management process also functions as an abnormality determination means for determining whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the game machine, monitors an abnormality in the game operation state, and if an operation abnormality (error) occurs, an error occurs. Performs error processing corresponding to.

Next, the prize ball management process is performed (step S056). In this prize ball management process, the data stored in the input management process is grasped, the winning counter is confirmed, and if there is a winning, a payout control command for specifying the number of prize balls is issued to the payout control board (payout). It is transmitted to the control unit) 29. Upon receiving this payout control command, the payout control board 29 controls the game ball payout device 19 to perform a payout operation for a designated number of prize balls. As a result, the number of prize balls corresponding to each winning opening (the predetermined number of winning balls per winning opening promised for each winning opening x the number of prize balls corresponding to the value of the winning counter) is paid out. There is.

Next, the normal symbol management process is performed (step S057). In this normal symbol management process, a lottery is performed for each auxiliary in the normal symbol fluctuation display game, and based on the lottery result, the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol and the stop display mode of the normal symbol (the normal symbol that is finally stopped and displayed (normal stop)). The data for normal symbol (data for LED blinking display during normal symbol fluctuation) that determines (design)) or repeats blinking at predetermined time is created, and if the normal symbol is not fluctuating, data for stop display (data for stop display) (Data for LED blinking display during normal symbol stop display) is created. This normal symbol management process functions as an auxiliary game lottery means and a normal symbol display means (normal symbol display control means) for controlling a variable display operation of the normal symbol.

Next, the normal electric accessory management process is performed (step S058). In this ordinary electric accessory management process, an excitation signal for solenoid control for the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 41a required for generating the normal electric accessory solenoid 41a is generated based on the lottery result of the auxiliary hit lottery in the ordinary symbol management process (step S057). And its data (solenoid control data) are set. Based on the data set here, an excitation signal is output to the normal electric accessory solenoid 41a in the solenoid management process described later, whereby the operation of the movable wing piece 47 is controlled.

Next, a special symbol management process is performed (step S059). This special symbol management process functions as a jackpot determination means and a fall determination means, and mainly performs a jackpot lottery in a special symbol variation display game, and based on the lottery result, a variation pattern of the special symbol (look-ahead variation pattern, variation start). Determine the time fluctuation pattern) and special stop symbol. The details of the special symbol management process will be described later in FIG.

Next, a special electric accessory management process is performed (step S060). In this special electric accessory management process, when the big hit lottery result is "big hit" or "small hit", the setting process necessary for executing and controlling the winning game corresponding to the hit is mainly performed. The details of the special electric accessory management process will be described later in FIG.

Next, right-handed notification information management processing is performed (step S061). In this right-handed notification information management process, it is assumed that the player is in the right-handed state when the high-base game state of the "electric support state" occurs, or when the hit game is in progress, and the right-handed instruction information ( In order to bring out the "right-handed notification effect (launch guidance notification effect)" that informs the information (instruction information that prompts the large winning opening 50 and the normal symbol start opening 37 to win a prize) to aim at the right flow path 3c. Is processed. When the right-handed state is in effect, a "right-handed instruction command" for instructing the start of the launch guidance notification effect is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and in response to this command, the effect control unit 24 induces the launch. The configuration is such that the notification effect can be controlled. As a result, the player is instructed to perform an appropriate firing position.

Further, in the right-handed notification information management process, the right-handed notification effect is displayed assuming that the player is in the left-handed state when the low-base game state of "no electric support" occurs, or when the hit game is not in progress. Performs processing to prevent the output and processing to stop the execution of the right-handed notification effect that is currently appearing. When the player is in the left-handed state, a "left-handed instruction command" for instructing the cancellation of the launch guidance notification effect is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and in response to this command, the effect control unit 24 sends the launch guidance notification. The structure is such that the production can be controlled.

Further, on the effect control unit 24 side, when a right-handed instruction command or a left-handed instruction command is received based on the current effect mode and / or the current game state managed by itself, the right-handed state is changed to the left-handed state. , Or, the appearance control of the guidance notification image 373 (right-pointing arrow image 374a or left-pointing arrow image 374b) is performed depending on whether or not it is the timing to switch from the left-handed state to the right-handed state. In the case of the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 25 (a), as a right-handed notification effect, the guidance notification image 373 is placed at a position (upper right corner) that does not interfere with the decorative pattern display area on the liquid crystal screen. It is displayed in the dynamic display mode of "right arrow right movement". Further, when switching from the right-handed state to the left-handed state, the effect control unit 24 switches the guidance notification image 373 to the display according to the dynamic display mode of "left arrow right movement" in FIG. 25 (b). There is. The switching of the right-pointing arrow image 374a or the left-pointing arrow image 374b is not performed by using the right-handed instruction command or the left-handed instruction command, but is transmitted, for example, by a variation pattern specification command, a game state specification command, or during a hit. Predetermined commands (big hit (small hit) start command, big hit (small hit) end command, etc.), remaining power support count command, time saving end command, fall command, etc., which will be described later, grasp the change timing of the game state, and the current It may be configured so that the launch guidance notification effect according to the game state can be displayed.

Next, the LED management process is performed (step S062). In this LED management process, display data is output to the normal symbol display device 39a and the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b. As a result, the variable display and the stop display of the normal symbol and the special symbol are performed. Note that the display data of the normal symbol created in the normal symbol management process of step S057 and the special symbol created in the special symbol display data update process (step S309 of FIG. 9 described later) during the special symbol management process of step S059. The display data is output by this LED management process.

Next, an external terminal management process is performed (step S063). In this external terminal management process, the operating state information of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output to an external device such as a hall computer HC or an island lamp through the external centralized terminal board 21 for the frame. The above operation state information includes the fact that a big hit game has occurred (the condition device has been activated), that a small hit game has occurred, that the symbol variation display game has been executed, and that the prize information (for example, the start opening or the big prize). Various information such as the fact that a prize has been won in the mouth, information on the number of prize balls), and error occurrence information are included.

Next, the solenoid management process is performed (step S064). In this solenoid management process, the excitation signal output process for the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 41c based on the solenoid control data created in the ordinary electric accessory management process in step S058 and the special electric accessory management process in step S060 are created. The excitation signal output processing for the large winning opening solenoids 42c and 52c based on the solenoid control data is performed. As a result, the movable wing piece 47, the open door 42b, and the open door 52b open and close in a predetermined pattern, and the lower start opening 35 and the large winning opening 50 are opened and closed.

After the processing of steps S051 to S064 is completed, the contents of the saved register are restored (register restoration processing) and the interrupt enabled state is set (step S065). As a result, the timer interrupt process is terminated, the process returns to the main control side main process before the interrupt, and the main control side main process is performed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

<10. Special symbol management process: Fig. 9>
Next, the special symbol management process (step S059) in FIG. 8 will be described. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol management process in step S059.

In FIG. 9, the CPU 201 first performs a special figure 1 start port check process for the special symbol 1 side (upper start port 34 side) (step S301), and then performs a special figure for the special symbol 2 side (lower start port 35 side). 2 The start port check process is performed (step S302). The details will be described later in FIG.

When the start port check processing in steps S301 to S302 is completed, the state of the small hit medium flag is determined (step S303). This "small hit medium flag" is a flag for designating whether or not the small hit game is in progress, and when the flag is in the ON state (= 5AH), it indicates that the small hit game is in progress. , When the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the small hit game is not in progress.

When the small hit middle flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S303: ≠ 5AH), then the state of the condition device operation flag is determined (step S304). This "condition device operation flag" is a flag for designating whether or not the jackpot game is in progress, and when the flag is in the ON state (= 5AH), it indicates that the jackpot game is in progress. When the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the jackpot game is not in progress.

When the condition device operation flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S304: ≠ 5AH), that is, when neither the small hit game nor the big hit game is performed (step S303: ≠ 5AH and step S304: ≠ 5AH), special Processes related to the variable display operation of the special symbol are performed according to the symbol operation status (00H to 03H) (step S305: special symbol operation status branch processing). On the other hand, during the small hit game (step S303: = 5AH) or during the big hit game (step S304: = 5AH), the process related to the variation display operation of the special symbol in steps S306 to S308 is not performed as it is. The process proceeds to the special symbol display data update process in step S309. Therefore, during either the small hit game or the big hit game, the variable display operation of the special symbol is not performed (the display state of the special symbol of the special symbol display device is confirmed after the small hit or the big hit. The state as it was is retained). The "special symbol operation status" is a status value indicating the behavior of the special symbol, and this status value is changed according to the processing state and stored in the special symbol operation status storage area of the RAM 203.

In the special symbol operation status branch processing in step S305, depending on which of the status values "waiting (00H, 01H)", "changing (02H)", and "confirming (03H)" the special symbol operation status is. , Execute the corresponding process.

Specifically, when the special symbol operation status is "waiting (00H, 01H)", the special symbol change start process (step S306) is performed, and when the special symbol operation status is "changing (02H)", it is special. When the symbol changing process (step S307) is "confirming (03H)", the special symbol confirmation time process (step S308) is executed. Here, the above-mentioned "waiting" means that the behavior of the special symbol is in a standby state for the next fluctuation, and "changing" means that the behavior of the special symbol is changing (variation display). Indicated, the above-mentioned "confirming" indicates that the change of the special symbol is completed and the stop (confirmation) is being displayed (during the special symbol confirmation time). By these processes, the fluctuation display operation that sets the fluctuation start and fluctuation stop of the special symbol is realized. The details of the above-mentioned special symbol change start processing (step S306) will be described later in FIG.

When any of the processes of steps S306 to S308 is completed, the special symbol display data update process of step S309 described later is performed. In this special symbol display data update process, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is changing, and if it is changing, the data of the special symbol (special symbol) that repeats blinking at predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is repeated. The changing 7-segment blinking display data) is created, and if the special symbol is not changing, the stop display data (7-segment blinking display data during the special symbol stop display) is created. The display data of the special symbol created here is output in the LED management process (step S62) of FIG. 8, and the variable display and the stop display of the special symbol on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b are realized. As a result, the process exits the special symbol management process and proceeds to the special electric accessory management process in step S060 of FIG.

(10-1. Start port check process: Fig. 10)
First, the start port check process (steps S301 and S302 in FIG. 9) will be described. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing details of the special figure 1 start port check process in step S301 and the special figure 2 start port check process in step S302. This start port check process serves as a winning process executed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and in the special figure 1 start port check process of step S301, the special symbol variation display game 1 is executed. As the pre-start processing, the processing of adding the number of operation-holding balls on the special figure 1 side due to the occurrence of the winning of the upper starting port 34, the processing of storing various random numbers, the processing at the time of winning, the processing of creating / transmitting the holding addition command, etc. are performed. In the special figure 2 start port check process in step S302, the lower start port 35 is awarded as a pre-start process (a prize-winning process on the special figure 2 side) for executing the special symbol variation display game 2. The processing of adding the number of operation-holding balls on the special figure 2 side, the processing of storing various random numbers, the processing of creating the holding addition command, and the like are performed. In FIG. 10, the description will be focused on the special figure 1 start port check process, and the special figure 2 start port check process has substantially the same processing content as the special figure 1 start port check process, so duplicate description is avoided. Therefore, a detailed description will be omitted.

In FIG. 10, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not a winning (winning ball) is detected at the upper starting port 34 (step S311).

When the winning of the upper starting port 34 is detected (step S311: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of operation-holding balls of the special symbol 1 is 4 or more (step S312). That is, it is determined whether or not the number of operation-holding balls (hereinafter, referred to as "special figure 1 operation-holding balls") related to the special symbol 1 is less than the maximum number of hold storages (here, the upper limit of 4). If the winning of the upper starting port 34 is not detected (step S311: NO), the special drawing 1 starting port check process is exited without doing anything.

When the winning of the upper starting port 34 is detected, but the number of balls held in the special figure 1 is 4 or more (step S312: YES), the process proceeds to step S325 described later, and the number of balls held in the special figure 1 is not 4 or more. In that case, that is, if it is less than 4 (step S312: NO), 1 is added (+1) to the number of balls on hold in FIG.

Proceeding to the process of step S314, various random numbers used in the special symbol variation display game 1 related to the special figure 1 operation holding ball generated this time are acquired (step S314). Specifically, the current values of the jackpot judgment random number, the special symbol judgment random number, the fluctuation pattern random number, and the fall judgment random number are acquired from various random number counters, and the acquired random number values are stored in the hold storage area of the RAM 203. Store. This hold storage area is an area for storing predetermined game information related to the symbol variation display game as an operation hold ball (hold data), and in this hold storage area, the above-mentioned various random values as hold data are special symbols. Until the variable display operation of 1 is performed (until the special symbol variable display game 1 is executed), the start conditions are held and stored in the order of establishment (winning order). The reserved storage area includes a reserved storage area corresponding to the special symbol 1 side and the special symbol 2 side (special symbol 1 reserved storage area (first reserved storage area) corresponding to the special symbol 1) and special symbol 2 A special figure 2 hold storage area (second hold storage area) corresponding to the above is provided. These hold storage areas are provided with hold 1 storage area to hold n storage area (n is the maximum number of operation hold balls: n = 4 in the present embodiment), and hold data for each of the maximum number of operation hold balls. Can be stored.

Of the above-mentioned various random numbers, the special symbol determination random number and the fluctuation pattern random number are extracted from the random number counter that generates random numbers by software corresponding to each. Since the random number values of these random number counters are updated randomly in the interrupt processing that occurs intermittently and the main processing that is executed between the interrupt processing in the count value storage area corresponding to each, the value is acquired as it is. Will be done. On the other hand, the big hit determination random number value is extracted from a random number generation circuit (big hit determination random number counter: not shown) that generates random numbers in hardware. When the detection signal of the game ball is input from the upper start port sensor 34a or the lower start port sensor 34a, this random number generation circuit latches the count value at this timing so that the count value is input to the microcomputer. It has become. The CPU 201 stores this count value as a random number value for jackpot determination in a storage area for a random number value for jackpot determination of RAM 203 (a random number latch buffer for determining operation of a special electric accessory) provided separately from the hold storage area of RAM 203. Then, at the required timing, the random number value for jackpot determination stored in the random number latch buffer for determining the operation of the special electric accessory is read and used.

Next, as the winning command data (data corresponding to the lower byte side (EVENT) of the winning command) for creating the winning command, the look-ahead prohibition data (EVENT: "FFH") for prohibiting the look-ahead determination is acquired ( Step S315), it is determined whether or not the "special figure 1 look-ahead prohibition condition" is satisfied (step S316). The above-mentioned "special figure 1 look-ahead prohibition condition" is a condition for prohibiting the look-ahead determination for the special figure 1 operation holding ball.

When the special figure 1 look-ahead prohibition condition is satisfied (step S316: YES), the process proceeds to step S320A without performing the process related to the look-ahead determination (steps S317 to S319). In this case, by the process of step S315, the command at the time of winning with the look-ahead prohibition data (EVENT: "FFH") specifies the look-ahead prohibition, and the look-ahead determination for the special figure 1 operation pending ball of this time is prohibited. As a result, the look-ahead notice effect is not executed (see step S316: YES processing route). In the present embodiment, the look-ahead determination on the special symbol 1 side is prohibited when the game state is accompanied by the "state with electric support". This is because the lower starting port 35 is frequently won and the upper starting port 34 is hardly won while the electric support is present, so there is little need to generate a look-ahead notice on the special symbol 1 side. This is to reduce the control burden.

When the special figure 1 look-ahead prohibition condition is not satisfied (step S316: NO), the process proceeds to step S317 after passing through the ground state setting process (FIG. 11) of step S316A, and the random number determination process is performed (step S317). This random number determination process is performed as a part of the'look-ahead determination'process, and here, the operation hold ball of this time (here, in this process, the special symbol variation display game 1 (special figure 1) side) is used. Perform a'pre-reading judgment (pre-reading winning judgment)'to determine the "winning lottery" in advance.

(Ground state setting process: FIG. 11)
FIG. 11 shows the details of the ground state setting process (step S316A in FIG. 10). In this ground state setting process, it is first determined whether or not the current look-ahead ground state flag is in a high probability state (indicated as high probability in the figure) (step S351). If it is in the high probability state (step S351: YES), the random number value (type information) of the fall determination random number stored as the pending data in the hold storage area or the fall determination random number held in the register is pre-readed. (Step S352), and it is determined whether or not the player has won the "fall lottery" that shifts the high probability state to the low probability state (step S353). If it is determined to look ahead if the fall lottery is won (step S353: YES), the look-ahead ground state flag is set to a low probability state (indicated as low probability in the figure) (step S354). Then, the ground state setting process is exited. If it is determined that the pre-reading is not won in the fall lottery (step S353: NO), the ground state setting process is exited while maintaining the pre-reading ground state flag in the high probability state. Then, the process proceeds to step S317 of FIG.

If the look-ahead ground state flag is in a low probability state (step S351: NO) in the determination in step S351, the ground state setting process is exited without performing the look-ahead determination (step S352) of the random number for fall determination. Then, the process returns to step S316A of FIG. 10 and proceeds to step S317.

Therefore, by passing through this ground state setting process, the determination of each random number performed in the subsequent steps S317 to S319 (look-ahead determination means) is correctly performed based on the game state (look-ahead ground state) at the time of winning. That is, when the pre-reading ground state at the time of winning is in the low-probability state, the pre-reading determination is performed based on the low-probability lottery data, and when it is in the high-probability state, the pre-reading determination is performed based on the high-probability lottery data.

Returning to FIG. 10, when the random number determination process of step S317 is started, first, the random number value for big hit determination stored in the RAM 203 (random number latch buffer for determining the operation of the special electric accessory) is acquired, and then the random number determination table described later is described. Get (not shown). Then, based on the acquired random number value for jackpot determination and the hit random number determination table, the winning lottery (different determination of jackpot, small hit, and loss) for the current operation pending ball, that is, the current operation pending ball fluctuates. The lottery result (winning lottery result at the start of fluctuation) of the "random number determination process for determining the operation of the special electric accessory (see S409 in FIG. 12 described later)" that is executed when the display operation is performed is pre-read and determined. Get the result.

(T-1. Random number judgment table)
The above-mentioned hit random number determination table includes a "per random number determination table for special figure 1 (not shown)" related to the special symbol variation display game 1 and a "per random number determination table for special figure 2" related to the special symbol variation display game 2. (Not shown) ”is included, and during the special figure 1 start port check process of FIG. 10, the“ random number determination table for special figure 1 ”is included, and during the special figure 2 start port check process of FIG. "Random number determination table for FIG. 2" is referred to. In the case of the present embodiment, in the random number determination process in step S317, the "hit random number determination table" common to the special symbol variation display game 1 and the special symbol variation display game 2 is referred to.

In the hit random number determination table of the present embodiment, the jackpot determination random number value (size of jackpot determination random number: 65536) is displayed for each jackpot lottery probability state (high probability state (high probability), low probability state (low probability)). And the judgment area (judgment value) for determining the winning (win / fail) type (whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a loss) are defined in association with each other. Specifically, which judgment is the random number value for the big hit judgment. Whether it belongs to a value or not, it is determined whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a loss. Therefore, even if the acquired jackpot judgment random value belongs to the same judgment value (when the jackpot judgment random value has the same value), the current jackpot lottery probability state is a high probability state or a low probability. Depending on the state, the "win (win / fail) type" may be different, such as "big hit" on the one hand and "miss" on the other. The winning probability of a small hit is a fixed winning probability (about 1/200) regardless of the big hit lottery probability state, and in this respect, the character is different from the big hit whose winning probability fluctuates depending on the big hit lottery probability state. To.

By this winning lottery (look-ahead winning judgment), "5AH (big hit judgment flag is ON state)" is acquired as a big hit judgment flag when "big hit" is won, and when it belongs to other judgment values, "big hit" is obtained. 00H (Big hit non-winning (Big hit judgment flag is OFF state)) ”is acquired. If the "small hit" is won, "5AH (small hit judgment flag is ON)" is acquired as the small hit judgment flag, and if it belongs to any other judgment value, "00H (small hit non-winning)" is acquired. (Small hit judgment flag is OFF state)) ”is acquired. Therefore, if the random value for big hit judgment belongs to the judgment value that becomes the big hit judgment flag "00H" and the small hit judgment "00H", it means that neither "big hit" nor "small hit" was won. Therefore, the winning judgment result this time is'loss (the big hit judgment flag and the small hit judgment flag are OFF state)'.

Here, in the present embodiment, the result of the process of step S317 is not stored in the RAM 203 while being held in the register provided in the CPU 201, and the random number determination process is exited to create the special stop symbol data in step S318. Proceed to. The reason is as follows.

The determination result obtained by the random number determination process this time, that is, the data of the winning lottery result in the look-ahead determination is immediately used in the subsequent "special stop symbol data creation process", and this data is not required thereafter. Therefore, there is no problem even if the random number determination process is exited while the determination result is held in the register without being stored in the RAM 203. As a result, a program for storing the judgment result of the random number judgment process (the judgment result of the winning judgment processing in the winning process (the winning result related to the look-ahead judgment)) is not required, and the judgment result is exclusively stored. Since it is not necessary to separately provide a storage area for the ROM, the memory capacity of the ROM or RAM can be reduced and the control load can be reduced.

In step S317 described above, the lottery result by the lottery means (random number determination process for determining the operation of the special electric accessory in step S409 of FIG. 12) is obtained based on the random number for determining the jackpot (first game information) stored on hold. It functions as a first look-ahead determination means for pre-reading determination before the hold memory is used for the variable display operation of the special symbol. Further, in steps S352 to S353 of FIG. 11 described above, the fall lottery means (fall determination process of step S408 of FIG. 12: steps S422 to FIG. 13) is based on the hold-stored random number for fall determination (second game information). It serves as a second look-ahead determination means for determining whether or not a fall will occur in the fall lottery according to S423) before the reserved memory is subjected to the variable display operation of the special symbol.

After completing the random number determination process in step S317 described above, the special stop symbol data creation process is then performed (step S318). This special stop symbol data creation process is performed as a part of the'look-ahead determination'process, and here, the'look-ahead determination'(look-ahead symbol determination:) that predetermines the "symbol lottery" related to the operation hold ball this time. (Pre-reading judgment of winning (winning) type))'. The random number determination process (step S317) to the special stop symbol data creation process (step S318) are the processes related to the'look-ahead hit determination'that pre-reads the jackpot lottery result.

In the special stop symbol data creation process of step S318, first, the winning lottery result obtained by the random number determination processing of step S317 is acquired, and the symbol table (described later) according to the winning lottery result (large hit, small hit, loss) Select the big hit symbol table, small hit symbol table, or lost symbol table (not shown). Then, the special symbol determination random value acquired in step S314 is acquired, and based on the selected symbol table and the special symbol determination random value, the symbol lottery for the current operation hold ball, that is, the current operation hold The lottery result (symbol lottery result at the start of fluctuation) of the "special stop symbol creation process (see step S410 in FIG. 12 to be described later)" executed when the sphere is subjected to the fluctuation display operation is pre-read and determined.

(T-2. Design table)
In the above symbol table, the "special symbol determination random value (size of special symbol determination random value: 200)" and the determination area (judgment value) for determining the winning type are defined in association with each other. Specifically, the special symbol determination data and the special stop symbol number are determined depending on which determination value the special symbol determination random value belongs to.

The above "special symbol determination data" is data that identifies the winning type (winning type: big hit type, small hit type, and loss type), and in the case of this embodiment, 2R short open latent probability big hit, 15R probability change. Big hit, small hit type (if there are multiple types of small hits, the type (for example, small hit A, small hit B, etc.)), loss type (if there are multiple types of loss, the type (for example, loss A, etc.)) This is data for identifying which of (B, etc.)) was won. This special symbol determination data is a process that requires winning type information (for example, a game state transition preparation process in step S411 of FIG. 12, which will be described later, a special symbol variation pattern creation process in step S412, and a process related to execution control of a jackpot game. (Data used in the special electric accessory management process (step S060) of FIG. 8 and the like).

Further, the above-mentioned "special stop symbol number" is data for designating a special stop symbol mode to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device, and is used when the main control unit 20 side specifies the stop symbol type of the special symbol. To. In the present embodiment, even in the case of the same 15R probability variation jackpot, depending on the determination value, the display mode of the special stop symbol displayed on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b (in the present embodiment, the display mode of '7 segment'). May be different.

(T-2-1. Big hit design table)
The jackpot symbol table of the present embodiment includes a "big hit symbol table 1" for special figure 1 related to the special symbol variation display game 1 and a "big hit symbol table 2" for special symbol 2 related to the special symbol variation display game 2. Is included, "big hit symbol table 1" is referred to during the special figure 1 start port check process, and "big hit symbol table 2" is referred to during the special figure 2 start port check process.

In these jackpot symbol tables, the special symbol determination random value and the determination value for determining the jackpot type are defined in association with each other. Specifically, the special symbol determination random value is used as the determination value. Depending on whether or not it belongs, any one of the multiple types of jackpots is determined. In the jackpot symbol table 1, for example, if the random value for special symbol determination belongs to the range of determination values 0 to 139, the "2R probability variation jackpot" is won (symbol selection rate (symbol lottery probability): 140/200). If the judgment value belongs to the range of 140 to 199, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is won (symbol selection rate: 60/200), the jackpot type is determined by the predetermined symbol selection rate, and the corresponding special symbol judgment data and special The stop symbol number is determined.

The jackpot symbol table 2 has the same basic configuration as the jackpot symbol table 1 described above, but differs from the jackpot symbol table 1 in the following points. The jackpot symbol table 2 has a different specific jackpot symbol selection rate (symbol lottery probability) as compared with the jackpot symbol table 1. Specifically, when the random value for special symbol judgment belongs to the range of judgment values 0 to 39, the "2R probability variation jackpot" is won (symbol selection rate: 40/200) and belongs to the range of judgment values 40 to 199. In that case, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is won (design selection rate: 160/200). That is, the symbol lottery by the jackpot symbol table 2 has a higher probability of selecting the type of jackpot with a relatively high profit than the symbol lottery by the jackpot symbol table 1, and the symbol lottery is advantageous for the player. As a result, it is considered that it is more advantageous for the player to receive the lottery of the special symbol variation display game 2 than the special symbol variation display game 1. In particular, in the state with electric support, the winning probability on the lower starting port 35 side is dramatically improved, and the chances of executing the special symbol variation display game 2 are increased. Therefore, in the state with electric support, the game is in a high base game state. Not only that, it is considered to be an advantageous gaming state for the player from the viewpoint of the symbol lottery.

In the process of step S318, various data (design lottery result in look-ahead determination: special symbol determination data, special stop symbol number) obtained from the symbol table described above are kept in a register provided in the CPU 201 (for example, special). The symbol determination data is not stored in the A register and the special stop symbol number is in the B register), and the RAM 203 is not stored. The process exits the special stop symbol data creation process and proceeds to the start opening winning random number determination process in step S319. The reason is as follows.

In the present embodiment, various data of the determination result (symbol lottery result in the look-ahead determination) obtained in the special stop symbol data creation process this time are immediately used in the subsequent "starting opening winning random number determination process", and then this No data is needed. Therefore, there is no particular problem even if the special stop symbol data creation process is exited while the determination result is held in the register without being stored in the RAM 203. As a result, a program for storing the determination result of the special stop symbol data creation process in the RAM is not required, and it is not necessary to provide a dedicated storage area for storing the determination result. As a result, the memory capacity can be reduced and the control load can be reduced.

After completing the special stop symbol data creation process in step S318 described above, the start port winning random number determination process in step S319 is then performed. The random number determination process at the time of winning the start opening is also performed as a part of the'look-ahead determination'process like the above random number determination process (step S317) and the special stop symbol data creation process (step S318). Performs'look-ahead determination (pre-reading variation pattern determination') to determine in advance the “variation pattern at the start of variation” related to the operation-holding ball.

In the start opening winning random number determination process, the winning lottery result obtained in the random number determination process in step S317, the'design lottery'result obtained in the special stop symbol data creation process in step S318, and the process in step S314 are performed. Using the obtained'random number for fluctuation pattern', the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation related to the current operation hold ball, that is, the "special symbol" executed when the current operation hold ball is subjected to the fluctuation display operation. The result (contents of the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation) of "variation pattern creation process (see S412 in FIG. 12 described later)" is pre-read and determined. Then, based on the pre-reading determination result, the winning command data creation process used for creating the "winning command" described later is performed. Here, as the winning command data, at least the command data on the "MODE_1 (1st byte (upper byte))" side that can specify the winning lottery result (whether winning or losing) and the content of the look-ahead fluctuation pattern can be specified. The command data on the EVENT (second byte (lower byte)) side is acquired. The look-ahead fluctuation pattern (excluding the number of reserved balls information) is determined by the winning command data determined in the random number determination process at the start opening winning. The content is specified. In the case of the first embodiment, the upper byte is data that enables the information regarding the winning lottery and the falling lottery result (falling lottery result, winning lottery result) to be specified.

When the start opening winning random number determination process is completed in step S319, a "winning command" is created based on the command data determined in the start opening winning random number determination process (step S320A), and subsequently, the operation at the time of pre-reading determination is performed. Create a "hold addition command" for specifying the number of held balls (step S320). This "hold addition command" is composed of 2 bytes, and the upper byte (MODE) side that specifies whether the operation hold ball targeted for pre-reading this time is the special figure 1 side or the special figure 2 side, and at the time of winning. It is composed of a lower byte (EVENT) side that specifies the number of balls on hold. The hold addition command is used when the effect control unit 24 side notifies information about the current number of operation hold balls to the hold display areas 76 and 77 when an operation hold ball is generated, or when a look-ahead notice effect is executed. Is used when displaying a look-ahead notice effect (a look-ahead notice effect of a hold display change system) for the hold subject to the notice.

Next, the created winning command and the hold addition command are transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S321).

When the winning command and the hold addition command are transmitted from the main control unit 20, the effect control unit 24 that receives the command receives a lottery (pre-reading notice lottery) regarding whether or not the pre-reading notice effect can be executed based on the information contained in these commands. ), And if it is determined that the game can be executed based on the lottery result (when the pre-reading notice lottery is won), the pre-reading notice effect for the current operation pending ball is displayed. Further, when the effect control unit 24 receives the winning command and / or the hold addition command, the effect control unit 24 notifies that the starting port has won a prize regardless of whether or not the look-ahead notice effect is displayed. Can be revealed.

In addition, even if there is a new prize when the number of operation hold balls is 4 or more, a prize command and a hold addition command (hereinafter, these are abbreviated as "OF command") are created to specify overflow. And is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S312: YES → step S320A).

As a result, the special figure 1 start port check process of step S301 is exited, and then the special figure 2 start port check process of step S302 of FIG. 9 is performed.

(10-3. Special symbol change start processing: Fig. 12)
Next, the special symbol variation start processing (step S306) will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol variation start processing of FIG.

In FIG. 12, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the number of balls on hold in FIG. 2 is zero (step S401), and if the number of balls on hold in FIG. 2 is not zero (step S401: NO), the step Proceeding to the process of S403, the process at the start of the fluctuation (steps S403 to S416) for the special figure 2 operation holding ball to be used for the current variation display is performed. On the other hand, when the number of balls on hold in FIG. 2 is zero (step S401: YES), it is subsequently determined whether or not the number of balls on hold in special figure 1 is zero (step S402), and the balls on hold in action 1 are determined. If the number is not zero (step S402: NO), the process proceeds to step S403, and the process related to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol for the special figure 1 operation holding ball to be used for the current variation display (step S403 to NO). S416) is performed. By the processing of steps S401 and S402, which of the special figure 1 operation holding ball and the special figure 2 operation holding ball is preferentially subjected to the variable display operation (which operation holding ball is preferentially digested). "Priority fluctuation order" is determined. In the present embodiment, when the operation holding ball exists in both the special figure 1 operation holding ball and the special figure 2 operation holding ball, the special figure 2 operation holding ball is preferentially digested, that is, the special symbol variation display game 1 The special symbol variation display game 2 is preferentially executed rather than the special symbol variation display game 2.

When the number of operation-holding balls in both the special figure 2 number of operation-holding balls and the special figure 1 number of operation-holding balls is zero (step S401: YES and step S402: YES), the state is "no operation-holding ball". .. This "no operation hold ball" state is a case where a special symbol is waiting and there is no hold memory, and the effect control unit 24 is notified that this state has been entered and the liquid crystal display is displayed. The device 36 is controlled to switch to the demo screen display for waiting for customers. Therefore, when "no operation hold ball" is set, the process proceeds to step S417, and it is determined whether or not the special symbol operation status is "waiting (00H)" indicating the state of the above "no operation hold ball". (Step S417).

When the determination process of step S417 is passed, that is, when the above-mentioned "no operation holding ball" state is reached, and the special symbol operation status at this time is "waiting (01H)" (step S417: NO: Refer to step S472 during the special symbol confirmation time processing in FIG. 17A described later), and switch the special symbol operation status to "waiting (00H)" (store 00H in the special symbol operation status: step S418). Then, as the effect control command, a "demo display command" for displaying the demo screen is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S419), and the special symbol variation start process is exited. If the effect control unit 24 does not receive any effect control command (for example, a winning command or a hold addition command) related to the symbol variation display game even after a predetermined time has elapsed after receiving the demo display command, the effect display operation Is considered to have occurred in a state where the command is not performed for a certain period of time (customer waiting standby state), and the liquid crystal display device 36 performs "demo screen display" to notify the game waiting state.

When the number of balls on hold in Special Figure 2 is not zero (step S401: NO), or when the number of balls on hold in action 2 is zero but the number of balls on hold in action 1 is not zero (step S401: YES → step). S402: NO), processing (steps S403 to S416) related to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol for the operation holding ball used for the current fluctuation display is performed. Regarding the processes of steps S403 to S416 described below, if the determination in step S401 is'NO', the process for the special figure 2 operation holding ball is performed, and in the determination in step S402 above,' If it is NO', the processing is performed for the special figure 1 operation holding ball, but the processing method is substantially the same. Therefore, in order to avoid duplicate description, unless there is a particular need, it is possible to distinguish between the processing targeting the operation holding ball on the special symbol 1 side and the processing targeting the operation holding ball on the special symbol 2 side. I will explain without.

Proceeding to the process of step S403, the number of operation-holding balls is subtracted by 1 (the number of operation-holding balls related to the special symbol side used for the current fluctuation display operation-1: step S403), and the operation-holding ball number information after the subtraction is included. A "hold subtraction command" is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S404). By this hold subtraction command, the effect control unit 24 side grasps the remaining number of operation hold balls after the current number of operation hold balls is digested.

Next, the special symbol operation confirmation data is stored (step S405). This special symbol operation confirmation data is information that specifies the special symbol type of the fluctuation start side this time. For example, if the special symbol 1 is the fluctuation start side, "00H" is set, and the special symbol 2 is the fluctuation start side. If there is, "01H" is stored in the special symbol operation confirmation data.

Next, the hold data stored in the hold storage area of the RAM 203 is shifted (step S406), and the hold 4 storage area is cleared to zero (step S407). In the processing of steps S406 to S407, the hold data (big hit determination random number, special symbol determination random number, and fluctuation pattern) stored in the hold storage area (hold 1 storage area) corresponding to the hold storage number n = 1 are used. (Random number) is read and stored in the determination random number storage area of RAM 203, and the hold storage area (hold 2 storage area, hold 3 storage area, hold 4 storage) corresponding to the hold n storage area (n = 2, 3, 4) is stored. The hold data stored in the area) is stored in the hold storage area corresponding to'n-1'(step S406), and the hold 4 storage area is cleared to provide a free area (step S407). As a result, the start order of the special symbol variation display game matches the order of the number of operation hold balls n (n = 1, 2, 3, 4), and the operation hold balls acquired at the time of winning the start opening are stored in any hold. It is possible to identify whether it corresponds to the area and to hold and store a new operation holding ball.

Then, in the case of the first embodiment, the process proceeds to the fall determination process (step S408) after step S407. However, in the cases of the second and third embodiments, as shown by the broken line in FIG. 12, the number of remaining electric support is the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (the number of guaranteed electric support) for which the electric support is guaranteed to be added. It is checked whether or not there is (step S407A), and if there is a remaining power support count (step S407A: YES), a command for the remaining power support count is transmitted (step S407B), and the process proceeds to the fall determination process in step S408. If there is no remaining power support count (step S407A: NO), the process proceeds to the fall determination process in step S408 without transmitting this command.

(10-3-1. Fall determination process: FIG. 13)
FIG. 13 shows the details of the fall determination process in step S408 (FIG. 12). This is a fall determination process performed when the special symbol variation display operation starts, that is, at the start of the variation, and is performed prior to the hit determination process (random number determination process for determining the operation of the special electric accessory: step S409). First, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state at the start of fluctuation is the probabilistic state, that is, whether or not the special symbol probabilistic state flag described later is ON (= 5AH) (step S421). When the special symbol probability change state flag is ON (step S421: = 5AH), the fall determination random number acquired in step S314 (FIG. 10) is determined in the determination table (step S422), and when the symbol game starts to change. As a determination of, it is determined whether or not the player has won the fall lottery (step S423).

If it is determined that the fall lottery has been won as a judgment at the start of the fluctuation of the symbol game (step S423: YES), the special symbol probability change state flag is turned off, the special symbol time reduction state flag is turned off, and the current game is played. The notification LED output number for notifying the status information is set to 00H (OFF) (step S424). When the special symbol probability change state flag is turned from ON to OFF, the judgment base of the jackpot lottery probability state shifts (falls) from the high probability state to the low probability state.

Then, the process proceeds to step S425, and a fall command is transmitted for control by the main control unit 20 (step S355). This fall command is transmitted separately according to the state of electric power support (during electric power support), which is in a high base state with the open extension function activated, and the other states. Then, the process is completed, and the process returns to step S408 of FIG.

On the other hand, when the special symbol probability change state flag is not set (step S421: ≠ 5A), the process ends without determining the random number for the fall determination, and the fall lottery is not won (step S423:). NO) also ends the process without doing anything, and proceeds to step S409 in FIG.

The case of the "ST machine type" of the fourth embodiment and the "type including a plurality of types of jackpots with time reduction" of the fifth embodiment are non-fall type models. Therefore, in the case of the fourth and fifth embodiments, the fall determination process (step S408) is not performed, and the processes of steps S407A and S407B are performed. In the case of the fourth embodiment, the probability change state is continued up to the ST specified number of times. Therefore, in step S407A, in order to count the ST period, the special symbol time reduction counter described later (the remaining number of times until the special symbol time reduction state ends). It is determined whether or not the counter for counting the number of times is zero, and if there is a remaining number of time reductions (ST number), a "remaining power support number command" including the remaining number of times information is sent to the effect control unit 24. Transmit (step S407B). In the case of the fifth embodiment, the time saving state continues up to a predetermined number of times. Therefore, in step S407A, as in the case of the fourth embodiment, it is determined whether or not the special symbol time saving number counter is zero, and the remaining time saving number is set. If there is, a "remaining power support number command" including the remaining number information is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S407B). By this "remaining electric support number command", the effect control unit 24 side can grasp the remaining ST number. As a result, the remaining ST number information is notified by using the effect means, the switching timing of the launch guidance notification (the symbol variation display game at which the ST ends) is grasped, and the launch guidance notification effect (here) at an appropriate timing. Then, switching from right-handed to left-handed notification) can be made to appear.

(10-3-2. S407A to S408 in FIG. 12)
Returning to FIG. 12, following step S408, a random number determination process for determining the operation of the special electric accessory is performed (step S409). In this special electric accessory operation determination random number determination process, the big hit determination random number value is used to perform a "winning lottery" related to this special symbol variation display game. The random number determination process for determining the operation of the special electric accessory has the same function as the "random number determination process (step S319 in FIG. 10)" which is one of the "look-ahead determination" processes in that the "winning lottery" is performed. In this process, a "winning lottery" is performed in the "judgment at the start of fluctuation" for the operation holding ball used for the current fluctuation display operation. Since the processing procedure of the random number determination process for determining the operation of the special electric accessory is substantially the same as the random number determination process (step S319 in FIG. 10), the description will be omitted as appropriate to avoid duplicate description.

Here, first, the hit random number determination table corresponding to the fluctuation display side of this time is acquired based on the special symbol operation confirmation data. This hit random number determination table is the same as the hit random number determination table used in the random number determination process (step S317 in FIG. 10). Next, the big hit judgment random number value stored in the judgment random number storage area is acquired, and another winning lottery for big hit, small hit, and loss is performed based on the big hit judgment random number value and the hit random number judgment table. The result is stored in the hit determination flag area of the RAM 203.

When the "big hit" is won by this winning lottery (winning lottery at the start of fluctuation), the big hit judgment flag is set to "5AH (big hit judgment flag is ON state)" and belongs to other judgment values. Is "00H (big hit non-winning (big hit judgment flag is OFF state))". If the "small hit" is won, the small hit judgment flag is set to "5AH (small hit judgment flag is ON)", and if it belongs to any other judgment value, "00H (small hit non-winning)" is set. (Small hit judgment flag is OFF state)) ”. Therefore, if the random value for big hit judgment belongs to the judgment value that becomes the big hit judgment flag "00H" and the small hit judgment "00H", it means that neither "big hit" nor "small hit" was won. The winning judgment result this time is'Loss (the big hit judgment flag and the small hit judgment flag are OFF state)'.

Here, the reason for storing the data obtained by the random number determination process for determining the operation of the special electric accessory in step S409 in the RAM 203 is as follows. The data (big hit judgment flag, small hit judgment flag) obtained in the random number judgment process for determining the operation of the special electric accessory is similar to the data obtained in the "random number judgment process (step S317 in FIG. 10)" at the time of pre-reading judgment. This is because it is not the data that is immediately used in the subsequent processing and becomes unnecessary after that, but the data that is required in the later special stop symbol creation processing (step S410).

After completing the random number determination process for determining the operation of the special electric accessory in step S409, the special stop symbol creation process is then performed (step S410). In this special stop symbol creation process, the winning lottery result of the random number determination process for determining the operation of the special electric accessory in step S409 and the random number value for special symbol determination are used to perform the "symbol lottery" related to this special symbol variation display game. Do. The special stop symbol creation process is a process that functions in the same manner as the "special stop symbol data processing (step S318 in FIG. 10)", which is one of the "look-ahead determination" processes in that a "design lottery" is performed. However, here, a "design lottery" is performed in the "judgment at the start of fluctuation" for the operation holding ball used for the current fluctuation display operation. Since the basic processing procedure of the special stop symbol creation process is the same as that of the special stop symbol data process (step S318 in FIG. 10), the description will be omitted as appropriate to avoid duplicate description.

Here, first, the special symbol operation confirmation data and the winning lottery result (the above-mentioned big hit determination flag and small hit determination flag) obtained by the random number determination process for determining the operation of the special electric accessory in step S409 are acquired, and based on these. , The big hit symbol table, the small hit symbol table, and the lost symbol table are selected. This symbol table is the same as the symbol table used in the special stop symbol data processing (step S318 in FIG. 10). Next, the special symbol determination random number value stored in the determination random number storage area is acquired, and based on the selected symbol table and the special symbol determination random number value, the "symbol lottery" related to this special symbol variation display game is performed. , And stores the symbol lottery result (special symbol determination data, special stop symbol number) in a predetermined area (special symbol determination data storage area, special symbol stop symbol number storage area) of the RAM 203. As a result, the winning type (winning type) related to this special symbol variation display game is determined.

Here, the reason for storing the data obtained by the special stop symbol creation process in step S410 in the RAM 203 is as follows. The data (special stop symbol determination data, special stop symbol number) obtained in the special stop symbol creation process follows like the data obtained in the "special stop symbol data process (step S318 in FIG. 10)" at the time of pre-reading determination. This is because it is not the data that is immediately used in the processing and becomes unnecessary after that, but the data that is required in the special symbol variation pattern creation processing (step S412) and the special electric accessory processing (step S60) later.

After completing the special stop symbol creation process in step S410, the game state transition preparation process is then performed (step S411). In this game state transition preparation process, as a setting for shifting the game state, a setting process necessary for designating the game state after the winning game is performed. Specifically, it is necessary to specify the game state to be transferred after the hit game, such as the probability variation state, the time saving state, the latent probability state, the CZ (normal), the CZ (latent probability), and the normal state, according to the jackpot type. Store various data in a predetermined migration state buffer. The data stored in the transition state buffer is used in the jackpot end process (step S509) described later.

Various data that specify the game state include a general electric accessory open extension state flag (a flag for specifying the operating state of the open extension function (whether or not there is an electric support state)) and a normal symbol time saving state flag (normal symbol time saving function). (Flag for specifying the operating state of), normal symbol probability change state flag (flag for specifying the operating state of the normal symbol probability change function (lottery probability state per auxiliary)), special symbol time saving state flag (special symbol time saving function) (Flag for specifying the operating state), special symbol probability change state flag (flag for specifying the operation state of the special symbol probability change function (big hit lottery probability state)), special symbol time reduction counter (operation of the special symbol time reduction function (operation) Counter for counting the number of remaining times until the end of the special symbol time reduction state), counter for the number of special symbol probability changes (counter for counting the number of times remaining until the operation of the special symbol probability change function (high probability state) ends) ), And a special symbol fluctuation count counter (counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the special symbol for updating the fluctuation pattern distribution designation number). Depending on the setting state of these flags and counters, the operating state of the functions related to the special symbol and the normal symbol is determined, and the gaming state is determined. For these flags and counters, data necessary for realizing the models of the types 1 to 6 of each embodiment may be provided.

After completing the game state transition preparation process in step S411, a special symbol variation pattern creation process is then performed (step S412). In this special symbol variation pattern creation process, the symbol lottery result of the special stop symbol creation process (at least the winning lottery result obtained by the random number determination process for determining the operation of the special electric accessory), the random number for the variation pattern, and the variation pattern distribution designation number. (Tcode) (current game state), the number of operation-holding balls, etc., and the variation pattern of the special symbol for the operation-holding ball used for the current variation display operation, that is, the "variation pattern at the start of the variation" Will be decided by lottery. Then, a "variation pattern designation command" capable of specifying the content of the fluctuation pattern is created, and this is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 side.

After completing the special symbol variation pattern creation process in step 412, 5AH (ON state) is stored in the special symbol N changing flag (N = 1, 2) that specifies that the variation is being displayed (step S413). .. The above "special symbol N changing flag" is a flag indicating which of the special symbols 1 and 2 is changing, and when the flag is in the ON state (= 5AH), the special symbol changes. When the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the special symbol is stopped. The special symbol 1 changing flag (N = 1) corresponds to the special symbol 1 side, and the special symbol 2 changing flag (N = 2) corresponds to the special symbol 2 side.

Next, based on the symbol lottery result obtained in the special stop symbol creation process in step S410, a decorative symbol designation command is created (step S414) and transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S415). The decorative symbol specification command is composed of two bytes, a high-order byte (MODE) that specifies a special symbol type on the variable side and a low-order byte (EVENT) that specifies a large hit type, a small hit type, and a loss type. Therefore, this decorative symbol designation command includes information on the special symbol type on the variable side and the winning type (symbol lottery result). Specifically, on the upper byte (MODE) side, "B5H" is set when the special symbol on the variable side is the special symbol 1, and "B6H" is set when the special symbol is the special symbol 2, and the lower byte (EVENT) is set. On the side, "01H" is set when the winning type is lost, "02H" is set when the 15R probability variation jackpot is set, "03H" is set when the 2R short open latent jackpot is hit, and "03H" is set when the winning type is a small hit. 04H ”is set. In the first to sixth embodiments, data that enables the winning type to be specified is set in the lower byte (EVNET), but the data may be data that enables the special stop symbol number or the special symbol determination data to be specified. Since this decorative symbol designation command includes information on the winning type, the effect control unit 24 mainly uses the combination of decorative symbols when forming the reach state (the symbol type whose component is the reach symbol) and It is used when determining the combination of decorative symbols (decorative stop symbols) to be finally stopped and displayed, and the advance notice effect corresponding to the winning type in the symbol variation display game.

Then, as the setting process at the start of fluctuation, the special symbol operation status is switched to "changing (02H)" (02H is stored in the special symbol operation status), and the random number storage area for determination is cleared to zero (00H is stored) (step S416). ).

As described above, when the special symbol variation start process is exited, the special symbol display data update process (step S309) of FIG. 9 is performed, and thus the variation display of the special symbol is started.

In the special symbol changing process (step S307), it is monitored whether or not the special symbol is changing, that is, whether or not the fluctuation time of the special symbol has elapsed, and if the fluctuation time has elapsed, the effect control is performed. As a command, a process of transmitting a "fluctuation stop command" to the effect control unit 24, a fixed display time (for example, 500 ms) is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer, and the special symbol operation status is "confirmed (03H)". Switch to (store 03H in the special symbol operation status) and perform processing. The above-mentioned "fluctuation stop command" is a command indicating that the variation of the special symbol has ended, and the effect control unit 24 has terminated the special symbol variation display game after the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed by this variation stop command. Grasp that (end) and stop the decorative design that is currently being displayed in a variable manner. As a result, the decorative symbol variation display game ends at the same time as the special symbol variation display game ends. Further, the above-mentioned "fixed display time" is a time (stop display time) for holding the stop display when the variable display of the special symbol is completed and the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

Further, in the special symbol confirmation time processing (step S308), it is monitored whether or not the above-mentioned confirmed display time has elapsed, and if the confirmed display time has elapsed, it is considered that the special symbol variation display game has ended. If the symbol operation status is switched to "standby (01H)" (01H is stored in the special symbol operation status) and this special symbol fluctuation display game is a big hit, the process required to start the jackpot game (big hit symbol stop) (Various setting processes for small hits) are performed, and if it is a small hit, the processes required to start the small hit game (various setting processes when the small hit symbol is stopped) are performed. In various setting processes when the jackpot symbol is stopped, the jackpot judgment flag, the general electric accessory open extension state flag, the normal symbol time reduction state flag, the normal symbol probability change state flag, the special symbol time reduction state flag, the special symbol probability change state flag, and the special symbol time reduction Clear each of the count counter, the special symbol probability change count counter, and the special symbol change count counter (store 00H), and set the condition device operation flag to the ON state (store 5AH). Further, in various setting processes when the small hit symbol is stopped, the small hit determination flag is cleared (00H is stored), and 5AH (ON state) is stored in the small hit medium flag.

In addition, here, the special symbol time reduction counter (remaining number of times in the special symbol time reduction state), special symbol probability variation counter (remaining ST number), and special symbol fluctuation number counter are monitored, and in the case of a small hit or loss, this special For non-zero counters, the counter is subtracted by 1 as the amount consumed in the symbol variation display game.

If the special symbol time reduction counter after subtraction is zero, it is assumed that the end number of the special symbol time reduction state has been reached in this game, and the setting process at the end of the time reduction is performed. Here, as the setting process at the end of the time reduction, each of the general electric accessory open extension state flag, the normal symbol time reduction state flag, the normal symbol probability change state flag, and the special symbol time reduction state flag is cleared, and the fluctuation pattern distribution is specified. A predetermined value (for example, 00H indicating a normal state) is stored in a number (Tcode), and a "time saving end command" indicating that the special symbol time saving state has ended (state transition information without electric support) is produced as an effect control command. It is transmitted to the control unit 24. As a result, from the next game, it will be placed under the state without electric support. Since the above time saving end command is transmitted at the end of the current symbol variation display game, the effect control unit 24 can grasp that the next game will be in the'no electric support state'before the start of the next game. It is possible to switch the production mode (switch the background image) before the start of the next game, or to display the launch guidance notification effect (here, switching from right-handed to left-handed notification) at an appropriate timing. ..

If the special symbol probability variation counter after subtraction is zero, it is assumed that the number of terminations of the special symbol probability variation state has been reached in this game, and the setting process at the end of the probability variation is performed. Here, as the transition setting process to the normal game state accompanying the end of the latent probability state or the end of the probability change state, the general electric accessory open extension state flag, the normal symbol time reduction state flag, the normal symbol probability change state flag, the special symbol time reduction state flag, And each of the special symbol probability change state flags is cleared, and if necessary, a predetermined value (for example, 00H indicating a normal state) is stored in the fluctuation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode). As a result, from the next game, the jackpot lottery probability will be placed from the high probability state to the low probability state.

Further, if the special symbol change count counter after subtraction is zero, it is assumed that the number of changes of the special symbol has reached the game state transition specified number of times, and the game state transition setting process is performed. Here, the fluctuation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode) is updated. For example, when CZ (04H) ends, it is updated to the fluctuation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode) that specifies "normal state (00H)", or the first half section (for example, up to 30 fluctuations) during the ST period. , The latter half section (for example, up to 93 fluctuations), and the final section (for example, up to 100 fluctuations), when each section ends, it is assumed that the game state transition specified number of times has been reached. , Update to the fluctuation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode) that specifies the next section. Further, when the change is made to a new variation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode), a "game state designation command" including the game state transition information is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. The effect control unit 24 can grasp the transition of the game state by the game state designation command.

<11. Special electric accessory management process: Fig. 14>
Next, the special electric accessory management process (step S060) in FIG. 8 will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the details of the special electric accessory management process in step S060.

In FIG. 14, the CPU 201 first determines the state of the small hit medium flag (step S501). When the small hit middle flag is ON (= 5AH) (step S501: = 5AH), a small hit for controlling a series of operations of the special variable winning device (open / close control of the large winning opening) related to the small hit game. A process is performed (step S504), and the special electric accessory management process is exited.

When the small hit middle flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S501: ≠ 5AH), then the state of the condition device operation flag is determined (step S502). When the condition device operation flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S502: ≠ 5AH), in this case, it is not in the small hit game (step S501: ≠ 5AH), and it is not in the big hit game, so do nothing. Exit the special electric accessory management process.

When the condition device operation flag is ON (= 5AH) (step S502: = 5AH), processing is performed according to the special electric accessory operation status (00H to 04H) (step S503: special electric accessory status branch processing). .. The "special electric accessory operation status" is a status value indicating the behavior of the special variable winning devices 42 and 52, and this status value is changed according to the processing state, and the special electric accessory operation status storage area of the RAM 203 is used. Stored in.

In the special electric accessory operation status branching process in step S503, the process corresponding to the special electric accessory operation status value is called and executed. Specifically, when the special electric accessory operation status is "start processing (00H)", the jackpot start processing (step S505) is performed, and when the special electric accessory operation status is "operation start processing (01H)", the special electric is applied. When the accessory operation start process (step S506) is in operation (02H), the special electric accessory operation in progress process (step S507) is performed. When the accessory operation continuation determination process (step S508) is "during end process (04H)", the jackpot end process (step S509) is called and executed. By these processes, the operation of the special variable winning device 52 related to the big hit game is controlled. Here, the above-mentioned "start processing (00H)" indicates that the standby state is before the start of the big hit game, and "operation start processing (01H)" indicates that the standby state is before the start of the round game. "Operating (02H)" indicates that the round game is being executed, and "Continuing determination (03H)" indicates that it is being determined whether or not to continue the next round game. Shown, "in the big hit end processing (04H)" indicates that the end processing at the end of the big hit game is in progress. When any of the processes of steps S505 to S509 is completed, the process exits the special electric accessory management process and proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process of step S061 of FIG.

The big hit game control process (steps S505 to S509) and the small hit game control process (step S504) will be described below.

(11-1. Big hit start processing)
First, the jackpot start process (step S505) will be described.

At the start of the jackpot game, the special electric accessory operation status is set to the initial status value of "start processing (00H)". Therefore, when a big hit occurs, the big hit start process is first performed.

Here, first, as a setting process at the start of the big hit game required when starting the big hit game, 5 AH (ON state) is stored in the accessory continuous operation device operation flag, and the special electric accessory operation status is set to "operation start process". Switch to "Medium (01H)" (store 01H in the special electric accessory operation status) and store 01H in the continuous count counter. The above-mentioned "accessory continuous operation device operation flag" is a flag for designating the operation state of the accessory continuous operation device, and when the flag is in the ON state (= 5AH), the accessory continuous operation device is operating. It indicates that (round game continuation is possible), and when the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the accessory continuous operation device is not activated (round game continuation is not possible). Further, the "continuous number counter" is a counter for managing the number of consecutive executions of the round game, and the current number of rounds is stored here. Since "01H" is set for the continuous number counter here, the current number of rounds indicates the 1st round.

Next, the "big hit start setting table (not shown)" is acquired. In this "big hit start setting table", the maximum number of rounds (specified round number data), round display LED number (specified round number display data), and start interval time are determined according to the special symbol judgment data (big hit type). The main control unit 20 refers to the jackpot start setting table and stores each data according to the jackpot type this time in the storage area of the RAM 203 corresponding to each. The above "start interval time" is an interval section from the time when the confirmation display time of the special symbol is confirmed and the big hit is confirmed until the special variation winning device 52 is activated, and defines the section where the opening effect is performed. Refers to the time width.

Next, a "big hit start command" instructing the start of the opening effect is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, the jackpot start process is exited, and the process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process in step S061 of FIG. The above "big hit start command" is information that can identify the current big hit type and the game state at the time of winning the big hit (for example, the current big hit type and the game state at the time of winning the big hit (variable pattern distribution designation number (variable pattern distribution designation number). In addition to the role of instructing the start of the opening effect, including Tcode) and / or internal game state information), a series of hit effects (opening corresponding to each type of jackpot) developed during the jackpot game on the effect control unit 24 side. It is also used when determining the production, round production, round end production, ending production, etc.).

(11-2. Special electric accessory operation start processing)
Next, the operation start processing of the special electric accessory (step S506) will be described.

Here, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero. The "interval time before the start of the round game" is set in the special symbol accessory operation timer here. As this interval time, in the first round (1st round), the "start interval time" set in the jackpot start processing in step S505 is monitored, but after the 2nd round, this special electric accessory operation start processing ( When passing through step S506), the "interval time before opening (interval time set in the special electric accessory operation continuation determination process (step S508) described later)" is monitored. Until the special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero, the special electric accessory operation start process is exited without doing anything.

On the other hand, when the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero, that is, when the pre-opening interval time (in the case of the first round (1R), the start interval time) has elapsed, the "large winning opening opening / closing operation setting process" is performed. In this big winning opening opening / closing operation setting process, the opening / closing operation pattern of the big winning opening 50 is set according to the special symbol determination data (big hit type) and the current number of rounds. Specifically, the special symbol role is the opening / closing operation time of the large winning opening 50 (for example, 29.8 seconds for the long opening pattern and 0.1 seconds for the short opening pattern) for opening / closing the large winning opening 50. It is stored in the object operation timer, and the solenoid control data for controlling the large winning opening solenoid 52c is set. The control data for the solenoid is changed according to the value of the special symbol accessory operation timer. Then, when the above-mentioned large winning opening opening / closing operation setting process is completed, the special electric accessory operation status is switched to "operating (02H)" (02H is stored in the special electric accessory operation status), and the special electric accessory management process is exited. , Proceed to the right-handed notification information management process in step S061 of FIG.

(11-3. Processing during operation of special electric accessory)
Next, the process during operation of the special electric accessory (step S507) will be described.

Here, first, the processing for confirming the maximum number of winnings in the large winning opening is performed. In this large winning opening maximum winning number confirmation process, the number of winning balls to the large winning opening 50 is counted, it is confirmed whether or not the winning ball number has reached the maximum winning number, and when the maximum winning number is reached, Clears the special symbol accessory operation timer. As a result, the timer value set in the special electric accessory operation start process in step S506 is forcibly set to zero, and when the maximum number of winnings is reached, the opening large winning opening 50 is closed. There is. After completing the process of confirming the maximum number of winnings of the large winning opening, it is determined whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero, and until the timer value becomes zero (whether the large winning opening opening operation time elapses or Or until the maximum number of prizes is reached), do nothing and exit this special electric accessory in operation process.

If the special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero (when the maximum number of winnings is reached or the large winning opening opening operation time has elapsed), the special electric accessory operation status is set as the end of this round game. Switch to "Continuing judgment (03H)" (store 03H in the special electric accessory operation status), store the remaining ball discharge time (for example, 1980 ms) in the special symbol accessory operation timer, and process during special electric accessory operation. The process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process in step S061 of FIG.

(11-4. Special electric accessory operation continuation judgment processing)
Next, the special electric accessory operation continuation determination process (step S508) will be described.

Here, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero. Since the remaining ball discharge time (1980 ms) after the big winning opening is closed is set in the special symbol accessory operation timer here (see step S507), whether or not the remaining ball discharge time has elapsed is determined. It is judged. Until the special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero, the special electric accessory operation continuation determination process is exited without doing anything.

On the other hand, when the special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero (the remaining ball discharge time has elapsed), the continuous number counter is acquired to check whether the current number of rounds has reached the specified number of rounds (maximum number of rounds). judge. If the maximum number of rounds has not been reached, 1 is added (+1) to the continuous number counter as processing when the round game is continued, and the "interval time before opening" is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer, and the special electric combination The object operation status is switched to "operation start processing (01H)" (01H is stored in the special electric accessory operation status). As a result, the process exits the special electric accessory operation continuation determination process and proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process in step S061 of FIG.

When the current number of rounds reaches the maximum number of rounds, the "end interval time" is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer, and then the special electric accessory operation status is set as various setting processes at the end of the round game. Switch to "End processing (04H)" (04H is stored in the special electric accessory operation status). The above-mentioned "end interval time" is an interval section from the end of the round game of the final round to the end of the jackpot game after the remaining ball discharge time has elapsed, and is the time for which the ending effect is performed. Refers to the width.

Then, a "big hit end command" instructing the start of the ending effect is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, the process exits the special electric accessory operation continuation determination process, and the process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process in step S061 of FIG. .. The above-mentioned "big hit end command" includes information on the current big hit type and the game state at the time of winning the big hit, that is, information that can specify the game state after the big hit game is finished, and the effect control unit 24 side after the big hit game. It is also used when determining the production mode of. The above-mentioned "information on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot" can include information on the variable pattern distribution designation number (Tcode) and the internal game state. As a result, when the game state at the time of winning the big hit is "CZ", it is possible to specify whether the CZ is "CZ (normal)" or "CZ (latent probability)". It is possible to correctly shift the production mode after the jackpot game is over.

(11-5. Big hit end processing)
Next, the jackpot end processing (S509) will be described.

Here, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero. Since the end interval time is set in the special symbol accessory operation timer here, it is determined whether or not the end interval time has elapsed. Until the special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero, the jackpot end process is exited without doing anything, and the process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process in step S061 of FIG.

When the special symbol accessory operation timer becomes zero (the end interval time has elapsed), each data of the transition state buffer set in the game state transition preparation process of step S411 during the special symbol fluctuation start processing (FIG. 12) is input. Use it to set the game state after the big hit game. As a result, the game state after the big hit game is specified. Next, various data (condition device operation flag, accessory continuous operation device operation flag, continuous number counter, maximum number of rounds, round display LED number, various buffers, etc.) used during the jackpot game control process are cleared and special. The electric accessory operation status is switched to "start processing (00H)" (00H is stored in the special electric accessory operation status).

When the jackpot end process is completed, a series of control processes related to the jackpot game is completed. After exiting this jackpot end process, the process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process in step S061 of FIG.

(11-6. Small hit processing)
Next, the small hit process (step S504) will be described.

In the small hit game, the "round game" like the big hit game is not executed. Therefore, here, as already explained, the operation mode during the small hit game is "2R system big hit game" (in this embodiment, only "2R latent big hit" is provided, but the non-probable "2R non-probable big hit" is provided. ”Is provided, a process for controlling the opening / closing operation pattern of the large winning opening is performed so as to be substantially the same as the operation mode of).

When entering this small hit process, first, the "start interval time" in the small hit game is set in the special symbol accessory operation timer, and the "small hit start command" instructing the start of the opening effect is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. .. When the start interval has elapsed, next, the small hit game state transition preparatory process for designating the game state after the small hit game, which will be described later, is performed, and then the opening / closing operation of the large winning opening 50 is referred to as "2R big hit game". The solenoid control data for controlling the big winning opening solenoid is set so that the operation mode is the same or very similar. As a result, the big winning opening 50 opens like a 2R big hit game, and a pseudo round game during the small hit game is executed. The maximum number of prizes to the big prize opening 50 during the small hit game is the same as that of the big hit (for example, 9 pieces), and when the maximum number of prizes is reached, the large prize opening 50 is moved to the closed state. To. However, since the small hit game does not execute the round game like the big hit game, the pseudo round game itself is terminated when the maximum number of winnings is reached.

When the series of opening and closing operations of the large winning opening 50 is completed, a "small hit end command" instructing the start of the ending effect is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. This "small hit end command" includes information that can identify the current small hit type and the game state at the time of winning the small hit, and the effect control unit 24 determines the effect mode after the small hit game. It is also used when doing. Therefore, this small hit end command plays a role as a game state specification command for designating the game state in addition to the role of the start instruction of the ending effect, and has the same function as the "big hit end command" related to the big hit game. It is a control command.

<12: Processing on the effect control unit side: FIGS. 15 to 23>
Next, the effect control process on the effect control unit 24 side of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 23. The processing on the effect control unit 24 side is mainly a predetermined main process (effect control side main process: FIG. 15) and a timer interrupt process activated by a scheduled interrupt from the CTC (effect control side timer interrupt process: It is configured to include FIG. 17).

<13. Production control side main processing: Fig. 15>
FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a main process on the effect control unit side (main process on the effect control side). The effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) starts the main process on the effect control side shown in FIG. 15 when the power is turned on from the outside to the game machine main body.

In the main process on the effect control side, the CPU 241 first performs the necessary initial setting process before the start of the game operation (step S071). Here, as the initial setting processing, for example, command reception interrupt setting, starting point return processing of a movable body accessory, CTC initial setting, timer interrupt permission, initial setting of register values inside the CPU including each part of the microcomputer, etc. I do.

When the initial setting process of step S071 is completed, the main loop process of steps S073 to S078 is performed at predetermined time intervals as the process during normal operation, and the effect software random number update process of step S079 is repeated otherwise.

In the process of step S072, the CPU 241 refers to the counter value for the main loop update cycle and determines whether or not the main loop update cycle that triggers the execution of the main loop process has arrived (step S072). The main loop update cycle counter is a counter that is updated in the main loop update process (step S096 in FIG. 17) during the effect control side timer interrupt process described later. In this embodiment, the main loop process is performed every 16 ms. Until this main loop update cycle arrives (step S072: NO), the random numbers for various effects lottery are updated (step S079: software random number update process for various effects).

When the main loop update cycle has arrived (step S072: YES), the CPU 241 performs a reception command analysis process (step S073). In this reception command analysis process, it is monitored whether or not the effect control command is stored in the command reception buffer, and if the effect control command is stored, this command is read, and the effect control process corresponding to the read effect control command I do. The effect control command includes the hold addition command, the hold subtraction command, the variation pattern specification command, the decorative symbol specification command, the variation stop command, and the like, which have already been described.

For example, when at least a variation pattern specification command (in this embodiment, a variation pattern specification command and a decorative symbol specification command) is received and stored in the reception buffer, the information included in the command (in the command analysis process) ( One or more types of production patterns are determined based on the fluctuation pattern information and the winning information (or winning type information). The production pattern determined here works as a "parts production" as an element constituting the production scenario. Next, a time schedule is determined as to when and how much production time width the above-determined production pattern (parts production) should appear, and a production scenario is constructed by this. The production scenario data is stored in the scenario setting area of the RAM 243. By developing various production patterns (parts production) incorporated in this production scenario one after another or at the same time, a "production scenario" in a broad sense is realized. When incorporating the "button notice effect" into the determined effect scenario, the "non-operation effect scenario" when the frame effect button 13 is not operated is constructed as the basic effect scenario. If the frame effect button 13 is operated during the button advance effect effect, it is necessary to change the non-operation effect scenario to the "operation effect scenario" when the frame effect button 13 is operated. The process related to such a scenario change is performed in the "scenario update process" of step S074 described below.

When the received command analysis process in step S073 is completed, the scenario update process is performed (step S074). In this scenario update process, the contents of the timer required to execute the effect pattern are updated. A typical one of the above timers is an effect scenario timer that manages a time schedule related to the occurrence timing of the effect. For example, within the variable period in which the special symbol is variablely displayed (special symbol variable period) and within the variable period in which the decorative symbol is variablely displayed (decorative symbol variable period), that time. This timer manages a temporal schedule of what kind of effect pattern is to appear in the effect means with how much time width on the axis. Such an effect scenario timer is also used in the effect processing related to the LED data update process (step S075) and the effect accessory control data update process (step S077), which will be described later. Here, this effect scenario timer is monitored, and when the time when one effect occurs, sound data for the speaker 46 and a liquid crystal command for image display control are created and stored in a designated area of the RAM 243. .. The LED data for the optical display device is created by the LED data update process (step S075) described later, and the motor control data for the movable body accessory is created by the effect accessory control data update process (step 077) described later. To.

Next, the LED data update process is performed (step S075). In this LED data update process, LED data for an optical display device such as a decorative lamp unit 45 or an LED is created based on the effect scenario data and the effect scenario timer, and is stored in a designated area of the RAM 243. The data created here is used in the effect LED management process (step S095 in FIG. 17) during the timer interrupt process described later.

Next, sound output processing is performed (step S076). In this sound output process, the sound data created in the scenario update process of step S074 is acquired, and when there is sound data to be reproduced, the sound effect is output from the speaker 46 through the sound control unit (sound source LSI). As a result, the sound production according to the production scenario is realized.

Next, the effect accessory control data update process is performed (step S077). In this effect control data update process, drive control data for the movable accessory motors 61, 61a, 61b, 63, 73a is created based on the effect scenario data and the effect scenario timer. The data created here is used in the effect management operation management process (step S094 in FIG. 17) during the timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

Next, a noise countermeasure management process for monitoring the malfunction of the sound source LSI or the like is performed (step S078). If the program goes into a runaway state due to a malfunction, the watchdog timer times out and the CPU is automatically reset to recover from the runaway state. As a result, the production software random number update process of step S079 is performed until the next main loop update cycle is reached after the main loop process is completed.

<14. Command reception interrupt processing: Fig. 16>
Next, the command reception interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a command reception interrupt process on the effect control side. When the effect control command is received from the main control unit 20, this command reception interrupt process is executed with priority over the effect control side timer interrupt process (FIG. 17) described later.

First, when an interrupt based on the strobe signal from the main control unit 20 side occurs during the execution of the main process shown in FIG. 15, the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) saves the contents of the register to the stack area (step S081). The received effect control command is stored in the command reception buffer of the RAM 243 (step S082), and the contents of the saved register are restored (step S083). As a result, the command reception interrupt process is terminated, the process returns to the main process on the effect control unit side before the interrupt, and the main process on the effect control side is performed until the next interrupt based on the strobe signal occurs. In this way, when various effect control commands sent from the main control unit 20 are received, this command reception interrupt process is executed, and when the effect control command is received, the command is stored in the command reception buffer. Will be done.

<15. Effect control side timer interrupt processing: Fig. 17>
Next, with reference to FIG. 17, the timer interrupt processing on the effect control side will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the effect control side timer interrupt process. This effect control side timer interrupt process is activated by an interrupt from the CTC at regular time intervals (about 1 ms), and is interrupted and executed during the effect control side main process execution.

In FIG. 17, when a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 201 saves the contents of the register in the stack area (step S091) and then performs an effect button input management process (step S092). In this effect button input management process, the presence / absence of an operation (ON operation) detection signal input from the frame effect button 13 is monitored, and when it is confirmed that the operation detection signal has been received, the detection information is transmitted to a predetermined area of the RAM 243. Store in. This information is used for the button notice effect.

Next, the liquid crystal command transmission process is performed (step S093). In this liquid crystal command transmission process, if there is a liquid crystal command created in the scenario update process (step S074) during the main process on the effect control side of FIG. 15, the liquid crystal command is transmitted to the display control unit (liquid crystal control CPU). The image display control for the liquid crystal display device 36 is executed. As a result, the image production according to the production scenario is realized.

Next, the effect management is performed (step S094). In this effect management, the movable accessory motors 61, 61a, through the drive control unit, are based on the motor drive control data for the movable accessory created in the effect control data update process (step S077). The control signal is output to 61b, 63, 73a. As a result, a visual effect by the movable body accessory according to the effect scenario is realized.

Next, the effect LED management is performed (step S095). In this effect LED management, the decorative lamp unit 45 and the LED are lit and blinked through the light display control unit based on the LED data created in the LED data update process (step S075). As a result, a light effect that matches the effect scenario is realized.

Next, the main loop update process for managing the main loop update cycle is performed (step S096). In this main loop update process, the main loop update cycle counter is updated for each interrupt (main loop update cycle counter + 1). The counter for the main loop update cycle is a counter that circulates in a range of multiples of 16 (for example, 0 to 31) by, for example, increment processing.

After completing the processes of steps S091 to S096 above, the saved register contents are restored (step S097). As a result, the timer interrupt process is terminated, the process returns to the effect control side main process before the interrupt, and the effect control side main process is performed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

<Details of received command analysis processing: FIGS. 18 to 23>
18 to 23 show the processes executed in the received command analysis process (step S073 in FIG. 15), which are closely related to the present invention. Hereinafter, a case where a "winning command", a "variation pattern designation command", a "decorative symbol designation command", and a specific command required for the launch guidance notification effect are received (stored) will be described.

<16. Command reception process at the time of winning: Fig. 18>
FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a received command analysis process when a winning command is received. The winning command handled here is an effect control command transmitted in step S321 of the start port check process of FIG.

In FIG. 18, when the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) receives the winning command, it first analyzes the content of the winning command and acquires the look-ahead determination result information (step S710). Here, the acquired information is stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the RAM 203. Similar to the hold storage area of RAM 203, the look-ahead information storage area corresponds to the special symbol 1 side and the special symbol 2 side (the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the special symbol 1 side and the special symbol 2). A look-ahead information storage area) corresponding to the side is provided. Further, these look-ahead information storage areas are provided with hold 1 look-ahead information storage area to hold n look-ahead information storage areas (n = 4 in this embodiment) corresponding to the number of operation hold balls, and each of them is provided with maximum operation hold. The look-ahead determination result information for the number of balls can be stored.

Further, although not shown, since the hold addition command transmitted in step S321 (FIG. 10) has already been received and stored, the content of the hold addition command is analyzed and the hold ball number information is also acquired (step S711). ).

Next, it is determined whether or not the read-ahead prohibition period is in effect (step 712). During the period in which look-ahead should be prohibited, the period during which the treasure chest effect is generated in the first to third embodiments, the remaining number of times in the first half of ST is less than four times, the remaining number of times in the second half of ST is less than four times, and ST There is one final remaining number. If a look-ahead notice effect occurs during a specific effect mode related to these sections, there is a possibility that the effect of the specific effect mode and the look-ahead advance notice effect may cause a contradiction or a sense of incongruity. Therefore, while the game state is staying in these sections, the pre-reading notice lottery process is bypassed so that no contradiction or discomfort occurs between the pre-reading production notice and the production performed under the specific production mode. To do so. That is, in the case of the look-ahead prohibition period (step S712: YES), the process proceeds to step S719 described later without doing anything.

When it is not the look-ahead prohibition period (step S712: NO), it is determined whether or not the "continuous notice counter" is zero (step S713). This "continuous notice counter" is a counter for determining a prohibition period for prohibiting the occurrence of duplicate pre-reading notice effects. Specifically, when the operation-holding ball is targeted for execution of the look-ahead notice effect by the look-ahead notice lottery in step S714 described below (when the look-ahead notice lottery is won), the operation hold ball is digested. It is a counter for preventing the newly generated operation holding ball from being executed as the look-ahead effect until (used for the variable display operation). For the above reason, the "continuous notice counter" stores the value of the current number of operation hold balls N or the maximum number of operation hold storage (N = 4) (see step S717 described later). ..

If the continuous notice counter is not zero (step S713: NO), it is assumed that the look-ahead notice lottery is prohibited, and the process proceeds to step S718 without doing anything.

When the value of the continuous notice counter is zero (step S713: YES), it is assumed that the look-ahead notice lottery is permitted, and the look-ahead notice lottery process is performed (step S714). This look-ahead effect lottery process draws a lottery as to whether or not to perform a look-ahead notice effect based on the look-ahead variation pattern type specified by the winning command as a result of pre-reading the variation pattern type that will be determined at the start of the variation. It is a thing. The "winning command" in the present embodiment is in a form including information on each of the look-ahead variation pattern type and the special symbol type. Therefore, the information regarding the look-ahead variation pattern type among these information is used as a lottery trigger for the look-ahead effect lottery. However, when the information on the number of operation hold balls, the look-ahead fluctuation pattern type, and the special symbol type is supported on the hold addition command, when a control command including the information on the look-ahead fluctuation pattern type in that form is received. In addition, a look-ahead production lottery will be held.

Here, there are two types of "look-ahead notice production". One is a one- or multiple symbol variation display operation of a hold display change system notice effect that occurs when a game ball wins a prize at the start port and the start condition is satisfied (that is, when the prize is won or the start condition is satisfied). It is a look-ahead notice effect (continuous notice effect) performed in the above, and in the present embodiment, it is a look-ahead notice effect performed by continuously performing the advance notice effect of the hold display change system, that is, by shifting the display position. The other is to display the notice effect of the change system at the start of fluctuation, which occurs when the symbol variation display operation of the symbol game is executed (that is, at the start of fluctuation), over a plurality of symbol variation display operations. This is a look-ahead notice effect, and in the present embodiment, it is a continuous notice effect performed by continuously performing a notice effect (lightning appearance) of an image display change system. Therefore, the lottery for the look-ahead notice effect includes a lottery as to whether or not to perform a change-type notice effect at the start of fluctuation and a lottery as to whether or not to perform a change-type notice effect at the start of fluctuation. Do it independently. However, when both are put together and drawn together (a form in which the look-ahead notice effect and the change-type notice effect at the start of fluctuation are executed in relation to one lottery result), the lottery for the look-ahead notice effect is performed at the same time. It may be configured to win the lottery of the notice effect of the change system at the start of the change.

In the pre-reading effect lottery process, the pre-reading notice effect is determined by referring to the pre-reading effect lottery table (not shown) based on the pre-reading variation pattern type specified by the winning command (step S714), and the result of the pre-reading effect lottery. The effect information (information about the look-ahead effect lottery result) based on the above is set (look-ahead notice operation status setting process: step S715). This effect information is used when the pre-reading notice effect is displayed. The effect information set here includes (i) information for designating the look-ahead notice effect of the hold display change system, for example, information related to hold display (specifying the hold display mode by the hold color and the icon image), and ( ii) Information that specifies both the above-mentioned (i) hold display change system advance notice effect and the following (iii) change start change system advance notice effect, and (iii) change start change system advance notice effect. Information (for example, type of lightning effect (strong lightning effect (high expectation of winning), medium lightning effect (medium winning expectation), weak lightning effect (low expectation of winning))) and (iv) look-ahead effect lottery Non-winning information (information that the pre-reading notice effect of the hold display change system is not executed) is included.

In the case of this example, when only the look-ahead notice effect of the hold display change system of the above (i) is performed, "01H" is set to the look-ahead operation status, and both the hold display change system and the change start change system of the above (ii) are performed. If you want to perform the look-ahead notice effect of, set the look-ahead operation status to "02H", and if you want to perform only the look-ahead notice effect of the change system at the start of fluctuation of (iii), set the look-ahead operation status to "03H" When none of the pre-reading advance notice effects of) is executed, "00H" is stored in the pre-reading operation status in the predetermined area of the RAM 243 (step S715).

When the pre-reading effect lottery process is completed, the process proceeds to step S716 to determine the pre-reading determination operation status. When the look-ahead operation status is "00H" (step S716: = 00H), the look-ahead notice effect is not performed, so the process proceeds to step S718 without doing anything.

On the other hand, when the look-ahead operation status is other than "00H" (step S716: ≠ 00H), the value of the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4 or 1 to 8) is stored in the continuous advance notice counter (step S717). .. As a result, the look-ahead notice lottery for new operation-holding balls is prohibited for a certain period of time. It should be noted that this counter value is decremented by 1 each time the old operation holding ball generated earlier is digested in the decorative symbol designation command reception process of FIG. 20, which will be described later.

By setting the value of the number of reserved balls existing when the pre-reading effect lottery is won in the "continuous notice counter" (step S717) as described above, during the number of symbol fluctuations corresponding to the value of the number of reserved balls. Even if a new winning ball is generated, the lottery for the pre-reading notice effect is prohibited (step S713: route of NO). For example, when the current number of reserved balls is three, the lottery of the look-ahead notice effect is prohibited during the three symbol fluctuations corresponding to the number of reserved balls, thereby preventing the occurrence of the look-ahead notice effect. The above-mentioned "continuous notice counter" can also be used as information regarding the pre-reading notice winning. In other words, if the "continuous notice counter" is zero, it is determined that the look-ahead notice is not being won (pre-reading notice is not executed), and if the value is other than zero, it is determined that the look-ahead notice is being won (pre-reading notice is being executed). it can.

Proceeding to the process of step S718, a process of setting a look-ahead notice effect scenario including the results of the look-ahead notice lottery process, the look-ahead notice operation status setting process, and the continuous notice counter setting process is performed (step S718).

Proceeding to the process of step S719, the hold addition display process is performed (step S719). In this hold addition display process, a liquid crystal control command for performing a hold display (see FIG. 5) on the liquid crystal display screen is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit side. Here, a liquid crystal control command for designating the operation hold ball number information, a liquid crystal control command for displaying a look-ahead notice effect of the hold display change system, and the like are transmitted. As a result, the number of icon images corresponding to the number of operation-holding balls is lit up on the liquid crystal display screen, and the hold display mode (normal hold color (white) or dedicated hold color (normal hold color (white)) related to the look-ahead notice effect of the hold display change system Blue, yellow, green, red, D pattern or iridescent color)) is displayed.

<18. Reception processing of fluctuation pattern specification command: Fig. 19>
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a reception command analysis process when a variation pattern designation command is received. This variation pattern designation command is an effect control command transmitted in step S412 of the special symbol variation pattern creation process of FIG.

In FIG. 19, when the effect control unit 24 (CPU241) receives the variation pattern designation command, it first analyzes the content of the command (step S731), acquires the variation pattern information of the special symbol which is the content, and RAM243. It is stored in the predetermined area of (step S732). The effect scenario during the symbol variation display game is not yet determined at this point, but is determined when the decorative symbol designation command sent following the variation pattern designation command is received. That is, the production scenario in the symbol variation display game (decorative symbol variation display game) is determined based on the variation pattern information stored here and the information (special symbol determination data information) included in the decorative symbol specification command. It has become.

<19. Reception processing of decorative pattern specification command: Fig. 20>
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a reception command analysis process when a decorative symbol designation command is received. This decorative symbol designation command is an effect control command transmitted in step S415 of the special symbol variation start processing of FIG. Here, based on the fluctuation pattern information obtained by the variation pattern designation command reception process of FIG. 19 and the information obtained by the decoration symbol designation command, the effect during the symbol variation display game (various notice effects) and the decorative symbol The display mode (temporary stop symbol, reach symbol, stop decoration symbol, etc. of the pseudo-people), the advance notice effect by the movable body accessory, etc. are decided, and the effect scenario related to this variable display game is configured. In the present embodiment, the main control unit 20 side transmits the hold subtraction command, the variation pattern specification command, and the decorative symbol specification command to the effect control unit 24 in this order (step S404 of the special symbol variation start process of FIG. 12). (See S412 and S415), when the effect control unit 24 side receives this decorative symbol designation command, it performs reception processing of the decorative symbol designation command of FIG. 20.

In FIG. 20, the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) first analyzes the content of the decorative symbol designation command and acquires the content (step S740).

Next, a decorative symbol stop symbol lottery process is performed (step S741). In this decorative symbol stop symbol lottery process, the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol (decoration) to be finally stopped are based on the variation pattern information obtained in the process of step S732 and the winning type information included in the decorative symbol designation command. The combination of symbols to stop symbols) is determined by lottery. For example, when the content of the variation pattern is the hit variation pattern specified by the reach effect and the winning type information is the 15R long open probability variation jackpot, the stop display mode of the decorative symbol related to the 15R long open probability variation jackpot is determined. , First, the left symbol is determined by lottery, then the decorative symbol that can form the reach state with the left symbol is determined as the right symbol (determination of the reach symbol), and based on the determined left symbol and right symbol. , 15R long open probability variation The middle symbol is determined so that the decorative symbol sequence (big hit symbol) related to the jackpot is finally stopped. As a result, the combination of decorative symbols when the current decorative symbol variation display game is completed is determined. The determined decorative symbol data is stored and used in the decorative symbol data storage area of the RAM 243.

Next, launch guidance information control processing is performed (step S742). In this launch guidance information control process, the output of the right-handed guidance information about when to display the right-handed guidance information is started, and how long the right-handed guidance information is continued, that is, the game is terminated in the symbol variation display game. The output termination process is performed as to whether the pattern is to be terminated after being continued over a plurality of symbol fluctuations. In addition, the output of the right-handed guidance information about when to switch the display of the right-handed guidance information to the display of the right-handed guidance information is started, and how long the left-handed guidance information is continued, that is, in the symbol variation display game. Output termination processing is performed as to whether to terminate or to terminate after continuing over a plurality of symbol fluctuations. The details will be described later, but the switching from the display of the right-handed guidance information to the display of the right-handed guidance information is performed in the situation where the probability change state in which the right-handed guidance information is displayed continues in the first embodiment. So, it is done when you win the fall lottery. However, in the other embodiments 1 to 5, the transition from the state with electric support to the state without electric support is processed by regarding that the condition for switching from right-handed to left-handed is satisfied.

(19-1. Treasure chest production: S743 to S745)
Next, the process proceeds to step S743, and it is determined whether or not the state with electric support has ended, and whether or not the probability change state has ended in the first embodiment (step S743). When the probabilistic state has fallen to the normal state and the state is switched to the state without electric support (step S743: YES), the treasure box effect (real treasure box effect) directly related to the presence or absence of the continuation of the electric support is performed for a predetermined period, for example. A setting is made to generate the fallen variable display game period or a plurality of variable display periods including the fallen variable display game period (step S744). As a result, the liquid crystal display screen is switched from FIG. 51 (a) to FIG. 51 (b), and the treasure box effect screen is displayed with a predetermined number of executions of one variable display game to a plurality of variable display games. Become. If the state with electric support continues (step S743: NO), it is decided by lottery whether or not to show the treasure box effect (gase's treasure box effect) that is not directly related to the presence or absence of electric support. .. The details of the treasure chest effect in each embodiment will be described later.

Next, the process proceeds to step S746, and it is determined whether or not the treasure chest effect set in step S744 or S745 is being executed (treasure box effect period) (step S746). If the treasure chest production period is in progress (step S746: YES), in order to suppress other productions and give priority to the treasure chest production, the continuous advance notice production process and the notice effect lottery process are bypassed, and step S749 is performed. move on. If it is not during the treasure box effect period (step S746: NO), the process proceeds to step S747 in order to perform the continuous advance notice effect process and the advance notice effect lottery process.

(19-2. Continuous notice production processing: S747)
In step S747, first, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading operation status set in step S715 of FIG. 18 is "00H: pre-reading notice effect is not executed". Here, when the look-ahead operation status is not "00H: No look-ahead notice effect is executed", that is, "01H: Only hold look-ahead notice is executed", "02H: Both hold look-ahead notice and background (lightning bolt) look-ahead notice are executed", " This continuous notice effect processing (step S747) is performed on condition that either of "03H: Execution of background (lightning bolt) look-ahead notice only".

The continuous advance notice effect process performed in step S747 is an effect process for displaying the continuous advance notice effect of the "change system at the start of change" in the current symbol change display game. Here, when the pre-reading advance notice effect of the "change system at the start of fluctuation" is won in the pre-reading effect lottery process of step S714 (FIG. 18) (the pre-reading operation status is "02H" or "003"), the dedicated advance notice image ( A lightning effect effect data by displaying a lightning bolt image) that imitates a lightning bolt is created, and this is stored in the scenario setting area of the RAM 243. As a result, a lightning effect by displaying a lightning image appears on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 (see FIG. 6 (2)).

The continuous notice effect of this "change system at the start of fluctuation" is executed until the counter of the "continuous notice counter" becomes zero, and the value of this "continuous notice counter" is subtracted by 1 each time the symbol change display game is played. Will be done. For example, when the pre-reading notice lottery winning hold is the third hold, the counter value of the continuous notice counter is set with the number of held balls N = 3, and is "N = 3". Continuous notice will be given until all three reserved memories are exhausted.

In addition, the continuous advance notice effect processing is performed unless the continuous advance notice counter is zero and the look-ahead operation status is "02H" when another hold addition command or a winning command is received from the next time onward. Absent. That is, unless the operation hold ball that is the target of the look-ahead notice effect is digested, the look-ahead notice effect for the new operation hold ball does not occur, and the occurrence of the duplicate look-ahead notice effect is prohibited. .. As a result, the occurrence of duplication between the pre-reading notices by the pre- and subsequent act-holding balls is restricted, and the player can grasp which of the act-holding balls is the pre-reading notice.

(19-3. Notice production lottery process: S748)
In the notice effect lottery process of step S748, one of a plurality of notice effects is given based on the notice lottery table (not shown) defined in the notice effect lottery table designation table (not shown) and the content of the variation pattern. Select the production by lottery.

This notice production lottery process also includes a production mode transition process that informs the transition (fall) from the probability change state (state with electric support) to the normal state (state without electric support). Is done. Regarding the production mode that informs this fall without it, the mode transition opportunity to shift from one production mode to another production mode is established when a jackpot end command is received, when a specific SP fluctuation pattern is received, or when a non-specific SP is received. When the fluctuation pattern is received, the transition trigger lottery is won, the number of lost fluctuations is 30th, the end of the electric support is received, and the like. The details will be described later.

(19-4. Production information setting process)
After completing the advance notice effect lottery process in step S748, the effect information setting process is then performed (step S749). In this effect information setting process, the suppression counter is cleared, and the effect information related to the advance notice effect determined in steps S743 to S748 is set. Here, the effect information (for example, information that enables the type of the determined advance notice effect to be specified) is set when constructing the effect scenario in the effect scenario setting process of step S750 described later.

(19-5. Production scenario setting process)
Next, the effect scenario setting process is performed (step S750).

In the effect scenario setting process of step S750, an effect scenario to be displayed in the present decorative symbol variation display game is constructed based on the above effect information. For each advance notice effect, the start timing in the symbol variation display game and the period (effect time width) at which the effect appears are predetermined, and the advance notice effect determined through steps S743 to S748 and the current change. Based on the content of the pattern (variable time, presence / absence of reach effect, type if there is reach effect, presence / absence of pseudo-ream, number of pseudo-reams if there is pseudo-ream, etc.), this decorative pattern variation display game A production scenario of various productions to be developed inside is constructed. The data of this effect scenario is stored in the scenario setting area of the RAM 243.

When the effect scenario setting process of step S750 is completed, the decorative symbol designation command reception process is exited, and thereafter, the decorative symbol variation display game based on the above effect scenario is started.

<20. Launch guidance information control processing: FIGS. 21 to 23>
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing details of the launch guidance information control process related to the launch guidance notification effect. In this launch guidance information control process (FIG. 21), the start time of the launch guidance information production has arrived, specifically, a game state command (a specific effect including game information necessary for the appearance of the launch guidance notification effect). It is determined whether or not the control command) has been received, and if the game state command is received (step S761: YES), the launch guidance information output start process shown in FIG. 21 is executed (step S762). The above-mentioned "game state command" includes, for example, a variation pattern specification command, a game state specification command, a predetermined command transmitted during a hit (big hit (small hit) start command, big hit (small hit) end command, etc.), and the rest. There are electric support count command, time saving end command, fall command, right-handed instruction command, left-handed instruction command, etc., and what kind of command is used to display the launch guidance notification effect according to the current game state. Whether or not the launch guidance notification effect is realized can be appropriately determined according to the type of the game machine.

(20-1. Launch guidance information output start processing: FIG. 22)
In this launch guidance information output start process (FIG. 22), it is determined whether or not the start trigger of the launch guidance notification effect has arrived based on the received game state command (step S771).

If the received game state command is, for example, a big hit start command, the right-handed guidance information “→” (arrow) is included as shown in FIG. 25 (a) in order to notify the right-handed hit due to the start of the hit game. Starts the output of launch guidance information (right-handed notification) consisting of the display of the guidance notification image 373, the voice "right-handed" message, the direction instruction by the light arrow, etc., and the launch guidance information output flag is switched to ON. (Step S772). This is because during the hit game, the large winning opening 50 on the right flow path 3c is opened, so that it is advantageous for the player to perform "right hit" aiming at the right flow path 3c side. .. In addition, even if you win the big hit lottery while there is electric support and the winning game starts, the state where "right-handed" is advantageous does not change, so if it is a hit that occurred while there is electric support, right It may be controlled so that the notification of the hitting guidance information is not newly started (updated).

In addition, the received game state command includes a command including electric support start information that can identify the start of the state with electric support (for example, a big hit end command related to a big hit with electric support (probability variable big hit or time saving big hit), a right-handed instruction command If so, the right-handed notification is started, and the launch guidance information output flag is switched to ON (step S772). When a command including the electric support start information that can identify the start of the electric support start state is transmitted, the game state is shifted to the electric support state (probability change state or time saving state), and the player is on the right. It is advantageous for oneself to perform "right-handed" aiming at the flow path 3c side. When the symbol variation display game this time has a specific variation pattern (for example, SP reach variation pattern), a advance notice effect image that hinders the advance notice effect effect may be generated on the display screen when it overlaps with the guidance notification image 373. There is sex. Therefore, in the case of a specific fluctuation pattern or during a specific advance notice effect, the launch guidance notification effect may be suppressed (prohibited or interrupted). As a result, the display of the symbol variation and the advance notice effect according to the reach variation pattern is prioritized, and the display of the right-handed or left-handed guidance information can be suppressed (prohibited or interrupted).

Further, the received game state command includes a command including electric support start information that can identify the start of the state without electric support (for example, a fall command (transmitted in step S425 of FIG. 13), a time saving end command, and a left-handed command. If it is an instruction command or the like), the output of the left-handed guidance information is started (step S779). When a command including the electric support start information that can identify the start of the electric support start state is transmitted, the game state is shifted to the electric support no state (latent state or normal game state), and it flows to the right. The possibility of winning a prize in the lower starting port 35 on the route 3c is extremely low. For this reason, it is advantageous for the player to perform "left-handed" aiming at the upper starting port 34 in the state without electric support. In the case of the first embodiment, when the fall command (transmitted in step S425 of FIG. 13) is received, since the start of the fallen symbol change has already been switched to the time saving state, the left-handed notification guidance information is immediately obtained. Output (left-handed notification) is started. However, when the number of guaranteed electric support is attached as in the second to third embodiments, when the state with electric support shifts to the state without electric support because the final symbol change of the guaranteed number of electric support has arrived. Starts the output of left-handed guidance information at the timing when the end of the symbol variation (or immediately after the end: for example, the lapse of the confirmed display time) when the time saving end command is received arrives. This is because if there is no hold memory, the next symbol change of the final number of guaranteed electric support may be started without the guidance notification.

(20-2. Launch guidance information output end processing: FIG. 23)
Returning to the launch guidance information control process of FIG. 21, when it is determined in step S763 of the process that the launch guidance information output flag is ON (step S763: YES), the launch guidance information output shown in FIG. 23 The end process is executed (step S764).

In the launch guidance information output end process of FIG. 23, it is first determined whether or not the predetermined launch guidance information output end time (end time of the launch guidance notification effect) has arrived (step S781). In the case of right-handed notification, for example, a predetermined game period (for example, symbol variation 1) is set from the time when the state with electric support (probability change state or time saving state) ends or the state with electric support shifts to the state without electric support. ~ 2 rotations) or when a predetermined time has elapsed, or when the specified round game related to the normal jackpot is completed (when the jackpot game is completed), it is determined that the output end time of the launch guidance information has arrived. In the case of left-handed notification, a predetermined game period (for example, from the time when the big hit game is started, the time when the state without electric support shifts to the state with electric support, and the time when the state without electric support shifts to the state with electric support) It is determined that the output end time of the launch guidance information has arrived at the time when the symbol variation is 1-2 rotations) or the predetermined time has elapsed. However, the output end time of the launch guidance information can be arbitrarily set. For example, the guidance is performed from the time when the launch position advantageous to the player changes or the output start time to the time when the predetermined game period or the predetermined time elapses. The notification may be continued.

When it is determined that the output end time of the launch guidance information has arrived (step S781: YES), the launch guidance information output flag is switched to OFF (step S782), and the launch guidance information output end process ends (step S783). ). As a result, the launch guidance information image 373 is not displayed on the display screen 360 of the liquid crystal display device 36. Therefore, even if the launch guidance information notification is interrupted or stopped in the middle, it will continue during the period until the launch guidance information output flag is switched to OFF.

On the other hand, if the predetermined launch guidance information output end time has not arrived (step S781: NO), the launch guidance information output end process is terminated without doing anything.

<21. Specific Example 1: FIGS. 26 to 27>
26 to 27 show that in the “immediate fall type” gaming machine according to the first embodiment (section a in FIG. 24), the gaming state falls from the probabilistic state to the normal state, and as a result, the guidance information in the launch direction is shown. This is a specific example (specific example 1 of the first embodiment) in which the display is switched from "right-handed" to "left-handed" and the treasure box effect appears at that time.

(21-1. Real treasure chest production: t6 in Fig. 26, Fig. 27)
With reference to FIG. 26, in the specific example 1 in the category a, the 15R jackpot game is started by winning the 15R probability variation jackpot at the time t1, and the 15R jackpot game is finished with the electric support from the time t2. The symbol variation display operation is started in the lower position (probability change state: high probability state, electric support state). During the jackpot game and the probability change state, the guidance notification image 373 showing the launch direction of the game ball is displayed in the "display mode showing the right-handed direction" by the launch guidance information display control of the effect control unit, and the right-handed hit is displayed. It is clearly shown to the player that it is advantageous. As a "display mode indicating the right-handed direction" of the guidance notification image 373, in the specific example 1, a plurality of right-pointing arrow images 374a shown in FIG. 25 (a) are arranged in a straight line to the right at a constant speed or intermittently. In this dynamic display mode of "right arrow right movement", a right-pointing arrow image 374a is projected in the upper right corner of the liquid crystal screen. The broken line arrow 375 is added in the drawing to indicate that the “moving direction” of the arrow image 374a is the right direction, and does not indicate the arrow image displayed on the liquid crystal screen.

The probabilistic state (high probability, with electric support) continues in the state where the right-pointing arrow image 374a is displayed on the liquid crystal screen in the dynamic display mode. After that, at time t6 in FIG. 26, the fall lottery is won (fall prize), the probability change state is changed to the normal state (low probability, no electric support), and the "state with electric support" is changed to the "state without electric support". Move to. Since the game machine handled here has a configuration in which "left-handed" is advantageous to the player when there is no electric support, the guidance notification of the launching direction is "right-handed" according to the rules regarding the game machine. Will have to be changed to "left-handed".

Therefore, on the liquid crystal screen, the launch direction indicated by the guidance notification image 373 in the launch direction is the launch direction shown in FIG. 25 (a) from the time when the symbol variation display operation is started based on the winning of the fall lottery (fall prize). To switch as shown in (b). In this example, the direction of the arrow image switches from right to left. That is, it is a dynamic display mode in which a plurality of left-pointing arrow images 374b are arranged in a straight line and sequentially move to the right at a constant speed or intermittently. In this case, the point to be noted is that the direction indicated by the arrow image 374 only switches from right to left, and the direction in which a plurality of left-pointing arrow images 374b are arranged in a straight line and sequentially move at a constant speed or intermittently is still ". It is "to the right" and does not change. In this dynamic display mode of "left arrow right movement", the right arrow image 374a is projected in the upper right corner of the liquid crystal screen.

On the other hand, from the time when the symbol variation display operation is started based on winning the fall lottery (fall prize), as shown in the section from time t6 to t7 in FIG. 26, under the control of the effect control unit. "Treasure chest production" is a skeptical production that makes you feel that there is a possibility that you have shifted to the state without electric support (in the example of Fig. 26, there is a possibility of a probable change fall), that is, you may have fallen to the state without electric support. appear. When the frame effect button 13 corresponding to the push button image 372 shown in FIG. 25B is repeatedly hit to open the treasure box image 371 on the screen, the state with electric support (probability change state in the example of FIG. 26) continues.

FIG. 27 shows the relationship between the symbol variation (symbol variation display operation), the notification of the launch guidance information, and the advance notice effect based on the time transition centered on the time t6 of FIG. 26. The symbol variation before the fall prize is "N-0", the symbol variation after the fall prize is "N + 1", the symbol variation after that is "N + 2", "N + 3", and so on. It is assumed that the variation pattern is the shortest among all variation patterns (for example, a normal variation pattern with a variation time of 1 second).

As shown in the column of "design variation", in FIG. 27, a command of a normal variation pattern (treasure box production failure) is transmitted at time t6. The period of the symbol variation N + 1 starting from this time t6 is the period during which the symbol variation display game of one unit continues, but in the case of the immediate fall type of the first embodiment, at the same time as the start of this symbol variation display game, it is already in the normal state. It has fallen to. Further, as shown in the column of "launch guidance information notification" in FIG. 27, the guidance notification image 373 switches from the dynamic display mode of "right arrow right movement" to the dynamic display mode of "left arrow right movement" at time t6. However, in the case of the first embodiment, this timing is the same as the start of the symbol variation display game won in the fall lottery because the internal game state immediately falls to the normal game state by winning the fall lottery. Therefore, in the case of the specific example 1 (section a in FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, on the other hand, the launch guidance information is switched from "right arrow right movement" to "left arrow right movement" at the same time as the start of the symbol variation N + 1. On the other hand, as can be seen from the relationship between the "symbol variation" and the "notice effect" in FIG. 27, a normal variation pattern (for example, a variation time of 2 seconds) is transmitted with respect to the symbol variation N + 1 at time t6, and a notice is given accordingly. A treasure chest production appears as a production (skeptical production), and this treasure box production continues during the period of symbol fluctuation N + 1 to N + 2.

Therefore, from the beginning of the game period in the symbol variation display game that has fallen to the state without electric support, the guidance notification image 373 of the dynamic display mode of "left arrow right movement" in FIG. 25 (b) appears, and the game is played. At the same time, the "treasure box effect" shown in FIG. 25B occurs, and the player repeatedly hits the frame effect button 13 as a push button corresponding to the push button image 372. Therefore, the player's attention is focused on the repeated hits of the push button and whether or not the treasure box on the screen opens (the attention-distracting effect works). Moreover, the guidance notification image 373 displayed at that time is of the dynamic display mode of "left arrow right movement" in FIG. 25 (b), and the left arrow image is the "left arrow image" in FIG. 25 (a). It is moving in the same direction as in the dynamic display mode of "Right arrow right movement". It is predicted that the time when the player recognizes that the guidance notification image 373 is switched from the right-handed notification to the left-handed notification will be shifted from the middle of the game period of the N + 1 fluctuation or later due to the synergistic action of both of these actions. Will be done. In other words, there are many cases where the player keeps hitting the push button repeatedly until the game result of "treasure box production" is obtained, that is, until it is decided whether or not the treasure box will be opened, and the treasure box production is thoroughly appreciated. As a result, the player will be able to fully enjoy the fun of the treasure chest production. Therefore, the time when the player recognizes that the guidance notification image 373 has been switched from the right-handed notification to the left-handed notification is too early, and the player stops and the operating rate of the game machine decreases. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the significance of providing the treasure chest effect is lost.

(21-2. Gase's treasure chest production: t4 in Fig. 26)
In FIG. 26, a variation pattern specification command related to a specific reach variation pattern (a variation pattern specification command related to the appearance of a successful treasure box effect) is transmitted at time t4 during the probability variation state before the fall winning, and the probability variation fall. A treasure chest effect that has nothing to do with Gase (a treasure box effect that notifies the continuation of the probability change state) may occur. In this Gase treasure chest production, a screen that opens the treasure box appears from the middle or the end of the reach production period, and the notification result by the treasure box production is "Treasure box production success: Electric support continuation". Except for this point, the other points are the same as the failure treasure chest production described at time t6 in FIG. By the existence of this Gase treasure chest production (successful treasure chest production) in addition to the real treasure chest production (failure treasure chest production), the real treasure chest production (failure treasure chest production) becomes the Gase treasure chest production (successful treasure chest production). It becomes difficult to distinguish from the production), the tension for the treasure box production increases, and the interest in the game increases. In addition, by making the real treasure chest effect and the treasure box effect of Gase appear at an appropriate frequency, the player has more opportunities to pay attention to the treasure box effect, and the player recognizes that the guidance notification image 373 has been switched. You can delay the time.

<22. Specific Example 2A of Embodiment 2: FIGS. 28 to 29>
FIG. 29 shows a treasure chest effect as a skeptical effect that doubts the continuation of the electric support state in the case of category b in the "probability change fall type 1" game machine in which the electric support is not provided after 100 rotations of the electric support guarantee. It is a specific example (specific example 2A in the category b) which took the case as an example.

(22-1. Launch direction guidance notification and treasure chest production: te in Fig. 29)
In the specific example 2A of the second embodiment, the electric support is guaranteed within 100 times, and the player falls and wins the prize at time t6 to shift from the probable change state to the time saving state. The state with support continues until the symbol changes at the 100th rotation of the electric support guarantee. However, in the 101st rotation of the symbol, the player is in a state without electric support, and left-handed is more advantageous to the player. Therefore, in FIG. 29, the guidance notification image 373 is switched from the right-handed notification to the left-handed notification at or just before the time te when the symbol variation at the 100th rotation of the electric support guarantee ends.

However, the switching of the guidance notification image 373 is only switched from the right-pointing arrow image 374a of "right-handed arrow right-moving" to the left-pointing arrow image 374b of "left-handed arrow right-handing". That is, the only difference between the arrow image 374a and the arrow image 374b is that the direction of the arrow image is switched from right to left, and the direction in which the guidance notification image 373 is moving as a whole is changed before and after the switching. Absent.

Further, at the same time as the switching of the guidance notification image 373, the treasure box image 371 shown in FIG. 25B appears on the liquid crystal screen, and the player participation type treasure box production is started. You will have to hit the push button repeatedly to open the treasure chest, and you will be paying attention to it. As a result, it is delayed to notice that the guidance notification image 373 has changed from the right-handed notification to the left-handed notification, and the time when the player stops launching is not from the beginning of the symbol variation but from the symbol variation. It shifts from the middle to the end. Therefore, it is possible for the player to enjoy the treasure chest production.

(22-2. Gase's treasure chest production: t4 in Fig. 29)
In FIG. 29, the command of the SP reach fluctuation pattern (successful treasure chest production) is transmitted at time t4 during the probability change state before the fall prize, and it is related to the treasure chest production of Gase, that is, the fall to the state without electric support. There will be no production (always with electric support). Therefore, as in the case of FIG. 26, it is possible to distinguish between the real treasure chest production (failed treasure chest production) and the Gase treasure chest production (successful treasure chest production) by the possibility of this Gase treasure chest production. It becomes difficult, the tension for the treasure chest production increases, and the interest in the game increases.

In the second embodiment, when the guaranteed number of times of electric support ends and the state becomes no electric support, the switch to the left-handed guidance notification is made, but in the symbol variation in the state without electric support, Alternatively, it can be configured so that the skeptical effect associated with the left-handed guidance notification appears from the symbol variation to one or more symbol variations, or over a plurality of symbol variations before and after including the symbol variation. .. However, in the case of the second embodiment, since the end timing of the state with electric support is fixed (electric support guarantee 100 times), the symbol changes in the state without electric support, or one or more times from the symbol change. If the skeptical effect is to appear over the fluctuations or over multiple symbol fluctuations before and after the symbol fluctuation, it merely notifies the end of the state with electric support. I will end up. Therefore, unlike the first embodiment, the treasure box production according to the second embodiment does not notify whether or not the state with electric support continues, but mainly a notice production that arouses the expectation of winning the jackpot. It is preferable to use it as a notice effect (expectation effect) that suggests the degree of expectation of winning. Specifically, as a treasure chest production having a character different from that of the first embodiment in the state with electric support, in the case of a specific loss fluctuation pattern (for example, SP reach fluctuation pattern), "Gase's treasure chest production (failure) "Treasure chest production: Loss)" is displayed, and in the case of a hit fluctuation pattern, "Genuine treasure chest production (successful treasure chest production: big hit)" is displayed. In this way, if the real treasure chest effect and the treasure box effect of Gase are mixed and appear at an appropriate frequency, the game is more than simply making the treasure box effect appear by the symbol fluctuation around the ST specified number of times. Since there are more opportunities for the player to pay attention to the treasure box effect that suggests the expectation of winning, and the player can delay the time when the player recognizes that the guidance notification image 373 has been switched, the above-mentioned attention distracting effect can be effectively obtained. be able to.

<23. Specific Example 2B of Embodiment 2: FIG. 30>
FIG. 30 shows a treasure chest effect as a skeptical effect that doubts the continuation of the electric support state in the case of category c in the "probability change fall type 1" game machine in which the electric support is not provided after 100 rotations of the electric support guarantee. It is a specific example (specific example 2B in the category c) which took the case as an example.

(23-1. Launch direction guidance notification and treasure chest production: te in Fig. 30)
In the specific example 2B of the second embodiment, the 100th rotation of the electric support guarantee arrives at time te without winning the fall lottery within 100 rotations of the electric support guarantee in the probability change state, and the latent probability change starts from the next 101st rotation. Right-handed is disadvantageous to the player because it becomes a state and there is no electric support. Therefore, in FIG. 30, the guidance notification image 373 is switched from the right-handed notification to the left-handed notification at the timing of the time te when the symbol variation at the 100th rotation of the electric support guarantee ends.

That is, the right-pointing arrow image 374a of "right-handed arrow right-moving" is switched to the left-pointing arrow image 374b of "left-handed arrow right-handing". The only difference between the arrow image 374a and the arrow image 374b is that the direction of the arrow image is switched from right to left, and the moving direction is unchanged before and after the switching.

Further, at the same time as the switching of the guidance notification image 373, the treasure box image 371 shown in FIG. 25B appears on the liquid crystal screen, the player participation type treasure box production is started, and the player opens the treasure box. Therefore, the push button will be repeatedly hit, and attention will be paid to that. As a result, it is delayed to notice that the guidance notification image 373 has changed from the right-handed notification to the left-handed notification, and the time when the player stops launching is not from the beginning of the symbol variation but from the symbol variation. It shifts from the middle to the end. Therefore, it is possible for the player to enjoy the treasure chest production.

(23-2. Gase's treasure chest production: t4 in Fig. 30)
In FIG. 30, during the latent probability change state before the fall prize, the command of the SP reach fluctuation pattern (successful treasure box production) at the time of loss is transmitted at time t4, and the command is transmitted to the “gase treasure box production”, that is, the state without electric support. A production that has nothing to do with falling occurs. The treasure chest production here works as a production (skeptical production) that makes you wonder if you are in a latent state without falling from the high probability state, and "Gase's treasure box production (successful treasure box production)" is latent. A deterministic notification that the state is in a certain state, or a notification that the probability is high, "a real treasure box production (treasure box production failure" is a deterministic notification that the state is not in a latent state, Or it works as an effect to notify that there is a high possibility. The treasure box effect here is to decide which treasure box effect to appear (determined by lottery) according to the current effect mode and game state. Therefore, by allowing this treasure chest effect to occur, it is possible to notify the player whether or not the player is still in the high probability state, or to give the player a guess factor as to whether or not the player is in the high probability state. , The tension for the treasure chest production will increase, and the interest in the game will increase.

<24. Section length in which the treasure chest effect appears in the second embodiment: FIG. 31>
In the second embodiment, in the case of the specific example 2A in which the fall prize is won within 100 rotations of the electric support guarantee (winning the fall lottery), the state with electric support ends at the time te when the electric support guarantee 100 rotations elapses and the normal state is restored. After the transition, the next symbol variation display game will be executed without electric support. Also, in the case of Specific Example 2B in which the player did not fall and win the prize within 100 rotations of the electric support guarantee, the state with electric support ends at the time when 100 rotations of the electric support guarantee elapses and shifts to the normal state, and the next symbol change. The display game will be executed without electric support. At this time, the guidance notification image 373 switches from the dynamic display mode of "right arrow right movement" to the dynamic display mode of "left arrow right movement". That is, in the second embodiment, the time point te for switching to the left-handed guidance notification is known in advance. Therefore, in the second embodiment, the treasure box effect is displayed over a plurality of symbol fluctuation operations before and after the symbol variation in which the switch to the left-handed guidance notification occurs. Then, this left-handed guidance notification is continuously terminated up to the first rotation when the symbol variation display time is long, and up to a plurality of rotations (up to the second rotation in FIG. 31) when the symbol variation display time is short. To do.

FIG. 31 illustrates the section length in which the treasure chest effect appears in the second embodiment. In the first embodiment, the symbol variation operation is continued for about 2 to 3 rotations even after the switching time point te in which the guidance notification image 373 changes from the “right arrow right movement” to the “left arrow right movement” is passed. However, in the case of the second embodiment (FIG. 31), the treasure chest production is started from the time when the switching time point te is known in advance and the treasure box effect is started a plurality of times from the switching time point te. This is different from the case of the first embodiment (FIGS. 26 to 27).

Here, as shown in FIG. 31, the treasure box effect is produced from the symbol variation operation (time tx at the 97th rotation) four rotations before this time te, centering on the known time te at which the end of 100 guaranteed electric support times comes. After that, until the time te when the guaranteed number of electric support times is 100 times (97th rotation to 100th rotation), a treasure box effect is generated for each symbol fluctuation display operation, so that the player can set the boundary of the symbol fluctuation. Continue the treasure chest production multiple times in a row without making people aware of it. During this period, as shown in FIG. 28A, the guidance notification image 373 is shown by the dynamic display mode of “right arrow right movement”. Then, from the time te, the guidance notification image 373 is switched to the dynamic display mode of "left arrow right movement". After that, until the second rotation (102nd point) of the time ty, a treasure box effect is continuously generated by a total of 6 rotations (97th rotation to the 102nd point). The treasure chest production that is continuous from the time tx to ty (97th to 10th rotations) on the number of fluctuations is regarded as a continuous production that does not make the player aware that it is divided into a plurality of times, that is, a continuous production. Make it appear.

In this way, a treasure box effect is produced by repeatedly hitting the effect push button from 4 rotations before (97th point) to 2 rotations (102nd point) centering on the end point te of 100 times of guaranteed electric support. The reason is that the guidance notification image 373 is left-handed guidance in consideration of the fact that the fluctuation pattern selected during the probability variation operation or the time reduction operation is often a normal fluctuation pattern having a short time width of about 1 to 2 seconds. This is to prevent the player from being aware of the time when the notification is switched.

In Specific Examples 2A and 2B of the second embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 31, a treasure box in which the push button is repeatedly pressed within a period of a total of 6 rotations of the symbol variation from the 97th rotation to the 102nd point symbol variation display operation. During the period when the effect is displayed and the treasure box effect is continuing, the guidance notification image 373 moves from the dynamic display mode of "right arrow right move" (FIG. 28 (a)) to "left arrow right move". A relationship is created in which the time point for switching to the target display mode (FIG. 28 (b)) comes, thereby exerting an effect of distracting attention, and the player is not aware of the time point when the guidance notification image 373 switches to the left-handed guidance notification. I am doing it. In addition, the treasure chest effect is continued for a period from the time te when the guidance notification image 373 is switched to the left-handed guidance notification until the second symbol change.

The reason for doing this is to create a situation in which the treasure chest effect continues even after the time when the left-handed guidance notification is switched to, that is, the 101st rotation symbol variation display game is completed. The reason for this is that in the case of a fall-type or ST-type game machine, considering that the digestion time required for one symbol change game is as short as about 1 to 2 seconds, the symbol change at the 101st rotation when the electric support is lost. Compared to ending the treasure chest production with, it is better to continue the treasure chest production for the period until the second symbol change after the time te, in order to guide the notification image to the dynamic display mode of "left arrow right movement". This is because the player can be unaware of the time when the 373 is switched.

<25. Relationship between treasure chest production and reserved memory in the second embodiment: FIG. 32>
FIG. 32 shows that, as another case in which the time point for switching to the left-handed guidance notification is known in advance, when there are a plurality of hold memories and there is a hold memory in which the state with electric support ends, the hold storage is in progress. This is an example in which a treasure chest effect is displayed by executing one or several symbol fluctuation operations until the hold memory at which the state with electric support is terminated is subjected to the symbol variation. This example is applicable not only to the cases of the specific examples 2A and 2B of the second embodiment but also to the specific example 3B of the third embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 32A, in the case of Specific Examples 2A, 2B, and 3B, the game ball is high on the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 while the guaranteed number of times of electric support is 100 times undigested. It is picked up frequently and prizes are frequently generated in the lower starting port 35, and the number of reserved memories is 3 to the maximum maximum number of 4 reserved memories. In FIG. 32 (a), “hold 1” of the hold memory corresponding to the 96th rotation out of 100 times of guaranteed electric support is provided to the symbol variation display game, and new hold memory is used during digestion as the hold memory. As a result, "hold 4" is generated, and the "hold 4" is a hold memory corresponding to the 100th rotation of the guaranteed number of electric chew support. At this time, on the liquid crystal screen, a plurality of guidance notification images 373 are arranged in a straight line with arrow images 374a pointing to the right on the upper right corner side of the screen during the game, and the speed is constant or intermittent in the right direction (direction along the broken line arrow 375). It is displayed in a dynamic display mode of "right arrow right movement" that moves sequentially, and the player is informed that right-handed striking is advantageous.

When the hold memory of the 96th rotation is exhausted, the entire hold memory of "hold 1" to "hold 4" is then shifted as shown in FIG. 32 (b), and the hold memory of "hold 1" corresponding to the 97th rotation is changed. The hold memory is used for the symbol variation display game. At this time, a treasure chest effect appears on the LCD screen as a skeptical effect that doubts the continuation of the electric support state. When the frame effect button 13 corresponding to the push button image 372 shown in FIG. 32 (b) is repeatedly hit to open the treasure box image 371 on the screen, the state with electric support continues. At this time, the guidance notification image 373 continues to be displayed in the dynamic display mode of "right arrow right movement", and the right-handed notification is continued.

Subsequently, in FIG. 32 (c), the time te, which is the end of 100 times of guaranteed electric support, arrives, and the hold memory of “hold 4” is provided to the symbol variation display game. However, the treasure chest production is still continuing, and the guidance notification image 373 also continues the right-handed notification by the dynamic display mode of "right arrow right movement".

Subsequently, in FIG. 32 (d), the hold memory of “hold 5” is provided to the symbol change display game, and the symbol change at the 101st rotation is started. At the same time as the symbol variation of the 101st rotation is started, the guidance notification image 373 is a "right arrow right movement" in which a plurality of right arrow images 374a are lined up in a straight line and sequentially move to the right at a constant speed or intermittently. The dynamic display mode of "left arrow right movement" is switched from the dynamic display mode of "left arrow right movement" in which a plurality of left arrow images 374b are lined up in a straight line and sequentially move to the right at a constant speed or intermittently.

However, both the right-pointing arrow image 374a in FIG. 32 (c) and the left-pointing arrow image 374b in FIG. 32 (d) have opposite directions of arrows, and the moving directions are the same as indicated by the dashed arrow 375. The switch from the guidance notification to the left-handed guidance notification is not so remarkable on the screen, and the change is difficult to recognize. In addition to this, the treasure box effect continues to appear even in the 101st rotation of the symbol, and the player is urged to repeatedly hit the frame effect button 13. Therefore, the player becomes more conscious of participating in this treasure chest production and hitting repeatedly. As a result, it is considered that the launch (right strike) is often continued as it is without recognizing the switch to the left strike guidance notification and stopping the launch.

Subsequently, in FIG. 32 (e), the hold memory of "hold 6" is provided to the symbol change display game, and the symbol change at the 102nd rotation is started. The guidance notification image 373 has already been switched to the dynamic display mode of "left arrow right movement", but the treasure box effect continues to appear even in the pattern change at the 102nd rotation, and the player is repeatedly hit with the frame effect button 13. You will be prompted to do something. Therefore, in many cases, the player participates in the treasure chest production in the pattern variation of the 102nd rotation. As a result, until "hold 1" to "hold 6" are digested, the player participates in the treasure chest production and launches (right) without recognizing the switch to the left-handed guidance notification and stopping the launch. It is thought that the hitting) will be continued. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the player's tense state and enjoy the treasure chest production to the end over a plurality of continuous symbol fluctuations of the 97th rotation to the 102nd rotation.

Subsequently, in FIG. 32 (f), the hold memory of "hold 7" is provided to the symbol change display game, and the symbol change at the 103rd rotation is started. At this point, the liquid crystal screen will return to the normal production. Although the left-handed notification of the guidance notification image 373 is still continuing, it does not appear after the required predetermined number of fluctuations has passed.

<Modification example 1>
In the second embodiment (FIGS. 28 to 31), as a case where the time point of switching to the left-handed guidance notification is known in advance, attention is paid to the 100th guaranteed number of times of electric support, but the reserved memory that actually exists as a known value You can also pay attention to the number. If there are multiple hold memories, that can be grasped from the hold addition command, so when the second new hold memory occurs, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate the treasure chest effect, and the new hold memory is created. The treasure chest effect can be generated over the symbol variation corresponding to the number of the hold memory, provided that the hold memory is the one that won the treasure box effect generation lottery. In this case, the new hold memory won by the lottery may be considered to correspond to the hold 4 (100th rotation at the end of the electric support) in FIG. 32, and the processing operation is equivalent to the operation of the hold 4. ..

<26. Transition to production mode that informs the fall without it: Fig. 33-Fig. 35>
With reference to FIGS. 29 to 32, the effect mode transition for notifying the fall performed in Specific Examples 2A and 2B will be described.

When fall information indicating that the game state has fallen to a low probability state is transmitted from the main control unit 20 by a winning command or a hold addition command, "implicit information related to the fall" is transmitted based on this fall information. The configuration is set to notify in the production mode. However, what is notified to the player as implied information related to the fall is not a character that clearly conveys the fall, but a character that implicitly informs, that is, implies the possibility of the fall. In the present specification, the stimulus given to the player implicitly as to whether the current gaming state is in the high probability state, has fallen to the low probability state, or is about to fall is referred to as "suggestion information". Therefore, the implied information includes fall implied information that implicitly informs that the person has fallen and non-fall implied information that implicitly informs that the person has not fallen, depending on the strength of the implied information.

Specifically, the means for giving the above-mentioned implied information is determined at the transition destination as to whether or not there is a fall, that is, whether the current gaming state is in a high-probability state, has fallen to a low-probability state, or is about to fall. A certain effect mode type (morning, noon, evening, night, night + rain of background effect 361) is realized by associating with the game state at the start of the fluctuation when the symbol variation display operation starts and weighting it. There is. In other words, the appearance tendency of the production mode that is easy to shift when it has fallen, in other words, the production mode that is difficult to shift if it has not fallen, changes depending on the game state at the start of the fluctuation.

33 and 34 show which of the plurality of types of effect modes A to E prepared in advance as having different high probability expectations regarding whether or not the game state exists in the high probability state. It shows whether to shift, and both FIG. 33 and FIG. 34 integrally form a shift destination mode distribution table. Here, "mode" is an abbreviation for production mode.

This transition destination mode distribution table determines which of the plurality of types of production modes A to E prepared in advance as having different high probability expectations of the gaming state when the mode transition opportunity is established. , The transition destination is shifted in relation to whether or not the game state at the start of the fluctuation when the symbol variation display operation starts is a high probability state, and whether or not there is a hold memory related to the pending in-fall winning. By weighting so that the selection ratios of the above-mentioned effect modes A to E are different, if the game state is in a low probability state or there is a hold memory related to the hold in-fall winning, the selection ratio is adjusted. Therefore, the effect mode that is easy to shift to when the user has fallen is selected from the effect modes A to E.

Among the tables constituting this transition destination mode distribution table, the table of FIG. 33 is a combination of four factors (high / low probability state, presence / absence of electric support, presence / absence of winning in-hold fall, presence / absence of consecutive chan in hold). The game status classification determined by (hereinafter, simply referred to as the status classification) and one of a plurality of types of mode selection tables Ta to Td prepared for each status classification are assigned, and the status classification and the mode selection table Ta to Td are assigned. It is a table (hereinafter, simply referred to as "state classification association table") associated with.

Further, in the table of FIG. 34, the selection ratio (distribution rate) of the effect modes A to E selected as the transition destination by the mode selection tables Ta to Td assigned to the state classification in the state classification association table of FIG. 33 is determined. It is a thing (hereinafter referred to as "directing mode transition lottery table").

FIG. 35 shows specific examples of the above-mentioned effect modes A to E, and the effect modes A, B, C, D, and E are morning background effect, daytime background effect, evening background effect, night background effect, and night, respectively. ＋ It is a rain background production. Of these effect modes A to E, the effect modes A, B, C, and D are defined so that the high probability expectation increases in this order. The night background effect mode D, which has the highest expectation, is a jackpot confirmation mode. Further, the night + rain background production mode E is a production mode in which a big hit can be expected in a state where there is electric support, and for example, a production called a chance time production appears. Here, the state with electric support means a state (high base state) in which a period for opening the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 and an opening extension function for extending the number of times of opening are provided.

(Mode transition opportunity)
These effect modes A to E are shifted to either of them through the state classification association table (FIG. 33) and the effect mode transition lottery table (FIG. 34) on condition that the mode transition opportunity is established. The mode transition to the effect modes A to E includes (i) the end of a predetermined profit state such as the end of the jackpot game or the end of the time saving state, and (ii) the reception of a specific effect control command such as the SP reach fluctuation pattern. , (Iii) won the mode transition selection lottery, (iV) the number of lost fluctuations reached a predetermined number of times, and so on.

(State classification association table: FIG. 33)
The state classification association table of FIG. 33 defines the identification and type of the state classification, and the allocation of the mode selection tables Ta to Td to the status classification.

In the state classification association table of FIG. 33, four factors are involved in determining the state classification. The first factor is whether the gaming state at the time when the mode transition trigger is established and the special symbol variation display operation is started is a high probability state or a low probability state (high or low probability state), and the second factor. The factor is whether or not the open extension function is given (presence or absence of electric support). Therefore, the gaming states at the start of fluctuation are (a) high probability state + high base state (with electric support) = probability change state, (b) high probability state + Low base state (without electric support) = latent probability change state, (c) low probability state + high base state (with electric support) = time saving state, (d) low probability state + low base state (without electric support) = normal state , And are classified into four categories.

The third factor involved in the determination of the state classification is the presence or absence of the on-hold fall win that exists when the mode transition opportunity is established, that is, the fall lottery is won in the hold memory that is stored up to 4 pieces. Whether or not there is something that is pre-read if it exists (winning on hold). Therefore, the above-mentioned probable change state and latent probable change state are classified into a case where there is a hold in-fall win (columns e and g) and a case where there is no hold in-fall win (columns f and h), respectively. That is, when there is a hold in-fall win in the probable change state (column e), when there is no hold in-fall win in the probabilistic state (column f), and when there is a hold in-fall win in the latent probability change state (column g). , It is divided into the case where there is no pending in-fall winning in the latent probability change state (column h).

And the fourth factor involved in the determination of the state classification is the presence or absence of the jackpot winning in the hold (ream in the hold), that is, it is pre-read that the jackpot lottery is won in the hold memory stored up to 4 pieces. Whether or not there is something to be done (big hit on hold). Therefore, in the above-mentioned probabilistic state with and without the pending fall win (columns e and f), there are cases where there is a pending jackpot winning and cases where there is no pending jackpot winning (j, k; l, respectively). It is classified into (m column), and there are cases where there is a pending fall win and cases where there is no pending jackpot winning (columns g and h), respectively, and there are cases where there is a pending jackpot winning and cases where there is no pending jackpot winning (n). , O; p, q column).

That is, regarding the probable change state (column a), there is a case where there is a hold in-fall win and there is a hold in-game jackpot in the probabilistic state (column j: state category K1), and there is a hold in-game fall win in the probabilistic state and there is no hold in-house jackpot. In the case of (column k: state category K2), in the probabilistic state, there is a big hit in the hold without winning, and in the case of (l column: state category K3), there is a big hit in the hold without winning the fall in the hold. If there is no winning (m column: state classification K2), it is classified. Regarding the latent probability change state (column b), there is a case where there is a hold in-fall win in the latent probability change state and there is a big hit in hold (column n: state category K5), and there is a hold in-fall win in the latent probability change state and it is in hold. If there is no jackpot winning (column o: state category K6), if there is a pending jackpot winning without winning in the latent probability change state (p column: state category K7), and if there is a pending falling in the latent probability changing state It is classified as the case where there is no big hit in the hold and there is no winning (q column: state classification K8).

Next, in the case of the time saving state (column c) and the normal state (column d), since the gaming state is already in the low probability state, there is no event of falling from the high probability state. Therefore, the i column of the fall on hold is blank. Therefore, the time saving state (column c) and the normal state (column d) are further classified into a case where there is a big hit in hold and a case where there is no big hit in hold (columns r, s; t, u). That is, regarding the time saving state (column c), there are cases where there is a big hit in the hold in the time saving state (column r: state category K9) and cases where there is no big hit in the hold in the time saving state (column s: state category K10). being classified. Regarding the normal state (column d), there are cases where there is a big hit in hold in the normal state (column t: state category K11) and cases where there is no big hit in hold in the normal state (column u: state category K12). are categorized.

One of the mode selection tables Ta to Td is assigned to each of the individual state categories K1 to K12 determined by the combination of the above four factors. In the case of this embodiment, the state categories K1 to K4, K9, and K10 have a mode selection table Ta, the state categories K6 and K12 have a mode selection table Tb, and the state categories K5, K7, and K11 have a mode selection table Tc. , The mode selection table Td is assigned to the state division K8.

(Production mode transition lottery table: Fig. 34)
FIG. 34 is an effect mode transition lottery table showing the relationship between the mode selection tables Ta to Td and the effect modes A to E. The production modes A, B, C, and D are set so that the high probability expectation increases in this order, the production mode D is the jackpot confirmation mode, and the production mode E is under the high base state, and the jackpot can be expected. It is a chance production mode.

The effect mode transition lottery table of FIG. 34 includes each item of the mode selection tables Ta to Td, and each item Ta to Td is a list having a number of cells corresponding to the effect mode A to E to be the transition destination. In each cell of the list, the selection ratio for the effect modes A to E, that is, the value of the distribution rate (selection rate value) is set in a predetermined allocation distribution. For example, the item of the mode selection table Ta is composed of a list consisting of five cells corresponding to the effect modes A to E, and the first cell of the list has the selection rate value for the effect mode A in the second cell. Is the selection rate value for the effect mode B, the third cell is the selection rate value for the effect mode C, the fourth cell is the selection rate value for the effect mode D, and the fifth cell is for the effect mode E. Selectivity values are set respectively.

Then, in the list of each item of the mode selection tables Ta to Td, the selection rate values (percentage values) of the mode selection tables Ta to Td when the overall distribution rate for the effect modes A to E is 100% are shown. It is provided with weighting so as to have a predetermined selective distribution (distribution distribution) as a whole. In the case of this embodiment, the distribution distributions for the effect modes A to E are different from each other for each of the mode selection tables Ta to Td as follows. That is, the selection rate values of the effect modes A, B, C, D, and E are 0%, 0%, 0%, 0%, 100% in the mode selection table Ta, and 60%, 30% in the mode selection table Tb. 10%, 0%, 0%, mode selection table Tc is 10%, 30%, 50%, 10%, 0%, and mode selection table Td is 10%, 30%, 60%, 0%, 0%. It has become.

Therefore, the mode selection tables Ta to Td include the first mode selection table Td in which the selection ratio for the effect modes A to C increases in the same forward direction as the order of the effect modes (A to C) in which the high probability expectation is small. A second mode selection table (Tb) in which the selection ratio for the production modes A to C is large in the direction opposite to the order of the production modes with high high probability expectations (C to A), and a production mode with low high probability expectation. It has a third mode selection table Tc in which the selection ratio for the effect modes A to C increases in the same forward direction as the order (A to C), and also includes the selection ratio for the effect mode in which the jackpot is determined. Furthermore, it also has a fourth mode selection table Ta that shifts to the chance time effect at a rate of 100%.

Then, under a low base state (columns b and d in FIG. 33) to which the open extension function is not added, the game state is in a low probability state, or there is a hold memory related to the hold in-fall winning. In (columns g and i of FIG. 33), a second mode selection table (Tb) is selected according to the selection ratio on condition that there is no hold memory related to the winning in the hold (K6, K6 of FIG. 33). K12), the third mode selection table (Tc) is selected according to the selection ratio, provided that there is a hold memory related to the winning in the hold (K5, K1 in FIG. 33).

In addition, under the high base state (column a in FIG. 33) to which the open extension function is added, the game state at the start of the fluctuation is in the high probability state, and there is a hold memory related to the hold-in-fall winning in the hold. If not (column f in FIG. 33), the first mode selection table (Td) is selected according to the selection ratio on condition that there is no hold memory related to the winning in the hold (K4 in FIG. 33). ), The third mode selection table (Tc) is set to be selected according to the selection ratio (K5, K1 in FIG. 33), provided that there is a hold memory related to the winning in the hold. To.

Further, in the case of a high base state to which the open extension function is added and the gaming state at the start of the fluctuation is in a low probability state (columns c and i in FIG. 33), the hold related to the winning in the hold is held. The first mode selection table (Td) is selected according to the selection ratio on the condition that there is no memory (K10 in FIG. 33), and the selection ratio is on the condition that there is a hold memory related to the winning in the hold. The third mode selection table (Tc) is selected according to the above (K9 in FIG. 33).

However, in the case of this embodiment, the state classification association table is under the high base state (column a in FIG. 33) to which the open extension function is added, and the game state at the start of the fluctuation is in the high probability state and is held. When there is no hold memory related to the hold in-fall winning (column f in FIG. 33), and under the high base state to which the open extension function is added, the game state at the start of fluctuation becomes a low probability state. If so (columns c and i in FIG. 33), the same fourth mode selection table (Ta) is selected instead of the first mode selection table (Td) (K1 in FIG. 33). ~ K4, K9 ~ K10) are set.

(26-1. Relationship between presence / absence of pending in-fall winning and production modes A to E: FIGS. 33 to 34>
The effect modes A to E are selected via the mode selection tables Ta to Td described above.

(In the case of state classification K1 to K4 = probability change state)
With reference to FIG. 33, in the case of the state categories K1 to K4, that is, when the game state at the start of the fluctuation is a high probability state and is a "probability change state" (column a) with electric support, the fall winning is in the hold. Regardless of whether it is a certain case (column e) or a case where there is no fall winning in the hold (column f), the same "mode selection table Ta" is selected for all of the status categories K1 to K4. Will be done.

The mode selection table Ta is a table in which the effect mode E is selected 100% and no other effect modes are selected (see FIG. 34). Therefore, when the mode transition opportunity is established under the probability change state (state classifications K1 to K4), the effect mode E is selected via the mode selection table Ta, and the chance time effect mode (which may be a big hit under the high base state) ( FIG. 35 (e)) will be started.

For example, if the mode transition trigger is established by the end of the jackpot game and entering the probabilistic state (or by receiving a specific reach fluctuation pattern), the special symbol fluctuation display operation starts and the chance time production mode (Production mode E) starts. The transition to the chance time effect mode is performed regardless of whether or not there is a hold memory related to the hold in-fall win or the hold-in jackpot win at the start of the fluctuation. That is, when the transition of the effect mode occurs under the probability change state, the process is always started from the chance time effect mode of the effect mode E.

(In the case of state classification K5 to K8 = latent probability change state)
In the case of state categories K5 to K8, that is, when the game state at the start of fluctuation is a high probability state and is a "latent probability change state" (column b) without electric support, it is on hold when the mode transition opportunity is established. The type of mode selection table to be selected differs depending on whether or not there is a hold memory of the fall winning.

(Status classification K5 to K6 = If there is a fall on hold)
When there is a hold inward fall winning in the latent probability change state (column g), the mode selection table Tc or Tb is selected (column n, column o). Here, the mode selection table Tc is selected when there is a big hit in hold (state category K5), and the mode selection table Tb is selected when there is no big hit in hold (state category K6).

The mode selection table Tc is set so that the selection rate values for the effect modes A, B, and C (FIGS. 35 (a) to (c)) increase in this order, and the effect mode D (FIG. 35 (d)) in which the jackpot is confirmed is determined. The possibility of selecting is also set to remain 10%. That is, the selection rate values of the production modes A, B, and C are in the order of the highest probability expectation (effect mode A <B <C <D), and the production mode A (the production mode A) having the lowest high probability expectation. Selection rate value 10%), production mode B with medium high probability expectation (selection rate value 30%), production mode C with highest probability expectation (selection rate value 50%), high probability expectation Although it is low, it is in the production mode D (selectivity value 10%) in which the big hit is confirmed. Therefore, as a means of suggesting to the player that there is a possibility of a big hit in a high probability state, in the case of a hold in-fall win and a hold-in big hit win (state classification K5), the mode selection table Tc is used. It is assigned to be selected.

On the other hand, the mode selection table Tb is set so that the selection rate values for the effect modes A, B, and C (FIGS. 35 (a) to (c)) become smaller in this order, and the effect mode D (FIG. 35 (FIG. 35)) in which the jackpot is confirmed is determined. The probability of selecting d)) is set to 0%. That is, the selection rate values of the production modes A, B, and C are the production mode A (selection rate value 60%) having the lowest high probability expectation and the production mode B (selection rate value 30%) having a medium high probability expectation. The effect mode C (selection rate value 10%) has the highest high probability expectation, and the effect mode D (selection rate value 0%) has the lowest high probability expectation but the jackpot is confirmed. The mode selection table Tb is selected in the case where there is a hold in-fall win and there is no hold in-fall jackpot win as a means for notifying the player that there is a high possibility of a hold in-fall win by suggestive information (state classification K6). It is assigned so that.

(Status classifications K7 to K8 = No pending fall win)
Next, in the case of the latent probability change state and no pending in-fall winning (column h), the mode selection table Tc or Td is selected (columns p and q). Here, the mode selection table Tc is selected when there is a big hit in hold (state category K7), and the mode selection table Td is selected when there is no big hit in hold (state category K8).

Both the mode selection tables Tc and Td are set so that the selection rate values increase in the order of the production modes A, B, and C in which the winning expectation increases, and the difference is that the mode selection table Tc is a big hit. There is a possibility of selecting the confirmed effect mode D (10% possibility), and there is no possibility of selecting the confirmed effect mode D for the mode selection table Tc (0% possibility). Therefore, if there is no pending fall win in the latent probability change state, the player is informed by suggestive information that he / she may still be in a high probability state and that he / she may have won the pending jackpot lottery. As a means of doing so, when there is a big hit in hold (state classification K7), the mode selection table Tc is assigned to be selected. In addition, in the same case where the latent probability change state and there is no fall win in the hold and there is no big hit in the hold (state category K8), it is notified by suggestive information that there is a possibility that the player is still in the high probability state. As a means, the mode selection table Td is assigned to be selected.

(In the case of state classification K9 to K10 = time saving state)
On the other hand, when the gaming state at the start of fluctuation is a low-probability state, the event of further falling from that state cannot occur (column i: blank). Therefore, in this case, only the presence or absence of the pending internal chain is a factor for selecting the type of the mode selection table.

First, in the case of state categories K9 to K10, that is, when the game state at the start of fluctuation is a low probability state but a high base state with electric support (time saving state: column c), when the mode transition opportunity is established, The mode selection table Ta is selected regardless of whether or not the hold memory existing in the hold is the hold memory of the jackpot winning. Therefore, through this mode selection table Ta, the process shifts to the chance time effect of the effect mode E where there is a possibility of a big hit under the high base state. The chance time effect of this effect mode E is the same as the chance time effect selected in the state categories K1 to K4 under the high probability state, and is indistinguishable. Therefore, when shifting to the chance time production, the player expects the game machine to be in a high probability state.

(4-2-4. State classification K11-1 to K12 = normal state)
Next, in the case of the state categories K11 to K12, that is, in the low probability state and the low base state without electric support (normal state: column d), if there is a jackpot hold memory in the hold (column t) (state). Category K11), the mode selection table Tc is selected, and if there is no jackpot hold memory in the hold (u column) (state category K12), the mode selection table Tb is selected. This mode selection table Tb is set so that the selection rate values of the effect modes A, B, and C decrease in this order, and the possibility of selecting the effect mode D in which the jackpot is confirmed is set to 0%. .. Therefore, as a means of notifying the player that there is a high possibility that the player has won the fall on hold, the mode selection table Tb is assigned to be selected when there is no big hit on hold (state category K12). ..

(26-2. Characteristics of distribution to the destination of the production mode)
The transition destination mode distribution table including FIGS. 33 and 34 described above has the following features.

(Spot color 1)
Compared to the case of falling in the hold (state categories K1 to K2, K5 to K6: e, g columns), the case of not falling in the hold (state categories K3 to K4, K7 to K8: f, h columns) ) Is easier to shift to the production mode with high probability expectation.

This is because the same chance time is produced between the state categories K1 to K2 (column e) and the state categories K3 to K4 (column f) via the mode selection table Ta, even if there is a relationship between the presence and absence of the pending fall win. Since mode E is selected, there is no difference. Also, even if there is a relationship between with and without winning the fall in the hold, the same mode selection table Tc is used between the state category K5 (column g) and the state category K7 (column h) when there is a big hit in the hold. Since one of the effect modes A to D is selected with the same selectivity distribution, there is no difference. Therefore, there is a relationship between the presence and absence of the pending in-fall winning, and the difference between the two is only between the state classification K6 (column o) and the status classification K8 (column q). That is, in the case where there is no big hit in the hold, the mode selection table Tb is selected between the state classification K6 (column o) and the status classification K8 (column q) in the former, whereas the mode selection table Td is selected in the latter. Be selected. This is because the contents of the mode selection tables Tb and Td are different as follows.

On the other hand, the mode selection table Tb is determined so that the selection rate values for the effect modes A, B, and C are lower in the order of the effect modes A, B, and C, and the selection rate values for the effect mode A are set. It reaches up to 60% (Fig. 34). However, from the viewpoint of the high probability expectation, the high probability expectation increases in the order of the production modes A, B, C, and D, so that the production mode A having the highest selection rate value has the high probability expectation. The relationship is that it is the lowest production mode. On the other hand, the mode selection table Td is determined so that the distribution of the selection rate values for the effect modes A, B, and C is opposite to that of the mode selection table Tb, and the selection rate values are higher in the order of the effect modes A, B, and C. As a result, the selection rate value for the effect mode C reaches 60% (FIG. 34). Further, since the high probability expectation is set to be higher in the order of the production modes A, B, C, and D, the production mode C having the highest selection rate value is the production mode having the highest high probability expectation. There is a relationship.

Therefore, from these points, there is no hold memory that has won the fall lottery in the hold than when there is a hold memory that has won the fall lottery in the hold (when there is a fall win in the hold). It can be seen that it is easier to shift to the production mode with a high probability of expectation (when there is no pending fall-down winning).

(Spot color 2)
Further, regarding the mode selection tables Tc and Td, the distribution of the selection rate values for the production modes A, B, and C is similar, and the higher the ratio of shifting to the production mode with high probability expectation, the more the jackpot lottery in the hold There is a high possibility that the player has won, and if the effect mode D is selected on the effect mode transition lottery table via the mode selection table Tc, the winning of the pending jackpot is confirmed. Therefore, the player wins the jackpot lottery in the hold as the percentage of the production modes A, B, and C that shift to the production mode with the highest probability (higher in the order of the production modes A, B, and C) is higher. You would expect it to be. Further, when the shift to the night background effect of the effect mode D is performed, the player knows that the jackpot will be immediately obtained only by the appearance of the night background effect. Therefore, the player displays the jackpot and the pre-read hold memory in a variable manner. Until it is subjected to the operation, it waits for the hold memory (the one with the first rank in the digestion order) that exists before the look-ahead target hold to be subjected to the variable display operation and is digested, and those fluctuations. You will enjoy the notice effects that appear in the display operation (for example, continuous notice effects).

(Parentheses in FIG. 33)
In the above embodiment, when there is electric support (state classification K1 to K4 = probability change state, state classification K9 to K10 = time saving state), when the mode transition trigger is established, the effect mode E is selected via the mode selection table Ta. Then, it was decided to start the chance time production mode, which is the production mode under the high base state. That is, when there is electric support, the mode shifts to the same production mode E regardless of whether the probability state is high or low, whether or not there is a fall in hold, and whether or not there is a continuous chain in hold.

However, as suggested in FIG. 33, the mode selection table Tc may be selected when the pending jackpot is won, and the mode selection table Td may be selected when the pending jackpot is not won. Since the mode selection tables Tc and Td are all set so that the selection rate values increase in the order of the effect modes A, B, and C, the mode selection table Tc or Td is used in the same manner as when the mode selection table Ta is selected. If you make a choice, you can maintain the expectation that you are still in a high probability state.

It should be noted that the mode selection table Tc is selected when the pending jackpot winning status categories are K1, K3, and K9, and the mode selection table Td is selected when the pending jackpot non-winning status categories are K2, K4, and K10. There is a possibility of selecting the big hit confirmed effect mode D for the mode selection table Tc (10% possibility), but there is a possibility of selecting the big hit confirmed effect mode D for the mode selection table Tc. It is used properly in consideration of the difference that there is no (0% possibility).

(Change in Tc selectivity value distribution in FIG. 34)
In the case of the above embodiment, in the mode selection table Tc, the distribution of the selection rate values for the effect modes A, B, and C is opposite to that of the mode selection table Tb, and the selection rate values are higher in the order of the effect modes A, B, and C. The selection rate value for the effect mode C reaches as high as 60% (FIG. 34). However, the selectivity value distribution while maintaining the relationship that it is easier to shift to the production mode with high probability expectation when it does not fall in the hold than when it falls in the hold. Can be changed to the one having the same tendency as the mode selection table Tb. For example, the distribution of the selection rate values for the effect modes A, B, and C of the mode selection table Tc may be set to the effect mode A (40%), the effect mode B (30%), and the effect mode C (20%), respectively. it can. Even with this setting, the ratio of effect mode A selected is reduced from 60% to 40%, so the mode selection table Tc has a higher probability of expectation than the mode selection table Tb. It is possible to maintain the relationship that it is easy to select. In this case, the mode selection table Tc is selected when all of the pending jackpot lottery has been won, so the player has won the jackpot lottery because, for example, he was in a high probability state. I will understand.

(26-3. Transition to production mode in Specific Example 2A of Embodiment 2: FIG. 29)
In the specific example 2A of the second embodiment shown in FIG. 29, the mode selection table Tc or Td in parentheses is selected in the state categories K1 to K4 (probability variation state) and K9 to K10 (time saving state) of FIG. 33. Is dealing with. The 15R probability variation jackpot is won at time t1 in the figure, and then the symbol variation display operation with electric support is started from the time t2 when the 15R jackpot game ends, until the time te when the 100th symbol variation arrives. In the meantime, a fall prize is generated (time t6), and various production mode transition opportunities are established (time t2 to t5, t7 to t8).

(B) When the jackpot end command is received (time t2 in FIG. 29)
When the hold memory related to the fall prize is not generated during the big hit game and the big hit end command is received at time t2 in FIG. 29 and the mode transition opportunity is established, the transition destination is performed in the effect mode transition lottery process (step S748). With reference to the mode distribution table (FIGS. 33 to 34), the effect mode of the transition destination is drawn by lottery according to the state classification. The game situation at this time corresponds to the state category K4 in FIG. 33 (in a high-based probability variation state, no fall win in hold, no big hit in hold). Therefore, the mode selection table Td is selected in the state division K4 of the state classification association table of FIG. 33, and based on the selection of this mode selection table Td, the effect modes A and B are displayed on the effect mode transition lottery table of FIG. , C are selected at a selection rate of 10%, 30%, 60%.

Specific example A of FIG. 29 shows a case where the effect mode C (evening background of FIG. 35) is selected with a selection ratio of 60%. This is the production mode C (evening background in FIG. 35) having the highest probability expectation among the production modes A to C, except for the production mode D in which the jackpot is confirmed and the production mode E which is the chance time production. ) Means a transition lottery. When this effect mode C is set, the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 is switched to the evening background of FIG. 35, and the corresponding BGM for effect is played from the speaker. Therefore, the player presumes that the game state is in the high probability state by shifting to the effect mode C (evening background).

If the big hit lottery in hold is won at time t2 (state classification K3), the mode selection table Tc is selected, and the effect modes A, B, C, and D are displayed on the effect mode transition lottery table of FIG. Is selected with a selection ratio of 10%, 30%, 50%, and 10%. That is, with respect to the high probability expectation, both the mode selection table Tc and Td show the same tendency (higher in the order of effect modes A, B, and C), but when the effect mode is selected via the mode selection table Tc, the effect mode is selected. There is a possibility that the effect mode D for confirming the jackpot will be selected. This relationship is the same for the times t4, t5, t7, and t8, which will be described later.

(B) When a non-falling prize is won (time t3 in FIG. 29)
At the time t3 of the specific example 2A shown in FIG. 29, it is assumed that the case where the hold memory related to the non-fall prize is generated under the effect mode C is the case 1 (no fall win in hold).

In case 1, initially, a new winning ball is generated and "hold 4" is generated under the state where the number of hold storages is 3, and the hold data is pre-read and determined. Note that "hold 4" is "hold for read-ahead" related to the non-falling prize.

When the look-ahead target hold of the "hold 4" occurs, the effect control unit 24 draws a lottery as to whether or not to perform the look-ahead notice by the continuous notice effect. If the pre-reading notice lottery is won and it is determined that the fall lottery is not won, the notice selection table before the fall corresponding to the number of reservations is set. In this example, the advance notice selection table before the fall is set for the number of reservations 3. Then, from the time when the symbol change of "hold 1" is started and the number of hold storages is reduced to 3, a lottery is performed for the continuity rank of the change start change system continuous notice effect that is continued across the hold. Since the current game state is in the production mode C, there is no notice on the continuity table (not shown), 1 time notice α, 2 times notice β, 3 times notice γ, 4 times notice δ is 0%, 10 %, 10%, 30%, 50% are selected.

In this example, it is assumed that the four-time notice δ with a selection ratio of 50% is selected on the continuity table. Therefore, the four times up to the hold 4 (hold for read-ahead target) related to the non-falling prize are set in the second continuous notice counter as the number of continuous notices (step S819). As a result, the lightning bolt notice and its sound effect appear in each of the four symbol variation display operations of hold 1 to hold 4, and the continuous notice effect is executed.

On the other hand, regarding the look-ahead notice (continuous notice) of the hold display change system, a dedicated hold display effect scenario is set when it is determined that the hold memory of "hold 4" is generated and the above-mentioned look-ahead notice lottery is won. "4" corresponding to the number of reserved storages is set in the first continuous notice counter. As a result, the hold storage position of the "hold 4" changes to, for example, red, and the hold storage of the "hold 4" is continuously displayed while shifting the display position in sequence until it is subjected to the symbol variation display operation. become.

In this case 1, the number of times the continuous notice effect of the change system at the start of fluctuation (the number of times the lightning bolt notice is continuously displayed across the hold) is the number of times the look-ahead notice of the hold display change system is continued (“hold 4”). The number of times the red hold position is displayed continuously across the hold) matches. Assuming that the game state has fallen to a low probability state or that the player has been elected to fall on hold, the notice selection table after the fall is referred to, so the number of continuations is the same as the number of continuations of the continuous notice effect of the change system at the start of fluctuation. It may end before reaching. However, in this example, in addition to shifting to the effect mode C (evening background), the continuous advance notice effect by the lightning bolt notice reaches the red hold position of "hold 4", that is, the red hold "hold 4" changes the symbol. It continues until it is used for display operation. Therefore, the player is convinced from this that the gaming state has not fallen into the low probability state.

(C) When a specific fluctuation pattern specification command is received (time t4 in FIG. 29)
When a specific variation pattern specification command (for example, a reach variation pattern specification command for designating a specific reach effect) is received at time t4 of the specific example 2A shown in FIG. 29 and a mode transition opportunity is established, the effect mode transition lottery In the process (step S748), the transition destination mode distribution table is referred to, and the transition destination production mode is drawn according to the state classification. The game situation at this time is the same as that at time t2, and is in the state category K4 of FIG. 33 (in the high-based probability variation state, there is no falling win in the hold, no big hit in the hold). Therefore, the mode selection table Td is selected in the state division K4 of the state classification association table of FIG. 33, and based on the selection of this mode selection table Td, the effect modes A and B are displayed on the effect mode transition lottery table of FIG. , C are selected at a selection rate of 10%, 30%, 60%. FIG. 29 shows a case where the effect mode B (daytime background in FIG. 35) is selected with a selection ratio of 30%. This indicates that among the effect modes A to C, the effect mode B (daytime background in FIG. 35) having the second highest probability expectation has been selected by the transition lottery. When this effect mode B is set, the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 is switched to the daytime background of FIG. 35, and the corresponding BGM for effect is played from the speaker. Therefore, the player is a little worried that the gaming state may have fallen to a low probability state by shifting from the effect mode C (evening background) to the effect mode B (daytime background).

(D) When the production mode transition lottery is won (time t5 in FIG. 29)
At time t5 of the specific example 2A shown in FIG. 29, the mode transition trigger is triggered by receiving a fluctuation pattern command other than the specific SP reach fluctuation pattern and winning the production mode transition lottery performed on the production control unit 24 side. Indicates the case where it is established.

Also in this case, the transition destination mode distribution table is referred to in the effect mode transition lottery process (step S748), and the transition destination effect mode is drawn according to the state classification. The game situation at this time is the same as that at time t2, and is in the state category K4 of FIG. 33 (in the high-based probability variation state, there is no falling win in the hold, and no big hit in the hold). Therefore, the mode selection table Td is selected in the division K4 of the state classification association table of FIG. 33, and based on the selection of this mode selection table Td, the effect modes A, B, are displayed on the effect mode transition lottery table of FIG. C is selected with a selection ratio of 10%, 30%, and 60% (step S801 in FIG. 38). FIG. 29 shows a case where the effect mode C (evening background in FIG. 35) is selected with a selection ratio of 60%. This indicates that among the effect modes A to C, the effect mode C (evening background in FIG. 35) having the highest high probability expectation was selected by the transition lottery. When this effect mode C is set (step S802 in FIG. 38), the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 is switched to the evening background in FIG. 35, and the corresponding BGM for effect is played from the speaker. Therefore, it is presumed that the player has not fallen into the low probability state by returning from the effect mode B (day background) to the effect mode C (evening background).

(E) When a fall prize is won (time t6 in FIG. 29)
At the time t6 of the specific example 2A shown in FIG. 29, it is assumed that the hold memory related to the fall prize is generated under the effect mode C. Here, Case 2 (with a winning fall on hold) will be described as an example.

FIG. 12A shows a situation in which a new winning ball is generated, “hold 4” is generated, and the hold data is pre-read and determined under the state where the number of hold storages is three. Note that "hold 4" is a "look-ahead target hold" related to the fall prize.

When the hold storage of the "hold 4" occurs, the effect control unit 24 draws a lottery as to whether or not to give a look-ahead notice by the continuous notice effect. If it is determined that the pre-reading notice lottery has been won and the fall lottery has been won, the notice selection table after the fall corresponding to the number of reservations is set. In this example, the notice selection table after the fall related to the number of reservations 3 is set. Then, from the time when the symbol change of "hold 1" is started and the number of hold storages is reduced to 3, a lottery is performed for the continuity rank of the change start change system continuous notice effect that is continued across the hold. Since the current game state is in the production mode C, there is no notice on the continuity table, 1 time notice α, 2 times notice β, 3 times notice γ, 4 times notice δ are 30%, 10%, 40%. , 20%, 0% are selected.

In this example, it is assumed that the double notice β with a selection ratio of 40% is selected on the continuity table. Therefore, the two times up to the hold 2 before the hold 4 (hold for pre-reading target) related to the non-falling prize are set in the second continuous notice counter as the number of consecutive notices. As a result, the lightning bolt notice and its sound effect appear in each of the two symbol variation display operations of hold 1 and hold 2, and the continuous notice effect is executed.

However, regarding the look-ahead notice effect of the hold display change system, when the hold memory of "hold 4" occurs and it is determined that the above-mentioned look-ahead notice lottery is won, the dedicated hold display effect scenario is set and the number of hold memories is set. The corresponding "4" is set in the first continuous notice counter. As a result, the hold storage position of the "hold 4" changes to, for example, red, and the hold storage of the "hold 4" is continuously displayed while shifting the display position in sequence until it is subjected to the symbol variation display operation. become.

In this case 2, the number of times the continuous notice effect of the change system at the start of fluctuation (the number of times the lightning bolt notice is continuously displayed across the hold) is the number of times the look-ahead notice of the hold display change system is continued (“hold 4”). The number of times the red hold position is displayed continuously across the hold) does not match. Assuming that the game state has fallen to a low probability state or that the player has been elected to fall on hold, the notice selection table after the fall is referred to, so the number of continuations is the same as the number of continuations of the continuous notice effect of the change system at the start of fluctuation. It may end before reaching. In this example as well, although the mode has shifted to the production mode C (evening background) where the high probability expectation is highest, the continuous warning production by the lightning bolt notice does not continue until the red hold position of "hold 4", and before that. It ends when "Hold 2" of is put into the variable display operation. Therefore, it can be inferred from this that the player may have fallen into a hold in the game state with a low probability.

(F) When the number of lost fluctuation display operations continues a predetermined number of times (time t7 in FIG. 29).
The time t7 of the specific example 2A shown in FIG. 29 shows a case where it is determined that the mode transition trigger has been established because the number of times of the loss fluctuation display operation continues a predetermined number of times. In this example, a loss fluctuation count counter is provided on the effect control unit 24 side, and the number of received loss fluctuation pattern commands is integrated by the counter, and the integrated value is a predetermined number of 30 times (in FIG. 29). When it reaches n times (an integer of n: 1 or more) 30 times, it is determined that the mode transition opportunity has been established.

Even in the case of this time t7, if it is determined that the mode transition opportunity has been established, the transition destination mode distribution table is referred to in the effect mode transition lottery process (step S748), and the transition destination production mode is determined according to the state classification. Lottery. Since the game situation at this time is after the time t6 when the fall prize is generated, it is in the state category K10 of FIG. 33 (high-based time saving state, no big hit in hold). Therefore, the mode selection table Td is selected in the state division K10 of the state classification association table of FIG. 33, and based on the selection of this mode selection table Td, the effect modes A and B are displayed on the effect mode transition lottery table of FIG. , C are selected at a selection rate of 10%, 30%, 60%.

FIG. 29 shows a case where the effect mode A (morning background in FIG. 35) is selected with a selection ratio of 10%. This indicates that among the production modes A to C, the production mode A (morning background in FIG. 35) having the lowest high probability expectation was selected by the transition lottery. When this effect mode A is set, the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 is switched to the morning background of FIG. 35, and the corresponding BGM for effect is played from the speaker. Therefore, the player presumes that the game state may have fallen to a low probability state by returning from the production mode C (evening background) to the production mode A (morning background) (actually, the time). This guess is incorrect because it has already fallen at t6).

(G) When the number of times of the loss fluctuation display operation continues a predetermined number of times (time t8 in FIG. 29).
The time t8 of the specific example 2A shown in FIG. 29 shows a case where it is determined that the mode transition trigger has been established because the number of times of the loss fluctuation display operation continues a predetermined number of times. In this example, a loss fluctuation count counter is provided on the effect control unit 24 side, and the number of received loss fluctuation pattern commands is integrated by the counter, and the integrated value is again set to a predetermined number of 30 times (FIG. 29). When it reaches the 30 × (n + 1) th time), it is determined that the mode transition trigger has been established (step S703: YES).

Since the game situation at this time has not changed from that at time t7 (state classification K10), the operation of the case at time t8 is the same as that at time t7. However, at time t8, among the production modes A to C, the production mode B (daytime background in FIG. 35) having a high probability expectation of medium rank is shown as a transition lottery. When this effect mode B is set, the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 is switched to the daytime background of FIG. 35, and the corresponding BGM for effect is played from the speaker. Therefore, by returning from the production mode A (morning background) to the production mode B (daytime background), the player can expect that the game state may still be in the high probability state (actually). Has already fallen at time t6).

(H) When the electric support is completed (time te in Fig. 29)
The time te of the specific example 2A shown in FIG. 29 exemplifies the case where the electric support ends and the mode transition trigger is established. At this time te, the treasure chest effect set in step S743 of FIG. 20 has priority, so that the effect mode cannot be changed. However, since it is possible to generate them in duplicate, a case where they are generated in duplicate will be described here.

Although not shown, the effect control unit 24 sets the remaining number of times of electric support at which the electric support ends when the command of the number of remaining electric support transmitted in step S407B of the special symbol fluctuation start process (FIG. 12) is received. To do. Then, each time the decorative symbol designation command transmitted in step S415 (FIG. 12) is received, 1 is subtracted from the remaining number of times of electric support, and when it becomes zero, that is, when the electric support ends, the mode transition trigger. Is determined to have been established. However, as another method, for example, when the electric support count counter becomes zero, the electric support end command is transmitted, and when the effect control unit 24 receives this, it may be determined that the mode transition trigger has been established.

In any case, when the electric support ends and the mode transition opportunity is established, the transition destination mode distribution table is referred to in the effect mode transition lottery process (step S748), and the transition destination production mode is determined according to the state classification. Lottery.

The game situation at this time is after the time t6 when the fall prize was generated, and since the electric support has ended, it is in the state category K12 of FIG. 33 (there is no big hit in the hold in the normal state). Therefore, the mode selection table Tb is selected in the state division K12 of the state classification association table of FIG. 33, and based on the selection of this mode selection table Tb, the effect modes A and B are displayed on the effect mode transition lottery table of FIG. , C are selected at a selection ratio of 60%, 30%, and 10%.

FIG. 29 shows a case where the effect mode B (daytime background in FIG. 35) is selected with a selection ratio of 30%. This indicates that among the production modes A to C, the production mode B (daytime background in FIG. 35) having the second highest probability expectation has been selected by the transition lottery. When this effect mode B is set, the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 is switched to the daytime background of FIG. 35, and the corresponding BGM for effect is played from the speaker. Therefore, the player determines that it is unlikely that the game state is still in the high probability state by continuously shifting from the effect mode B (day background) to the effect mode B (day background) (in practice). Has already fallen at time t6).

As described above, in the case of the specific example 1 of FIG. 29, the player selected the two-time notice β having a low “continuity rank” at the time t6 when the player won the pending in-fall lottery (lightning bolt notice is a look-ahead target). It is judged that the player has fallen from the high-probability state to the low-probability state (this judgment is correct as a result), and then the production mode C (the evening background in FIG. ), So if a treasure chest effect occurs at time te, it is judged that it must have almost fallen when the treasure box effect occurs, and we do not expect the result of the treasure box effect to succeed. It will be.

(26-4. Transition to production mode in Specific Example 2B of Embodiment 2: FIG. 30)
In the specific example 2B of the second embodiment shown in FIG. 29, the mode selection table Ta is selected in the state categories K1 to K4 (probability change state) and K9 to K10 (time saving state) of FIG. 33. The 15R probability variation jackpot is won at time t1 in the figure, and then the symbol variation display operation with electric support is started from the time t2 when the 15R jackpot game ends, until the time te when the 100th symbol variation arrives. In this case, no fall prize is generated. At the time t2 when the big hit game of 15R ended, and at the time te when the 100th symbol change arrived, the production mode transition opportunity was established, and in the subsequent period, a fall prize was generated (time t6), and various production modes were shifted. The opportunity is established (time t3 to t5, t7 to t8). In addition, for the sake of simplicity, it is assumed that the hold memory related to the fall prize is not generated during the big hit game.

(B) When the jackpot end command is received (time t2 in FIG. 30)
When the hold memory related to the fall prize is not generated during the big hit game and the mode transition opportunity is established by receiving the big hit end command at the time t2 in FIG. 30, the transition destination mode is performed in the effect mode transition lottery process (step S748). With reference to the distribution table (FIGS. 33 to 34), the effect mode of the transition destination is drawn by lottery according to the state classification. The game situation at this time corresponds to the state category K4 in FIG. 33 (in a high-based probability variation state, no fall win in hold, no big hit in hold). Therefore, the mode selection table Ta is selected in the state division K4 of the state classification association table of FIG. 33, and based on the selection of this mode selection table Ta, the effect modes A and B are displayed on the effect mode transition lottery table of FIG. 34. , C, D, E are selected with a selection ratio of 0%, 0%, 0%, 0%, 100%. That is, the effect mode E (chance time effect) is selected at a selection rate of 100%. This means that the production mode E (night in FIG. 35 + rain background) with a chance of a big hit has been selected by a transition lottery. When this effect mode E is set, the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 is switched to the night + rain background of FIG. 35, and the corresponding BGM for effect is played from the speaker. Therefore, the player presumes that the game state is in a high probability state and the possibility of a big hit is high by shifting to the effect mode E (night + rain background).

(B) When the electric support is completed (time te in FIG. 43)
The time te of the specific example B shown in FIG. 30 illustrates the case where the electric support ends and the mode transition trigger is established (the establishment of this mode transition trigger is the same as that of the specific example 1). Also in the case of this specific example B, since the treasure box effect set in step S743 of FIG. 20 has priority at the time te, the effect mode cannot be changed. However, since it is possible to generate them in duplicate, a case where they are generated in duplicate will be described here.

When the electric support is completed and the mode transition opportunity is established (step S703: YES), the process proceeds to the effect mode transition lottery process (step S704, details are step S801 in FIG. 38), and the transition destination mode distribution table is referred to. The effect mode of the transition destination is drawn by lottery according to the state classification (step S801 in FIG. 38). The game situation at this time corresponds to the state category K8 in FIG. 33 (low-based latent probability variation state, no pending fall win, no pending jackpot winning). Therefore, the mode selection table Td is selected in the state division K8 of the state classification association table of FIG. 33, and based on the selection of this mode selection table Td, the effect modes A and B are displayed on the effect mode transition lottery table of FIG. , C are selected at a selection ratio of 10%, 30%, 60%.

FIG. 30 shows a case where the effect mode B (daytime background in FIG. 35) is selected with a selection ratio of 30%. This means that the production mode B (daytime background in FIG. 35) having a high probability expectation of medium rank has been selected by a transition lottery. When this effect mode B is set, the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 is switched to the daytime background of FIG. 35, and the corresponding BGM for effect is played from the speaker. Therefore, the player does not win the big hit lottery and ends the production mode E (chance time production: night + rain background) with electric support 100 times, and shifts to the production mode B (day background in FIG. 35). Therefore, although I am worried that the game state may have fallen to a low probability state, I will participate in the treasure chest production while expecting the hopeful possibility that the game state is still in a high probability state.

If the jackpot lottery in hold is won at time te (state classification K7), the mode selection table Tc is selected, and the effect modes A, B, C, and D are displayed on the effect mode transition lottery table of FIG. Is selected with a selection ratio of 10%, 30%, 50%, and 10%. That is, there is a possibility that the effect mode D for confirming the big hit will be selected.

(C) When a non-falling prize is won (time t3 in FIG. 30)
At time t3 in FIG. 30, it is assumed that the case where the hold memory related to the non-fall prize is generated under the effect mode B is the case 1 (no fall win in hold).

In case 1, a new winning ball is generated and "hold 4" of the look-ahead target hold related to the non-falling prize occurs under the state where the number of hold storages is 3, and the hold data is judged to be look-ahead. is there.

If the pre-reading target hold of "Hold 4" occurs, the pre-reading notice lottery regarding whether or not to perform the pre-reading notice by the continuous notice production is won, and it is judged that the fall lottery is not won, before the fall. Set the notice selection table. Then, from the time when the symbol change of "hold 1" is started and the number of hold storages is reduced to 3, a lottery is performed for the continuity rank of the change start change system continuous notice effect that is continued across the hold. Since the current game state is in the production mode B (day background), there is no notice, 1 time notice α, 2 times notice β, 3 times notice γ, and 4 times notice δ on the continuity table (not shown). It is selected with a selection ratio of 10%, 20%, 20%, 20%, and 30%.

In this example, it is assumed that the four-time notice δ with a selection ratio of 10% is selected on the continuity table. Therefore, the four times up to the hold 4 (hold for pre-reading target) related to the non-falling prize are set in the second continuous notice counter as the number of continuous notices. As a result, the lightning bolt notice and its sound effect appear in each of the four symbol variation display operations of hold 1 to hold 4, and the continuous notice effect is executed.

On the other hand, regarding the look-ahead notice effect of the hold display change system, when it is determined that the hold memory of "hold 4" is generated and the pre-reading notice lottery is won, the judgment of step S825 in FIG. 40 becomes YES. , The dedicated hold display effect scenario is set, and "4" corresponding to the number of hold storages is set in the first continuous notice counter. As a result, the hold storage position of the "hold 4" changes to, for example, red, and the hold storage of the "hold 4" is continuously displayed while shifting the display position in sequence until it is subjected to the symbol variation display operation. become.

In this case 1, although the effect mode B (daytime background) is entered, the continuous advance notice effect by the lightning bolt notice is up to the red hold position of "hold 4", that is, the red hold "hold 4" is in the symbol variation display operation. It continues until it is served. Therefore, the player determines from this that the gaming state has not fallen into the low probability state.

(D) When a specific fluctuation pattern specification command is received (time t4 in FIG. 30)
When a specific fluctuation pattern designation command (in the figure, a specific SP reach fluctuation pattern designation command) is received at time t4 in FIG. 30 and a mode transition trigger is established, the transition is performed in the effect mode transition lottery process (step S748). Refer to the destination mode distribution table, and draw a lottery for the transition destination production mode according to the status classification. The game situation at this time is the same as that at the time te, and is in the state category K8 of FIG. 33 (low-based latent probability change state, no pending fall win, no pending jackpot win). Therefore, the mode selection table Td is selected in the state division K8 of the state classification association table of FIG. 33, and based on the selection of this mode selection table Td, the effect modes A and B are displayed on the effect mode transition lottery table of FIG. , C are selected at a selection rate of 10%, 30%, 60%.

FIG. 30 shows a case where the effect mode C (evening background in FIG. 35) is selected with a selection ratio of 60%. This means that among the production modes A to C, the production mode C (evening background in FIG. 35) having the highest high probability expectation is selected by the transition lottery. When this effect mode C is set, the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 is switched to the evening background of FIG. 35, and the corresponding BGM for effect is played from the speaker. Therefore, the player presumes that the game state is in the high probability state by shifting to the effect mode C (evening background).

If the big hit lottery in hold is won at time t4 (state classification K7), the mode selection table Tc is selected, and the effect modes A, B, C, and D are displayed on the effect mode transition lottery table of FIG. Is selected with a selection ratio of 10%, 30%, 50%, and 10%. That is, with respect to the high probability expectation, both the mode selection table Tc and Td show the same tendency (higher in the order of effect modes A, B, and C), but when the effect mode is selected via the mode selection table Tc, the effect mode is selected. There is a possibility that the effect mode D for confirming the jackpot will be selected. This relationship is the same for the times t5, t7, and t8, which will be described later.

(E) When the production mode transition lottery is won (time t5 in FIG. 43)
The time t5 in FIG. 30 indicates a case where the mode transition trigger is established by receiving a fluctuation pattern command other than the specific SP reach fluctuation pattern and winning the effect mode transition lottery performed on the effect control unit 24 side. ..

Also in this case, the transition destination mode distribution table is referred to in the effect mode transition lottery process (step S748), and the transition destination effect mode is drawn according to the state classification. The game situation at this time is the same as that at the time te, and is in the state category K8 of FIG. 33 (low-based latent probability change state, no pending fall win, no pending jackpot win). Therefore, the mode selection table Td is selected in the state division K8 of the state classification association table of FIG. 33, and based on the selection of this mode selection table Td, the effect modes A and B are displayed on the effect mode transition lottery table of FIG. , C are selected at a selection ratio of 10%, 30%, 60%. FIG. 30 shows a case where the effect mode C (evening background in FIG. 35) is selected with a selection ratio of 60%. Therefore, the player presumes that the gaming state is in the high probability state by shifting from the effect mode C (evening background) to the effect mode C (evening background).

(F) When a fall prize is won (time t6 in FIG. 43)
At time t6 in FIG. 30, it is assumed that the case where the hold memory related to the fall prize is generated under the effect mode C is the case 2 (there is a fall win in the hold). Since the operation in this case is the same as that described at time t6 in FIG. 30, the description thereof will be omitted.

At this time t6, although the mode shifts to the production mode C (evening background) where the high probability expectation is highest, the continuous warning production by the lightning bolt notice does not continue until the red hold position of "hold 4", and before that. It ends when "Hold 2" of is put into the variable display operation. Therefore, the player presumes from this that the gaming state may have fallen into a pending state with a low probability.

(G) When the number of lost fluctuation display operations continues a predetermined number of times (time t7 in FIG. 43).
The time t7 of the specific example 2B shown in FIG. 30 exemplifies the mode transition trigger (the establishment of this mode transition trigger is the same as that of the specific example 2A) when the number of times of the loss fluctuation display operation continues a predetermined number of times.

When it is determined that the mode transition opportunity has been established, the process proceeds to the effect mode transition lottery process (step S748), the transition destination mode distribution table is referred to, and the transition destination production mode is drawn according to the state classification. Since the game situation at this time is after the time t6 when the fall prize is generated, it is in the state category K12 of FIG. 33 (there is no big hit in the hold in the normal state). Therefore, the mode selection table Tb is selected in the state division K12 of the state classification association table of FIG. 33, and based on the selection of this mode selection table Tb, the effect modes A and B are displayed on the effect mode transition lottery table of FIG. , C are selected at a selection ratio of 60%, 30%, and 10%. FIG. 30 shows a case where the effect mode A (morning background in FIG. 35) is selected with a selection ratio of 60%. This indicates that among the production modes A to C, the production mode A (morning background in FIG. 35) having the lowest high probability expectation was selected by the transition lottery. When this effect mode A is set, the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 is switched to the morning background of FIG. 35, and the corresponding BGM for effect is played from the speaker.

Therefore, in addition to the fact that the continuous advance notice effect by the lightning bolt notice did not continue until the look-ahead target was held at time t6, the player changed the effect mode C (evening background) to the effect mode A (morning background) at the following time t7. By shifting to, it is presumed that it is almost certain that the gaming state has fallen to the low probability state (this guess is correct because it has already fallen at time t6 in practice).

(H) When the number of times of the loss fluctuation display operation continues a predetermined number of times (time t8 in FIG. 30).
At time t8 in FIG. 30, the integrated value of the loss fluctuation counter that counts the number of received loss fluctuation pattern commands is again a predetermined number of 30 times (shown as 30 × (n + 1) times in FIG. 43). Is reached, and the case where the mode transition opportunity is established is shown. Since the game situation at this time has not changed from that at time t7, the operation of the case at time t8 is the same as that at time t7.

However, at time t8, among the production modes A to C, the production mode B (daytime background in FIG. 35) having a high probability expectation of medium rank is shown as a transition lottery. Therefore, by returning from the production mode A (morning background) to the production mode B (daytime background), the player can expect that the game state may still be in the high probability state (actually). Has already fallen at time t6).

<27. Specific Examples 3A, 3B of the third embodiment>
The probabilistic fall type 2 of the third embodiment (sections d to e in FIG. 24) is also skeptical in association with the left-handed guidance notification, as in the probable change fall type 1 of the second embodiment (classes b to c of FIG. 24). The effect and the skeptical effect associated with the left-handed guidance notification can be configured to appear, and the effect in the effect mode that implicitly suggests the current gaming state can be displayed.

(27-1. Specific Example 3A of Embodiment 3)
Category d of the third embodiment is a game machine of "probability change fall type 2" in which the probability change state continues if the fall lottery is not won even if the electric support guarantee exceeds 100 rotations. Since the 100th rotation arrives and the time saving state changes to the normal state at the 101st rotation of the next symbol change, the relationship between the launch direction guidance notification and the treasure box production at the time when the 100th rotation of this electric support guarantee arrives (specifically) Example 3A) is the same as that of Specific Example 2A (see Specific Example 2A shown in FIG. 29, time te).

(27-2. Specific Example 3B of Embodiment 3: FIG. 36)
FIG. 36 shows a skeptical effect in which the continuation of the electric support state is suspected in the category e of the "probability change fall type 2" gaming machine in which the probable change state continues unless the fall lottery is won even if the electric support guarantee exceeds 100 rotations. It is a specific example (specific example 3B in the category e) when the treasure box effect appears as.

(27-2-1. Launch direction guidance notification and treasure chest production: t6 in Fig. 36)
In the specific example 3B of the third embodiment, the fall lottery is not won even if the electric support guarantee 100 rotations in the probability change state is exceeded, and the probability change state continues after that at the 130th rotation (see time t6). After winning the fall lottery, the symbol changes at the 130th rotation, the normal state is reached, the electric support disappears, and right-handed hitting is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, at the beginning of the symbol variation at the 130th rotation, the guidance notification image 373 is switched from the right-pointing arrow image 374a to the left-pointing arrow image 374b of "left-pointing arrow right-moving", and whether or not the probability change state continues, that is, the electric support state. A treasure chest production appears as a skeptical production that doubts the continuation of.

The only difference between the right-pointing arrow image 374a and the left-pointing arrow image 374b is that the direction of the arrow image is switched from right to left, and the moving direction does not change before and after the switching. In addition, the treasure chest image 371 shown in FIG. 25B appears on the liquid crystal screen, the player participation type treasure chest production is started, and the player repeatedly hits the push button to open the treasure chest. Attention will be directed to that. As a result, it is delayed to notice that the guidance notification image 373 has changed from the right-handed notification to the left-handed notification, and the time when the player stops launching is not from the beginning of the symbol variation but from the symbol variation. It shifts from the middle to the end. Therefore, it is possible for the player to enjoy the treasure chest production.

(27-2-2. Gase's treasure chest production: t4 in Fig. 36)
In FIG. 36, the command of the SP reach fluctuation pattern (successful treasure chest production) is transmitted at time t4 during the probability change state before the fall prize, and it is related to the treasure chest production of Gase, that is, the fall to the state without electric support. There will be no production (always with electric support). Therefore, since this Gase treasure chest production can occur, it becomes difficult to distinguish between the real treasure chest production (failed treasure chest production) and the Gase treasure chest production (successful treasure chest production), and there is a sense of tension in the treasure box production. Will increase, and interest in ball games will increase.

(27-2-3. Transition to production mode that informs the fall without it: Fig. 43)
In the specific example 3B of the third embodiment, the effect mode transition for notifying the fall from the state with the electric support to the state without the electric support is the same as that described in the specific example 2B (FIG. 30) of the second embodiment. is there.

<28. Production mode in Embodiment 4>
In the ST machine type of the fourth embodiment (section f in FIG. 24), when the predetermined number of ST specified times is completed and the state without electric support is reached, the switch to the left-handed guidance notification is made. Therefore, it was associated with the left-handed guidance notification in the symbol fluctuation without the electric support, or over one or more symbol fluctuations from the symbol fluctuation, or over multiple symbol fluctuations before and after including the symbol fluctuation. It is configured so that a skeptical rendition appears. However, in the case of the fourth embodiment, as described above, since the end timing of the state with electric support is fixed, in the symbol change in the state without electric support, or from the symbol change to one or a plurality of symbol changes. Or, if the skeptical effect is to appear over multiple symbol fluctuations before and after including the symbol variation, it simply notifies the end of the state with electric support (the end of the ST specified number of times). It becomes a thing. Therefore, it is preferable that the treasure box effect according to the fourth embodiment is used as a notice effect that arouses the expectation of winning a big hit, as in the second embodiment. Specifically, during ST, in the case of a specific loss fluctuation pattern (for example, SP reach fluctuation pattern), "real treasure chest production (failure treasure chest production)" appears, and in the case of hit fluctuation pattern, " It is configured to show "Gase's treasure chest production (successful treasure chest production)". By making the real treasure chest effect and the treasure box effect of Gase appear at an appropriate frequency, the player suggests a sense of expectation of winning rather than simply making the treasure box effect appear by the symbol fluctuation around the ST specified number of times. Since the opportunity to pay attention to the effect is increased and the time when the player recognizes that the guidance notification image 373 has been switched can be delayed, the above-mentioned attention-distracting effect can be obtained.

<29. Other display modes of launch guidance information>
In the above embodiment, as a means for displaying the right-handed display mode and the left-handed display mode in an extremely close manner, the following is defined. That is, as the "display mode indicating the right-handed direction" of the guidance notification image 373, the movement of the "right arrow right movement" in which a plurality of right-pointing arrow images 374a are lined up in a straight line and sequentially move to the right at a constant speed or intermittently. A movement of "left arrow right movement" in which a plurality of left-pointing arrow images 374b are lined up in a straight line and sequentially move to the right at a constant speed or intermittently as a "display mode indicating a left-handed direction". The display mode was used (FIGS. 25 (a) (b) and 28 (a) (b)). Then, this was displayed at the same or substantially the same position on the liquid crystal screen in the same or substantially the same size and the same system of colors. This is (i) displayed in the same or substantially the same position, (ii) displayed in the same or substantially the same size, (iii) displayed in the same (system) color, and (iv) moved in the same direction on the liquid crystal screen. Alternatively, the display mode includes a complex element of slide display. In addition, by configuring in this way, it takes time for the player to notice the change in the guidance notification mode without falsely displaying the lie to the player, so that the player does not significantly impair the interest of the game machine. I made it possible.

However, the condition of the same or substantially the same size and the same system of colors at the same or substantially the same position on the liquid crystal screen does not necessarily have to be held as a common matter between the right-handed notification and the left-handed notification. As a means for displaying the right-handed display mode and the left-handed display mode in an extremely close manner, one of them, for example, the dynamic display mode of "right arrow right movement" and the dynamic display mode of "left arrow right movement" If you can get the initial effect of "making it difficult to understand the switch to left-handed notification so that you do not realize it", you are free to decide what to do with other elements, and on the LCD screen It can be displayed in different positions, in different sizes, or in different colors.

Further, in the above embodiment, only the "arrow image" is treated as a component of the guidance notification image 373, and a plurality of these are arranged in a straight line, but other than the arrow, for example, "left-handed" or the like. The guidance notification image 373 may be configured by using the message image in characters as a component of the guidance notification image 373 and using this "message image in characters such as left-handed" alone.

Also, instead of using the "arrow image" or "message image with characters such as left-handed" alone, the combination of "arrow image" and "message image with characters such as left-handed" or "arrow image" The guidance notification image 373 may be configured by combining "a message image with characters such as left-handed" and "a symbol or pattern having no meaning". As the display mode, for example, the guidance notification image 373 can be displayed in a display mode in which the "message image in characters such as left-handed" and the "arrow image" are arranged in a straight line.

In the above embodiment, as a display mode, a plurality of components of the guidance notification image 373 are arranged in a straight line, but the number of components of the guidance notification image 373 is not limited and is not necessarily arranged in a straight line. You don't have to. Further, even if it is said to be straight, it is permissible that it is substantially straight, and a part or all of them may be displayed on a plurality of lines in a form in which a plurality of arrows run side by side in a direction intersecting the traveling direction.

Further, in the above embodiment, the guidance notification image 373 is displayed in a part of the liquid crystal screen, but the display form is not such that the guidance notification image 373 stays in the local region, but the component of the guidance notification image 373. However, it is also possible to have a display mode in which the image moves and passes across the screen from one end to the other end of the screen.

<Modification 2>
In the first to sixth embodiments, as the "display mode indicating the left-handed direction" of the guidance notification image 373, a plurality of left-pointing arrow images 374b are lined up in a straight line and sequentially move to the right at a constant speed or intermittently. The "dynamic display mode" of the "left arrow right movement" is used, and the left-handed guidance notification by the dynamic display mode of the "left arrow right movement" is continued until the predetermined output end time (FIG. 23). Steps S781 to S783). However, this left-handed guidance notification does not necessarily have to appear in the same display mode until the end over the entire period up to the predetermined output end time. An easy-to-understand dynamic display mode of "left arrow left movement" in which a plurality of left arrow images 374b are lined up in a straight line and sequentially move to the left at a constant speed or intermittently from the middle of the entire period until the output end time. You can also switch to. This is so as not to impair the trust in the playability of the game machine.

In the above-described first to sixth embodiments, the display effects of the guidance notification images of "right-handed notification" and "left-handed notification" have been described as an example, but the player is obliged to notify the player (number of jackpot rounds). It is not limited to the case of changing the display mode of the probability change state notification lamp, etc.

<Modification example 3>
The display mode of other image display effects, such as hold display and character display, changes depending on the condition (such as the passage of time during a specific effect or the reception of a specific effect control command). It can also be applied when making it. More specifically, the character shown in FIG. 25 (a) (left of the hold display) is set to change according to the number of fluctuations and other conditions (number of reach, winning of change lottery, etc.). In some cases, when the mode changes, the player's attention may be temporarily distracted from the character by generating the above-mentioned treasure chest effect.

Further, referring to FIG. 25 and the like, the advance notice effect (“Treasure box effect” is suspected that the game state on the main control unit 20 side may have shifted from the state with electric support (probability change state) to the state without electric support (“Treasure box effect”). I explained it as "skeptical production"), but it is not limited to this. For example, a treasure chest effect or other effect may be used for "expectation effect (a general term for an effect in which the degree of expectation to be a big hit is set relatively high)".

Further, when the above-mentioned effect or the like is used as an expectation effect, by using the above-mentioned "attention distracting effect", it is possible to provide a game machine that makes the player feel more interesting. This will be described in detail below. In this example, a pre-reading notice (hold change notice) of the hold display change system is adopted as a representative example to explain the expectation effect.

Specifically, "hold display" is performed on the liquid crystal screen as a first object (meaning an object, an object, a purpose, etc.) that directly or indirectly indicates the degree of expectation of winning by its display (or display change). Here, "indicating the winning expectation directly or indirectly" by changing the display mode or the display mode of the "operation hold ball" means, for example, blue when the white hold display is defined as the normal display mode. When it changes to, the winning expectation is about 1% to 10%, when it changes to green, the winning expectation is 20% to 30%, when it changes to red, the winning expectation is 40% to 50%, and so on. The one that shows the winning expectation directly, such as the one that changes to "rainbow color" or the number "100%" is added, the winning expectation is "100% (probable)". (The one that clearly indicates the degree of expectation of winning) is applicable.

Then, when the first object is displayed (or the display is changed) or displayed, yet another second object is displayed. Here, as the display of the second object, for example, a "character" is displayed (character image display). This second object may itself be an expectation effect, a notice effect in which the winning expectation is not relatively high (low expectation effect), or a notice effect that does not indicate the winning expectation (for example). , An effect that occurs independently of the jackpot lottery result, an effect that occurs regularly (a specific background change effect, etc.) may be used.

Explaining the case where the second object is also an expectation notice as an example, the character can be displayed near the center of the screen when the hold display is displayed. There are multiple types of characters to be displayed (for example, characters A to D), and as with the hold display change, if character A is the default (initial setting) pattern, the expectation of winning will increase when character B is displayed. It is possible to set such that (small expectation), the expectation is further increased when the character C is displayed (high expectation), and the big hit is confirmed for the character D. Further, it may be configured so that any of the characters A to D is displayed at the start of display, or it may be configured to change to another character after any character is displayed.

Here, the characteristic point of this example is related to the "display start timing" and "display end timing" ("display period" in both cases) of the first object and the second object, respectively, and also the "display position". , "Display size", and "priority of display hierarchy".

<Display start timing, display end timing, display period>
The hold display itself is basically always displayed except for a predetermined timing such as a specific SP reach if there is an operation hold ball, but regarding "hold change (change to a dedicated hold display mode)" Is determined by a look-ahead notice lottery, so it does not necessarily occur every time, and the frequency of occurrence is appropriately set according to the playability of the gaming machine. The "display start timing" referred to here is related to the occurrence of this "hold change", and refers to the start time of switching from the hold display mode A to the hold display mode B. The time when the hold display mode A is completely switched to the hold display mode B is set as the display end timing, and the period from the display start timing to the display end timing is set as the display period (display change period). In this way, the display period refers to the period of the specific display (here, the pending change), and the object (here, the pending display) includes the non-display state in either or both before and after the specific display. Not limited to things. Further, if necessary, the words "display change start timing", "display change end timing", and "display change period" may be replaced.

The period required for the pending change is not limited to one type, and may be two or more types. For example, when changing from white to blue, the change is completed in a short time (for example, 50 msec) without using any special effect, and when changing from blue to red, a bomb is set on the blue hold display and it explodes. The change is completed in a relatively long time (for example, 500 msec) with special effects such as changing to a red hold display after being covered with smoke, or gradually changing the blue hold display to a red hold display. You may try to do it. However, it can also include patterns such as the hold color does not change even if a special effect appears (the bomb does not fire and the hold color does not change). By making it possible to reveal the real thing and the ghost, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of pending change.

Based on the above items, the relationship between the "hold display" as the first object and the "character display" as the second object can be arranged. If the display with higher importance is the hold display, the above-mentioned "Caution" By using "Diversion effect", the display timing and display period of each effect are well coordinated so as to distract attention from the hold display. This will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38.

FIG. 37 shows an example in which a character appearance effect in which character A appears is adopted as a distracting effect when a hold change notice is scheduled for a specific existing hold display, and FIG. 38 (a) shows an example. , FIG. 37 is a time chart relating to the pending change notice and the display example of the character A. In FIG. 37, the hold display to be changed on hold is the hold icon of the hold display unit c1 in the hold display area 76.

With reference to FIGS. 37 and 38 (a), the operation hold ball is first generated (time t1 in FIG. 38 (a)), and the hold display is started (FIG. 37 (a)). At this stage, it is a normal white hold. Then, in a state where the pending change notice has not been started (time t1 to time t2 in FIG. 38 (a)), the female character A is displayed in the substantially center of the screen (time t2 in FIG. 38 (a), FIG. 37). (B)). Here, as shown in FIGS. 37 (b) to (d), character A is made to appear at a predetermined timing before the hold change, and then, while waving his hand, he approaches the player side and talks. It is a character appearance production that was expressed. While this character A is displayed and the player is distracted by the character A, the hold change is started (time ta in FIG. 38, FIG. 37 (d)). Here, as an example of the hold change notice, the white hold is a hold change notice that gradually changes to a red hold.

Then, after the pending change is completed (time tb in FIG. 38 (a), FIG. 37 (e)), the display of the character A is finished (time t3 in FIG. 38 (a), FIG. 37 (f)). In the case of this example, the character A appears (displays) before the predetermined time when the hold change is made, and at least the period from the start of the hold change to the end of the hold change (time ta to tb in FIG. 38 (a)). (Holding display change period A), character A is displayed (character A display period at times t2 to t3 in FIG. 38 (a)). As a result, the player who was distracted by the character A changed the hold display to another display mode (here, from the normal hold display mode (white hold) to the dedicated hold display mode (for example, red hold). ) Is noticed and surprised (Fig. 37 (f)). In particular, in the character appearance effect of this example, a "conversation effect" such as displaying information about the game in a balloon is also executed (Fig. 37 (e)), so the player's consciousness is directed to the information in the balloon. Therefore, the player's attention can be effectively distracted from the pending change notice. Regarding this hold change, it is considered that the more the player changes to the dedicated hold display mode (high expectation effect), which has a higher expectation of winning, the greater the degree of wonder when the player notices the hold change. In this way, the hold change notice with the attention distracting effect can exert a more impactful effect than the hold change notice appearing independently.

In the example of FIG. 38 (a) above, the change start and change end of the first object are performed within the period in which the second object is displayed (the display change period of the first object within the display change period of the second object). The case where everything is included) was explained. In this example, the display start time (time t2) of the second object and the change start time (time ta) of the hold display may coincide with each other, or the display end time (time t3) of the second object and the hold display may be the same. The change start time points (time tb) may be the same. In other words, the display of the second object can be controlled in parallel with the display of the first object so that the entire display change period of the first object is included.

Further, not limited to the example of FIG. 38 (a), as shown in FIG. 38 (b), if only one of the change start and change end of the first object is included in the display period of the second object. , The minimum attention diversion effect is exhibited. In other words, the display of the second object can be controlled so as to be parallel to at least a part of the display change period of the first object. Specifically, with reference to FIG. 38 (b), in the illustrated “hold change period C”, the change start time point (time te) of the hold display is included in the display period (time t2 to t3) of the character A. However, the time point at which the change of the hold display ends (time tf) is not included in the display period of the character A is shown. Further, in the illustrated "hold change period B", the change start time point (time tc) of the hold display is not included in the display period of the character A, but the change end time point (time td) of the hold display is the display period of the character A. An example is shown.

<Display position>
In the above example, the character display can of course be changed in its display mode (for example, the display mode of one person character can be changed, or one person can be increased to three same or different person characters. However, in this case as well, it is preferable that the attention is distracted from the pending change. For example, after displaying one person on the right side of the liquid crystal screen, after a while (after a predetermined time has elapsed), one person is also displayed on the left side of the screen. As a result, the player who was looking at the character on the right side of the screen then gazes at the character on the left side of the screen, and the player's interest extends to multiple events, distracting attention from the hold display at the bottom of the screen. be able to. In this way, as the second object display, it is possible to display the first image display effect (first notice effect) and then the second image display effect (second notice effect).

<Display size>
Further, when a large object and a small object (or an aggregate and an individual) are displayed as display objects, the player's attention and line of sight tend to be directed toward the large object (aggregate). If you want to use this to secretly change the hold, you can divert your line of sight by displaying a larger one (or more than one). By utilizing this, it is possible to distract attention from the reserved ball by displaying (or displaying multiple characters) the character display in a large size.

<Priority of display hierarchy>
Also, the expression "distract" does not necessarily have to be displayed completely independently at the same timing. That is, at the timing of performing the hold change, the character may be displayed on the hold display (so as to cover the front of the hold display) (target concealment type attention distraction effect). As a result, the player cannot physically see the hold display, and as a result, the attention is distracted from the hold display. The hold display may be completely hidden by the character, or a part of the hold display may be visible. In this case, in consideration of the fact that the hold display (current number of hold-holding balls) is kept secret, the hold-hold ball is placed in another place (meaning another place on the display area, another display means, etc.). Displaying the number can prevent the player from being confused.

In the above description, the first object is "hold display" and the second object is "character display" as an example. However, it is also possible that the first object side is "character display" and the second object side is "hold display". It is possible. Since the purpose is common and the purpose is to temporarily deviate from the production with high importance, if the production with high importance is the character display side (first object), the hold display side is the second object. It is a means to look away from the character display. In this case, the above-mentioned display timing, display position, display size, and the like naturally correspond to these.

Further, the first object and the second object are not limited to the above two types, and there is a possibility of all other displayed objects. However, it is preferable that at least the first object display (the object display side for the purpose of distracting attention) is an expectation effect that can suggest the winning expectation. Further, as already explained, the degree of wonder when the player notices is greater when the high expectation effect (first object display) is targeted for distraction. Therefore, in the case of a notice effect that can suggest a high or low winning expectation due to a difference in the display mode, such as a hold change notice, a display mode in which the winning expectation is relatively low (for example, the hold display is held in blue). When a display mode with a relatively high probability of winning (for example, when the hold display is red hold, D pattern hold, or rainbow color hold) appears, compared to when the yellow hold or green hold appears. However, it is preferable to execute the attention distraction effect (second object display) with a high probability.

<Modification example 4>
In the above-mentioned modification 3, an example in which the image display effect is used as the “attention distracting effect” has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, people tend to pay attention to things that move three-dimensionally, and use the movable body effect (sound effect and light that appear along with the movement of the movable body accessory). By making the effect (including the effect) appear, the player's attention can be distracted from the object for the purpose of distracting attention (display object such as the pending change described in the modification 3). Specifically, (α) the movable body effect is displayed instead of the second object display (character A in FIG. 37), or (β) the movable body effect is displayed together with the second object display, or (γ). ) The second object is displayed as a precursor effect of the movable body effect. In particular, in the case of the above-mentioned form (γ), since the second object display is displayed following the movable body effect, the second object display is further displayed after the player's attention is once directed to the movable body accessory. Therefore, the player's attention can be distracted in two steps, that is, the attention is directed to the liquid crystal screen. Therefore, the attention to the object (first object display) becomes lower, which is suitable for obtaining the distracting effect. ..

The movable body accessory is arranged outside the liquid crystal display device. In the case of this example, as shown in FIG. 2, the first movable body accessory (clock-shaped accessory) 80 is arranged on the upper right side in the center decoration 48, and the second movable body accessory (clock-shaped accessory) 80 is arranged on the diagonally lower right side thereof. An accessory (flower-shaped accessory 90) is arranged. For this reason, when the player's line of sight is directed toward the movable body accessory, there is a certain time difference between visually recognizing the movable body effect and directing the line of sight to the effect on the liquid crystal screen. Therefore, there may be a case where the effect of distracting attention can be obtained even if the operating period of the movable body accessory does not necessarily overlap with the pending change period. For example, if the case (α) described above is taken as an example, as shown in FIG. 38 (c), the operation period of the movable body accessory (time tw (time point when the accessory operation starts) to time tx (accessory operation) (End time)) and the display change period of the pending change (pending change period D: time ty to tz) can be executed without being parallel (overlapping). In the example of FIG. 38 (c), the period corresponding to the above-mentioned time difference from visually recognizing the movable body effect to turning the line of sight to the liquid crystal screen is expressed as "time txt to tz". The times tx to tz act as a substantial distraction period, and if the pending change period is included in all or a part of the period, the distracting effect can be obtained.

<Modification 5>
As described above, the effect control unit 24 includes information (for example, look-ahead fluctuation pattern information, fluctuation pattern information (variation time information)) included in the winning command, the fluctuation pattern designation command, the decorative symbol designation command, the command during the winning game, and the like. , Reach production type (including presence / absence) and pseudo-ream information), jackpot lottery result information (winning lottery result information, symbol lottery result information), information on winning games, etc.) .. Among the advance notice effects, typical of the advance notice effects by image display include display patterns related to reach effect, pseudo-continuous effect, look-ahead advance notice effect, character advance notice effect, cut-in advance notice effect, step-up advance notice effect, and the like.

(6-1. Notice effect using color elements 1: FIG. 39)
Next, "preliminary effect using color elements" will be described. Here, "color element (color vision)" has the same meaning as "color". Therefore, as with the case of "color", there are cases of "chromatic color" that includes all three dimensions of color tone (hue), lightness, and saturation (saturation), and "achromatic color (white," that includes only the dimension of lightness. Includes both cases of "ash, black)". In particular, the expression "using color elements" does not mean that there is color, but mainly in the form that only a part of the screen is colored, and the entire screen is colored. This is because I wanted to express as nearness that the case of this aspect is subordinate. Hereinafter, the same applies to the case where "color" is used in the present specification and is expressed as, for example, "color of a character image", and a case where a character image displayed on a part of a screen is colored unless otherwise specified is used. It shall mean.

The "notice effect by image display" handled in the present embodiment is a display mode in which a plurality of display objects similar to a part of the screen are displayed as images, in other words, "notice effect using color elements". .. “Similar” refers to the similarity between display objects that the player recognizes as the same type of display object (component) because a part of the display mode is common. Therefore, for example, even display objects with different shapes (for example, ○ and △) are unified with the same achromatic color (white or black) or have the same specific color (red or rainbow color). When the players recognize that they are similar because of the commonality such as, the different display objects (○ and Δ) are “similar display objects”. In other words, even if the display objects having the same shape (for example, an image that imitates a dog as an animal) have only a part of each display object (the part of the dog's torso) that has the same color. , If the player can recognize that the entire display (whole dog) has something in common because the colors are the same, the whole shape (whole dog) including the colored part (body part) ), Both are "similar display objects".

Here, as a plurality of similar display objects displayed on the screen, as one of the notice effects, a "character notice effect" that imitates a person will be described. This character notice effect is generated as a part of the notice effect or as a demo screen effect during the period when the symbol change is stopped.

FIG. 39 is an example of the character notice effect, and belongs to the so-called “image display notice effect”. In the case of the illustrated character notice effect, a plurality of four character (display pattern component group) images a to d are displayed on the liquid crystal screen. It is common in that all character images have the same shape of a person, and this is an example in which a player recognizes a plurality of similar display objects or the same plurality of display objects.

FIG. 39A shows a display mode in which four same character images a to d in which chromatic colors are applied in the background image, that is, color-displayed, appear as a normal reach effect in the character notice effect. Is shown. All of the character images a to d have the same chromatic color display mode, the background is the same as that of the normal chromatic color of the decorative pattern, and the hold display is not changed from the normal color white. It is in a state (no notice of pending change). However, since as many as four character images a to d have appeared, it is informed that the winning expectation is moderate among the three stages of large, medium and small.

In FIG. 39 (b), it is assumed that the winning expectation is very high in the character advance notice effect, and the character of one of the four character images a1 to d1 (character image c1) is rectangular around the outer contour. It shows a display mode that appears surrounded by a background image. The difference from FIG. 39 (a) is that (i) one of the four character images (specific character image) c is colored with'white', which has a high brightness among achromatic colors. The other character images a, b, and d are changed to the character images'c1', and the other character images a, b, and d are changed to the character images' a1, b1, and d1 colored with'black', which has a low brightness among achromatic colors. (Iii) The decorative pattern that has stopped fluctuating has changed to a'decorative pattern image colored with'black', which has a low lightness among achromatic colors, and (iv) the character image (specific character image) c1 is The point is that the achromatic color is changed to the character image c1 surrounded by a rectangular background image for the character colored with "black" having low brightness. The background and hold display remain in color and there is no color change. When the outline and the inside of the character's outer shape are black, the character's face and the like are unknown, so that the character is displayed as a so-called silhouette image. Further, the background image for a character is used as a background image for emphasizing the character image, and the shape is not limited to a rectangular shape, but surrounds the character image such as a circular shape, an elliptical shape, or a polygonal shape. The background image is not particularly limited as long as it is expressed as such. However, the background image for characters may not be provided, and at least the above-mentioned (i) to (ii) may be different from FIG. 39 (a). Further, the background image for the character is similar to the aura image of FIG. 42 (b) described later.

Here, the specific character image c1 is expressed as a character image colored in "white", but when the display object on the liquid crystal screen is said to be "colored in white", the outline of the outer shape of the display object is black. It includes a form in which the drawing is white and a form in which the outline of the outer shape of the displayed object and the inside of the outline are white, and the brightness and transparency of the white are such that the lower image to which white is applied appears to overlap. It includes the case where it has appropriate brightness and transparency and the case where it does not have it. Here, the case where the outline of the character's outer shape is black and the inside is white and the lower image to which white is applied has appropriate brightness and transparency so that they appear to overlap is "colored with white". (The same shall apply hereinafter in FIGS. 39 to 41).

In addition, the other character images a, b, and d are expressed as "black" colored character images, and the decorative design whose fluctuation has stopped is expressed as "black" colored decorative design, but the display on the liquid crystal screen. When you say "colored in black" about an object, the outline of the outer shape of the display object is white and the inside is black or gray, and the outline of the outer shape of the display is black and the inside is gray. When the outline and the inside include the form of black, and the brightness and transparency of the black or gray are such that the lower image to which black is applied appears to overlap, and when the brightness and transparency are not provided. And include. Here, with respect to the other character images a, b, and d and the decorative symbols that have stopped fluctuating, the outline of the outer shape of the character or the decorative symbol is black and the inside is in the form of ash, and the lower image to which ash is applied is A case of having appropriate brightness and transparency to the extent that they appear to overlap will be described as "colored in black" (the same shall apply hereinafter in FIGS. 39 to 41).

When the character notice effect is displayed in the display mode of FIG. 39 (b) instead of the display mode of FIG. 39 (a) as described above, the player's attention is first to the normal of the chromatic character images a to d. It is directed to the appearance of the advance notice effect (FIG. 39 (b)) including the achromatic character images a1 to d1 instead of the advance notice effect (FIG. 39 (a)). Here, if all of the character images a1 to d1 are displayed in the same achromatic color (colored with "black" in this example), the impact on the player is not further increased. However, in the case of the present embodiment, further, among the character images a1 to d1, only the specific character image c1 is an achromatic color whose brightness is extremely different from that of the other character images a1, b1 and d1 (in this example, "black"). Is colored with "white", which has the largest difference in brightness. For this reason, even if it is difficult to understand because it is confused in the whole of a plurality of character images, it is possible to avoid the situation that "the advance notice production ends without noticing that only one character is different", and it is easy to do so. It becomes possible to notice that only one body is different. Therefore, in addition to the impact of changing from the chromatic display form to the achromatic display form, a display mode in which only a specific character has extremely different brightness appears, which notifies that, for example, a big hit is confirmed. It can be recognized as a "rare display mode" corresponding to a premium notice. Therefore, the impact or tension given to the player becomes stronger.

Further, since the specific character image c1 colored in white is separated from the background image by the rectangular image colored in black around the outline of the character outline, the difference from the other character images a, b, and d is large. It is prominent in terms of the presence or absence of a background (image). That is, since the specific character image c1 is prominent with respect to other character images and can be found immediately by the player, further impact is given to the player.

In the above, the display modes of the character images a1 to d1 are changed to black, black, white, and black, respectively, but conversely, even when the display modes are changed to white, white, black, and white. A similar effect can be obtained. Further, when the display modes of the character images a to d before the change are different chromatic colors, for example, blue, yellow, green, and red, it is effective to change to one of black and white as described above. However, when the chromatic colors of the same system are the same, for example, blue, blue, blue, and blue, it is not necessary to change the display mode of all the character images to white or black. That is, only the display mode of the character image c or the character images a, b, and d may be changed to either black and white ((blue, blue, white, blue), (blue, blue, black, blue,)). , (White, white, blue, white), or (black, black, blue, black)), the same effect as above can be obtained in this case as well. The color that changes the image is not limited to the achromatic color of black and white gray, and may be a color whose saturation and color tone do not change in a chromatic color such as blue (hereinafter referred to as monochrome color).

In addition to the method of comparing "chromatic color" and "achromatic color" as described above, the method of giving such a second stage impact is the relationship between the same chromatic colors but "complementary colors". The method of comparing the two "hues" in the above, the method of comparing the minimum and maximum "saturation" of chromatic colors, and the "image resolution" of the screen that is the means for fixing the image. , A method of contrasting a two-dimensional image and a three-dimensional image, a method of contrasting an expression method with a deformed or dramatic touch image, and the like can be adopted.

(6-2. Notice effect using color elements 2: Fig. 40)
FIG. 40 shows another example of the advance notice effect in which the chromatic color and the achromatic color are contrasted as the character advance notice effect 2. FIG. 40A is exactly the same as FIG. 39A, all four character images a to d are displayed in the same chromatic color, and the background is also a decoration that is stopped or changing. The design is also a normal chromatic color (so-called color display), and the hold display is also a normal color white display state. However, since as many as four character images a to d have appeared, it is informed that the winning expectation is medium among the three stages of large, medium and small.

FIG. 40B shows a display mode in which four character images a1 to d1 appear in achromatic colors, assuming that the winning expectation is very high in the character notice effect. When compared with FIG. 40 (a), FIG. 40 (b) shows that one of the four character images (i), the character image (specific character image) c, has a high brightness among the achromatic colors. It has changed to the character image c1 colored with "white", and (ii) the other character images a, b, and d are the character images a1, b1, d1 colored with "black", which has a low lightness among achromatic colors. The decorative pattern that has stopped fluctuating (iii) has also changed to a decorative pattern that is colored with "black", which has a low lightness among achromatic colors. These relationships are the same as those in FIGS. 39 (a) and 39 (b) above.

In the character notice effect 2 of FIG. 40 (b), the difference from the case of FIG. 39 (b) is that (iv) the changing decorative pattern is changed to a decorative pattern colored in "black" (v). ) The background display that imitates a rock has changed to a background display colored in "black", (vi) The hold display icon has changed to a hold display icon colored in "black", (vii) ) The point is that the background has changed to a "black" colored background.

Here, the changing decorative pattern is expressed as a decorative pattern colored in "black", the background display object imitating a rock is expressed as a background display object colored in "black", and the hold display icon is expressed as "hold display object". It was expressed as a hold display icon colored in "black", but when saying "colored in black", the outline of the outline of the display object is white and the inside is black or gray, and the outline of the outline of the display object is black. The degree to which the lower image to which black or ash is applied appears to overlap as the brightness and transparency of the black or ash, which includes the morphology of ash inside and the outline of the outline of the display object and the morphology of black inside. Includes cases with and without lightness and transparency. Here, for the changing decorative pattern, rock-like background display, and hold display icon, the outline of the outline of the display is black and the inside is in the form of ash, and the lower image where ash is applied. The case where the two have appropriate brightness and transparency to the extent that they appear to overlap will be described as being "colored in black" (the same shall apply hereinafter in FIGS. 39 to 41).

In addition, the background is described as a background colored in "black", but when saying "colored in black", the entire screen is covered with ash as the background, but the background display, decorative patterns, characters, and hold display are displayed. It has enough brightness and transparency to prevent it from being hidden (the same applies hereinafter).

When the character notice effect is displayed in the display mode of FIG. 40 (b) instead of the display mode of FIG. 40 (a) as described above, the player first first displays the character images a1 to d1, the stopped decorative symbols, and the variation. The decorative design, background, background object, and hold display inside are all changed to an achromatic display mode, which has a great impact. Moreover, although the character images a1 to d1 are changed to achromatic colors, only the specific character image c1 is colored with high brightness "white", and the other character images a1, b1 and d1 are colored. It is colored with low lightness "black", and the difference in lightness is extremely different between them. For this reason, even if one body is mixed in the whole of a plurality of character images, there is a remarkable difference in color that can distinguish a specific character image c1 from others, and the player can easily distinguish it from the others. You can notice that "only one body is different". Therefore, in addition to the impact of changing the image of the entire liquid crystal screen from the chromatic display form to the achromatic display form, only a specific character image appears in a display mode in which the brightness is extremely different. Since this can be recognized as, for example, a premium notice notifying that the jackpot is confirmed, the impact on the player is further enhanced.

(6-3. Notice effect using color elements 3: Fig. 41)
FIG. 41 shows another example of the advance notice effect in which the chromatic color and the achromatic color are contrasted as the character advance notice effect 3, and specifically, the reach effect for notifying that the winning expectation is very high. The case of so-called group notice is illustrated. FIG. 41 corresponds to FIGS. 39 (b) and 40 (b), and the figures corresponding to 71 (a) and FIG. 40 (a) (all chromatic colors: color display) are omitted. ing. That is, FIG. 41 displays a screen on which a second stage impact is given instead of the notice effect of the chromatic color display to the notice effect including the achromatic display.

FIG. 41 shows a display mode in which eight achromatic character images a1 to h1 appear simultaneously in a chromatic background image in the liquid crystal screen. These character images a1 to h1 move from one end side to the other end side of the screen (from the right side to the left side in the present embodiment) and pass through the screen, and show the middle of the movement. ing.

The eight character images a1 to h1 are common in that they all have the same achromatic color display mode. However, (i) one of the character images (specific character image) is changed to'h1', which is colored with'white', which has high brightness among achromatic colors, and (ii) the other. The character image has changed to the character images'a1 to g1'colored with'black', which has low lightness even among achromatic colors. Further, (iii) the fluctuating decorative pattern and the fluctuating decorative pattern are changed to a "decorative pattern image colored with" black "" having a low lightness among achromatic colors. In addition, (iv) the rock-like background display and the hold display icon have also been changed to those colored in "black", which has a low lightness among achromatic colors. The background remains the original chromatic color.

As described above, instead of the character notice effect in which all characters including the group notice character are displayed in a chromatic color (color display), the character notice effect including the group notice is in the achromatic display mode of FIG. When is displayed, the player first has a great impact because the character images a1 to h1, the stopped decorative symbol, the changing decorative symbol, the background object, and the hold display are all changed to the achromatic display mode. Receive. Moreover, although the character images a1 to h1 are changed to achromatic color, only the specific character image h1 is colored with high lightness "white", and the other character images a1 to g1 are of lightness. It is colored with a low "black" and the difference in brightness is extremely different between them. Therefore, even if one body (character image h1) is mixed in the entire plurality of character images constituting the group notice, the specific character image h1 can be distinguished from the others in terms of color. There is a big difference. Therefore, the player can easily notice that "only one body is different". Therefore, in addition to the impact of changing the image of the entire liquid crystal screen from the chromatic display form to the achromatic display form, the display mode in which only the specific character image h1 in the group notice has extremely different brightness. Since it appears, it can be recognized that this is a premium notice that, for example, the jackpot is confirmed, so that the impact on the player is further enhanced.

(6-4. Notice effect using color elements 4: Fig. 42)
In FIG. 42, as the character notice effect 4, the chromatic color and the achromatic color are contrasted as the first stage of impact, and the chromatic color and the achromatic color are contrasted between a part of the character and another display object as the second stage. This is another example of the notice production.

FIG. 42 (a) is exactly the same as FIG. 39 (a), the four character images a to d are all displayed in the same chromatic color, and the background is also a decoration that is stopped or changing. The design is also a normal chromatic color (so-called color display), and the hold display is also a normal color white display state. However, since as many as four character images a to d have appeared, it is informed that the winning expectation is moderate among the three stages of large, medium and small.

FIG. 42 (b) shows that the character has a very high expectation of winning in the character advance notice effect, and the character of one of the four character images a1 to d1 (character image c1) is achromatic around the outer contour. It shows a display mode that appears in the aura of. In the case of FIG. 42 (b), (i) one of the four character images (specific character image) c has an aura colored with “white”, which has a high brightness among achromatic colors. It has changed to the character image c1 that has been put on, and (ii) the decorative pattern that has stopped fluctuating and the hold display have changed to a decorative pattern that is colored with "black", which has a low lightness among achromatic colors.

The first feature of the character notice effect of FIG. 42 is that the specific character image c1 appears with an achromatic aura around the outline of the character outline, so that another achromatic display object (stopped decoration) is displayed. There is a unified color with the design and hold display), and it is understood as a group, that is, as similar things. In other words, the change to a screen that includes an achromatic display gives the player the impact of the first stage.

Further, the second feature of the character notice effect of FIG. 42 is that the specific character image c1 is presently wearing an aura in which "white", which has a particularly high brightness, is colored among achromatic colors around the outline of the character. Because it is displayed, the difference from other chromatic character images a, b, and d is remarkable in terms of color tone (hue), and "black", which is the same achromatic color but has low brightness, is colored. The difference in brightness from other display objects (stopped decorative patterns and hold display) is also large, so it is a remarkable presence from the comparison with this. That is, since the specific character image c1 is prominent with respect to other chromatic character images and achromatic display objects and can be easily found by the player, the second stage impact is given to the player. Given.

According to the above-mentioned notice effects 1 to 4, the player can be given a second stage impact. In this regard, conventionally, as shown in FIG. 43 (a), as many as four similar character images a to c are displayed in chromatic colors on the liquid crystal screen, and only that is the winning result. It was only perceived that a highly anticipated notice production had appeared. If, as shown in FIG. 43 (b), the hold display changes from the normal color white to "red (shaded area in the figure)" indicating that the winning expectation is high, the winning expectation is changed accordingly. It will develop into a situation where it is perceived as high, but at this time the player's attention goes to the pending color change, so the role or presence of the advance notice effect by the character images a to c becomes weaker, and the feeling of tension is further increased. The uplifting will be solely responsible for the pending change notice. Therefore, the impact of the second stage cannot be given to the player.

The "character notice effect" described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 can be configured so that the effect mode as shown in FIG. In FIG. 44, for convenience of explanation, a character image whose purpose is mainly to draw attention to the player is referred to as a “specific character image (for example, c1 in FIG. 39)”, and other character images. Is referred to as "non-specific character image (for example, a1, b1, d1 in FIG. 39)".

As shown in the figure, the display mode of various display objects related to the character notice effect is an image such as "monochrome (monochrome)", "inverted", "specific color element", "shape change", "blurring", and "additional effect". By using the processing, the color elements and shapes of the specific character image and the other images are contrasted with each other, thereby giving the player a sense of discomfort and drawing attention to the specific character image. In the illustration, the character notice effect displayed by using the above image processing is referred to as "special expression effect". In addition to the characters, various display objects such as "background image", "background display image", "decorative pattern image", and "holding icon" can be displayed during the notice production (hereinafter, particularly necessary). Unless otherwise specified, these display objects are abbreviated as "background display objects"), but not all of them appear in the character notice production. Therefore, here, at least one of these background display objects will be described as being the target of the image processing. However, as long as the object of the present invention can be achieved in comparison with a specific character image, all the displayed objects may be changed, and it goes without saying that only a part thereof may be the target of the special expression.

The illustrated "monochrome" is displayed by changing the display object into a "white-colored" image or a "black-colored" image, as described above. Further, the image is not limited to a black-and-white gradation (gray) image, and may be expressed by changing to an image colored with a single color gradation. For example, the color image may be changed to a sepia image. In this way, "monochrome" changes the displayed object from a chromatic color (color) to a monochrome color.

The special expression effect patterns 1 to 7 show an example of displaying a character image or the like by using this "monochrome" processing. As shown in the figure, in the pattern 1, the display mode of the specific character image changes from color to monochrome, whereas the non-specific character image is maintained in the color display mode. In pattern 2, the display mode of the non-specific character image changes from color to monochrome, whereas the specific character image is maintained in the color display mode. In the pattern 3, in addition to the display mode of the pattern 2, the display mode changes to monochrome color for all or part of the background display object.

Further, in pattern 4, the display mode of the specific character image changes from color to "monochrome color with high brightness (" monochrome (high) "in the figure)", whereas the non-specific character image changes from color to "brightness". The display mode changes to a low monochrome color (“monochrome (low)” in the figure). "High-brightness monochrome color" indicates a monochrome color with a brightness higher than a predetermined reference lightness value (for example, a monochrome color including light gray to white), and "low-brightness monochrome color" indicates a predetermined reference. Indicates a monochrome color with a lightness lower than the lightness value (which may be different from the reference lightness value in the case of high lightness) (for example, a monochrome color including dark gray to black). In pattern 5 (effect example of FIG. 39), in addition to the display mode of pattern 4, all or part of the background display object changes to the same display mode as the non-specific character image. Further, in the pattern 6, the display mode of the specific character image changes from color to "monochrome color with low brightness", whereas the display mode of the non-specific character image changes from color to "monochrome color with high brightness". In the pattern 7, in addition to the display mode of the pattern 6, all or a part of the background display object changes to the same display mode as the non-specific character image.

Further, the illustrated "reversal" displays a so-called "negative / positive reversal" image of the displayed object. Further, for "inversion", luminance inversion or complementary color inversion may be used. The special expression effect patterns 8 to 10 show an example of displaying a character image or the like by using this "reversal" process. In the pattern 8, the display mode of the specific character image changes from color to a negative / positive inverted color, whereas the non-specific character image is maintained in the same color display mode. In the pattern 9, the display mode of the non-specific character image changes from color to a negative / positive inverted color, whereas the specific character image is maintained in the same color display mode. In the pattern 10, in addition to the display mode of the pattern 9, all or a part of the background display object changes to the same display mode as the non-specific character image.

Further, the illustrated "specific color element" is displayed by changing at least one of "color tone", "brightness", and "saturation" related to the displayed object. The change of "color tone" is to change to a warm color tone (hereinafter referred to as "warm tone") or a cold color tone (hereinafter referred to as "cool tone"). The change in "brightness" changes to a brightness higher than a predetermined reference lightness value or a lightness lower than a predetermined reference lightness value (which may be different from the lightness value when changing to a high lightness). To let. The change in "saturation" is a saturation value higher than a predetermined reference saturation value, or a predetermined reference saturation value (may be different from the saturation value when changing to a higher saturation value). It is to change to a lower saturation.

The special expression effect patterns 11 and 12 show an example of displaying a character image or the like by changing the above-mentioned specific color element. In pattern 11, the specific character image changes to at least one of warm tone, brightness higher than the reference, and saturation higher than the reference, whereas the non-specific character image changes to the cool tone and the reference. Also changes to at least one display mode of low lightness and substandard saturation. If the specific character image is changed to a warm tone, the non-specific character image is changed to a cool tone, and if the specific character image is changed to a brightness higher than the reference (original display), the non-specific character image is the reference. If the specific character image is changed to a higher saturation than the reference, the brightness is changed to a lower brightness than the non-specific character image reference. That is, the specific character image and the non-specific character image are changed in the same category. In the pattern 12, in addition to the display mode of the pattern 11, all or a part of the background display object is changed in the same category as the non-specific character image.

Further, the illustrated "morphological change" is displayed by changing the form of the displayed object. The term "changing the form" as used herein means, for example, a two-dimensional image to a three-dimensional image that changes the display form from a still image to a moving image or a moving image to a still image by enlarging or reducing the size. It refers to changing from a three-dimensional image to a two-dimensional image, deforming, touching a dramatic image, or making a live image. The special expression effect patterns 13 and 14 show an example of displaying a character image or the like by the above-mentioned "morphological change" processing. In the pattern 13, the form of the specific character image is changed, whereas the non-specific character image is maintained in the same form. On the contrary, in the pattern 14, the form of the non-specific character image is changed, whereas the specific character image is maintained in the same form.

Further, the illustrated "blurring" displays various display objects other than the specific character image related to the advance notice effect by obscuring the outline of the image or applying a mosaic to the image. The special expression effect patterns 15 and 16 show an example of displaying a character image or the like by this "blurring" process. In pattern 15, the non-specific character image is blurred. In the pattern 16, in addition to the non-specific character image, all or a part of the background display object is blurred.

"Additional effect" adds an effect image to a specific character image and displays it.
An effect image is a background image for emphasizing a specific character. For example, it expresses an aura (halo) around the character, or a conspicuous image such as a rising sun flag image on the background of the character. Etc. are displayed. In the pattern 17, the effect image is displayed on the specific character, and in the pattern 18, the effect image is displayed on the specific character, and in order to emphasize the character more, all or part of the background display object is displayed in monochrome color. Change.

In the above, by using the image processing (special expression) of "monochrome", "reversal", "specific color element", "morphological change", "blurring", or "additional effect", various types related to the character notice effect. Although various patterns of the special expression effect for changing the display mode of the display object have been described, a specific display object may be changed by combining a plurality of these image processes. As a result, the display modes of the specific character image and the other images can be remarkably different and contrasted, and the specific character image is emphasized, so that it becomes easy to draw the attention of the player.

In the above description, an example in which the display mode of various display objects is changed from the color display mode to the display mode by various special expressions at the timing when a predetermined time elapses after the appearance of the specific character has been described. At the time of appearance of the character, it may be displayed in a display mode in which a special expression is made from the beginning. That is, the specific character may be displayed in a state in which a special expression such as monochrome color is made instead of color, and the player can be impacted from the time of appearance. In addition, regarding the "timing when a predetermined time has elapsed" when the display mode of various displayed objects changes, some action by a specific character (for example, an action in which a balloon image is displayed and a message of the balloon content is issued). When the time is taken (when you want to draw the player's attention to the specific character that causes the action), before and after the specific advance notice production (reach production, pseudo-ream, etc.) and during the execution, the player participates in the player participation type production The timing may be the timing at which the frame effect button 13 is operated, and the timing at which the display is displayed can be appropriately determined.

In the above, the character notice effect that appears during the symbol variation display game has been described, but it is not limited to the effect that appears during the decorative symbol variation display game, but the effect during the demo screen display and the hit effect during the hit game. It is also possible to bring out an image display effect using a special expression.

FIG. 45 shows a representative example of an effect that can occur as the game progresses and a timing at which an effect using a special expression appears during the effect. The time series display (time t) in the figure is added for convenience of explanation, and is not necessarily the time corresponding to the progress of the game.

With reference to FIG. 45, the game history effect can be displayed while the demo screen is being displayed (time t0 to time t1). When the player operates the frame effect button 13 while the demo screen is displayed, the game history effect appears. In this game history production, as predetermined game information obtained in the previous games, for example, a combination of the winning jackpot type (probability variation jackpot, time saving jackpot), the number of consecutive villas, the reach production type, the number of fluctuations, and the decorative symbol. History (game history from the previous day, game history from the time the power was turned on, etc.) is displayed. In these histories, one or more specific types of game information can be displayed in color, and other game information can be displayed in monochrome. Specifically, as a specific jackpot history information image, the consecutive villa jackpot history and probability variation jackpot during electric support are displayed as a color image, and a single jackpot history information image is displayed as a monochrome image, and the player is interested. Possible history information can be emphasized and displayed in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, during the decorative symbol variation display game (time t1 to time t2), various advance notice effects may appear as shown in the figure. If it is desired to emphasize a specific effect (image) display during these advance notice effects, it is possible to display using the various special expressions described above. For example, when the reach state is reached (time ta to time tb) after being in a state of being in a reach state before the reach effect, the decorative symbol forming the reach state is changed from the normal color display to the monochrome display. By using other images (background images, etc.) as color images, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that "because the reach is different from usual, the expectation of winning may be high". In addition, in the reach production, there is a revival effect that informs that it is a loss once (during the temporary stop state of the decorative symbol after the end of the reach effect (time tf) (after the time tf)), and actually notifies that it was a big hit. When it appears, the combination of decorative symbols in the temporarily stopped state before the revival effect (for example, "767") is displayed in monochrome, and other images (background image, etc.) are displayed in normal color, or vice versa. By displaying with, the decorative design is emphasized and the player feels uncomfortable that the display is different from usual, and then a sudden revival effect (changes the decorative design "767" to "777") appears. By doing so, it is possible to exert an impactful effect. It is possible to emphasize only a part of the decorative symbols (for example, the middle symbol) instead of displaying all the decorative symbols in the temporarily stopped state before the above-mentioned revival effect in color display or monochrome display.

In addition, during the big hit game at time t2 to time t3, hitting effects (OP effect, round effect, ED effect, etc.) as shown in the figure appear, and images using special expressions are also used during these effects. The display effect can be made to appear. For example, if the jackpot type won this time is concealed (whether it is a probabilistic jackpot or a non-probabilistic jackpot is concealed), or if there is a jackpot winning hold in the operation hold ball, information on this is notified in the hit-time production during the jackpot. In order to emphasize the specific character in the in-round effect (time th to ti) and the ending effect (time ti to t3) related to the specific round game, the specific character is displayed in color and other images ( By displaying a background image or the like in black and white, or vice versa, it is possible to give a sense of discomfort to the player (by displaying an effect different from the normal effect) and notify the information. In addition, the above-mentioned specific character may not appear normally (in this example, when it is not a probabilistic jackpot or when there is no jackpot winning hold) as a premier position, or it may appear secretly because the display size is small. In such a case (for example, in the case of the character image h1 as shown in FIG. 41), the character display by the special expression has a strong impact when the player notices the specific character, and has an excellent effect. Can be.

In addition, the effect display (image display effect) by the special expression is the above-mentioned "treasure box effect" according to the first to sixth embodiments and the above-described modifications 3 to 4 in that the player's attention is directed to a specific display object. It is possible to achieve the same effect as the object display (second object display) that acts as a "distracting effect". Therefore, this example may be applied as the "treasure box effect" or the "attention distracting effect" of the modified examples 3 to 4.

The present invention can be applied to a gaming machine provided with display means.

1 Pachinko game machine,
2 front frame,
3 game board,
3a Game area,
4 outer frame,
5 ball guidance rail,
6 glass door,
7 Front operation panel,
8 Upper saucer unit,
9 Upper saucer,
11 Ball lending button,
12 Card return button,
13 frame production button,
13A normal button (first production button),
14 Ball removal button,
15 Launch operation handle,
19 Game ball payout device,
20 Main control unit,
21 External terminal board for frame,
24 Production control unit,
28 Launch control board,
29 Payout control board,
31 power supply board,
32 launcher,
34 Upper start port,
34a Upper start port sensor,
35 Lower start port,
35a lower start port sensor,
36 liquid crystal display device,
37 Ordinary design start port,
37a Ordinary design start port sensor,
38a, 38b special symbol display device,
39c LED display for hold composite display,
39a Ordinary symbol display device,
39b round number display device,
41 Ordinary variable winning device,
41c Ordinary electric accessory solenoid,
43 General winning opening,
43a General winning opening sensor,
44 windmill,
45 decorative lamp,
45a optical display device,
46 speakers,
46a sound generator,
47 Movable wing pieces,
48 center decoration,
49 out mouth,
50 big prize openings,
52a Grand prize opening sensor,
52 Special variable prize device,
52b open door,
52c Grand prize opening solenoid,
61 Movable accessory motor,
62 Revolving light (third movable body accessory),
66 Revolving light button (2nd production button: Lucky Pato),
70 Exhilarating button (3rd production button: rolling button),
73 Movable body 80 Clock-shaped accessory (first movable object),
90 Flower-shaped accessory (second movable accessory),
91 1st movable body,
92 Second movable body,
201 Main control CPU,
202 main control ROM,
203 Main control RAM,
241 production control CPU,
242 production control ROM,
243 Production control RAM,
371 treasure chest image,
372 pushbutton image,
373 Guidance notification image,
374a Right arrow image,
374b Left arrow image.

Claims (1)

Operation means that can be operated by the player,
Identification information display means that can display multiple identification information,
The identification information display control means for displaying and controlling the variable display of the plurality of identification information,
An image display means that can display multiple images and
An image display control means for controlling the display of the plurality of images displayed on the image display means in a predetermined display mode, and
A profit state generating means for generating a profit state advantageous to the player when the variable display result of the plurality of identification information becomes a predetermined specific result is provided.
In a gaming machine capable of performing a specific result suggestion effect suggesting the specific result by the image display means.
The plurality of images
Wherein a displayable during a specific result suggested effect, the first specific image including at least one of the expected low degree title image and manipulation means image as a result of said identification compared to later second specific image,
A second specific image including at least one of a title image and an operation means image that can be displayed during the specific result suggestion effect and has a high expectation of the specific result as compared with the first specific image.
It has the first specific image or the background image displayed on the back side of the second specific image when the first specific image or the second specific image is displayed.
The image display control means
Wherein if displaying the first specific image during a particular result suggests effect, the background image and can be displayed in the normal display mode, and can display the first specific image on the front surface in the normal display mode,
When the second specific image is displayed during the specific result suggestion effect, the background image is displayed in a special display mode colored in black, and the second specific image can be displayed in front of the background image.
When the second specific image is displayed in front of the background image in the special display mode, the second specific image can be displayed in either a normal display mode or an effect display mode accompanied by an effect.
A game machine characterized by that.

Images